Item

MB Building Kit System
Index
PDF- Catalog »item MB Building Kit System«
Instruction Manual
Adobe Acrobat Instruction

Information on This catalogue provides detailed information on all the Unless stated otherwise, the order units used in this
products in the MB Building Kit System. It can be used catalogue are always the smallest unit for a product, i.e.
using the for making orders, but the detailed product information piece, set or cut-off per metre. Details of alternatives
Catalogue and and numerous illustrations mean it is also a useful such as ordering in packaging units etc. can be found in
Ordering Products design and planning tool. the current price list.
The following details must always be provided when Please contact your dealer if you have any questions on
ordering: product name, order unit and order number. technical matters or other aspects.
Key to page layout

A black heading gives the
name of the product, the
product family or the product
group.
A grey heading provides an
additional explanation or The header is used for overall orientation and
repeats the name if the product shows the current section together with the The product description provides information
is continued to a new page. product group name and product family name. on the application and design features.
6. Special Elements 6.5 Work Bench Design
Functional drawing(s) and additional

photo(s) explain the function of the
product or provide notes on its use.
The product photograph shows

the product in a typical
application or in its installed
state.
Any technical data which is specified relates to all products listed afterwards.
The Line symbols provide Parts Container 80x40

information on the suitability Window, PC, transparent / black
of the product for the Profile a = 80 mm b = 40 mm m = 152 g
Line (black figures = suitable,
grey figures = not suitable). PA-GF, black
1 piece The antistatic symbol indicates 0.0.432.73
products that do not build up
Antistatic electrostatic charges.
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.76
Parts Container 120x40

Window, PC, transparent / black
a = 120 mm b = 40 mm m = 200 g
The product view shows all PA-GF, black
important dimensions and
design details such as DIN 1 piece The optical orientation aid helps
0.0.432.74
numbers, screw sizes etc.
you find your way around the
Antistatic catalogue. It shows the
This sets out the technical data PA-GF ELS, black background of the current product
specific to the product. group photo.
1 pce. 0.0.432.77
1st column: 3rd column: 4th column:

• Product group name • Product description • Order
(optional) • Additional photos (optional), functional drawing(s) (optional) number(s)
• Product family name • Product name
(optional) • Technical data
• Product name • Order unit
item Industrietechnik
MB Building Kit und Maschinenbau GmbH
Friedenstraße 107-109
System D-42699 Solingen
Basic Elements
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen Page 48 - 135
Phone +49/212/65 80-300

Fax +49/212/65 80-310
info@item-international.com
March 2001 Edition www.item-international.com
Floor Elements
Page 136 - 155
Fastening Elements
Page 156 - 229
Handles and Locks

Page 230 - 245
Panel Elements
Page 246 - 257
Special Elements
Page 258 - 303
Installation Elements
Page 304 - 329
Dynamic Elements
Page 330 - 431
© item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH 2001
Technical modifications and errors reserved. All rights
reserved. Use of texts and illustrations or reprints of any
kind only permitted with our prior written consent. This
also applies for reproduction, translation or use in
electronic systems.
is a registered trademark of item Industrietechnik Auxiliary Elements
und Maschinenbau GmbH. Page 432 - 449
3
General Information Contents Index
Index 4
Contents Product Overview 6
Practical Applications 14
The Company 20
Applications for MB Building Kit System Mechanical Engineering 28
Enclosure and Guard Systems 34
Work Bench Systems 40
Special Applications and Solutions 44
1. Basic Elements 48
1.1 Profiles 49
1.1.1 Profiles 5 68
1.1.2 Profiles 6 72
1.1.3 Profiles 8 75
1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles 86
1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces 89
1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove 96
1.2.3 Cover for Holes and Bores 101
1.3 Fasteners 102
1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections 106
1.3.2 Angled Connections 122
1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections 126
1.3.4 Butt Connections 129
1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections 132
1.3.6 Secure Connections 135
2. Floor Elements 136
2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded 137
2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded 140
2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet 143
2.2 Castors 150
2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.1 Floor-Fastening Sets 153
2.3.2 Base Plates / Transport Plates 154
3. Fastening Elements 156
3.1 T-Slot Nuts 157
3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts 159
3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles 165
3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.1 Screws and Nuts 168
3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements 176
3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 179
3.3.1 Fastening Panels in the Groove 180
3.3.2 Fastening Panels on the Groove 182
3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles 196
3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.1 Hinges 209
3.4.2 Movable Fasteners 216
4. Handles and Locks 230
4.1 Handles 231
4.2 Grip Systems 234
4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.1 Door Catches 238
4.3.2 Locking Systems 240
4.3.3 Door Locks 241
4
5. Panel Elements 246
5.1 Closed Panels 247
5.1.1 Transparent Panels 248
5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels 249
5.1.3 Modular Panels 251
5.2 Mesh Panels 253
5.3 Panels for Work Bench Design 256
5.4 Accessories for Panel Elements 257
6. Special Elements 258
6.1 Electrical Discharge 259
6.2 Pneumatic Applications 261
6.3 Door Security 268
6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow 270
6.5 Work Bench Design 278
6.6 Lighting 290
6.7 General Accessories 295
7. Installation Elements 304
7.1 Conduits 7.1.1 Conduits E 305
7.1.2 Modular Conduit System 309
7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits 316
7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit 321
7.3 Electronic Boxes 323
7.4 Fasteners for Cables, Hoses and Switches 326
8. Dynamic Elements 330
8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.1 Roller Guides 331
8.1.2 C-Rail Systems 351
8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems 362
8.1.4 Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes 367
8.1.5 Ball-Bush Block Guides 373
8.1.6 Shafts 381
8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides 382
8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives 386
8.2.2 Chain Drives 401
8.2.3 Ball Screw Units 406
8.2.4 Bevel Gearbox 409
8.2.5 Accessories for Bevel Gearbox 411
8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.1 Couplings 415
8.3.2 Miscellaneous 422
9. Auxiliary Elements 432
9.1 Design and Ordering Software 433
9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Connections for Basic Elements 435
9.2.2 Connections for Fastening Elements 438
9.2.3 Connections for Dynamic Elements 440
9.2.4 General Tools 442
9.3 Services 445
9.3.1 Saw Cuts 446
9.3.2 Connection Processing 446
9.3.3 Counter Boring and Tapping 449
9.3.4 Processing of Shafts 450
Alphabetic Register 452
5
General Information Index Product Overview
Basic Elements
Page 48 onwards
Page 68 Page 72 Page 75
Page 86 Page 89 Page 96 Page 97 Page 100
Page 106 Page 108 Page 110 Page 112
Page 135
6
Floor Elements
Page 136 onwards
Fastening Elements
Page 156 onwards
7
8
Handles and Locks
Page 230 onwards
Panel Elements
Page 246 onwards
9
Special Elements
Page 258 onwards
10
Installation Elements
Page 304 onwards
11
Page 327 Page 328
Dynamic Elements
Page 330 onwards
12
Auxiliary Elements
Page 432 onwards
13
General Information Index Practical Applications: Mechanical Engineering
Where can I find The elements of the MB Building Kit System are used in Various forms of fastening elements are used to connect
a wide range of combinations for constructing machines, functional units and accessories which can be integrated
MB Elements for: jigs and equipment. The various components are with ease thanks to the flexibility of the system elements.
Mechanical Engineering grouped together in this catalogue according to their Dynamic elements such as guides and drives assist
function. automation. These are built directly onto the basic
The frame structures for mechanical engineering elements, making intelligent use of existing system
applications are essentially built using components from elements.
the Basic Elements product group. Profiles of different Electrical and pneumatic power can be supplied reliably
product lines and sizes can be combined into basic and easily through the installation elements.
frames with the aid of special connectors. As well as
withstanding applied forces, these basic frames can also
be used for the direct attachment of panels or safety
guards / enclosures from the Panel Elements product
group in order to provide passive protection against
unauthorized access or moving components. The panel
elements making up the machine frame can also take the
form of swing, sliding or lifting doors.
Stable adjustable feet from the Floor Elements product
group provide a safe and reliable support capable of
accomodating the loads which arise and also provide a
means for compensating for unevenness in the floor.
Grips (Handles and Locks)
Angle Elements (Basic Elements)
Aluminium profiles (Basic Elements)
Fasteners (Basic Elements)
Hinges, Heavy Duty (Basic Elements)
Angled/Flat Profiles (Basic Elements) Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)
Anti-Vibration Inserts (Floor Elements)
14
Timing-Belt Reverse Units (Dynamic Synchroniser Shafts (Dynamic Holders for Cables and Hoses
Elements) Elements) (Installation Elements)
Floor Fastener (Floor Elements)
Conveyor Rollers (Special Elements)
Conduits (Installation Elements)
Panels (Panel Elements)
Roller Guides (Dynamic Elements)
15
General Information Index Practical Applications: Enclosure and Guard Systems
Where can I find Enclosure and guard system elements cover a broad elements use independent stand profiles for attaching
spectrum of frames and frame constructions to prevent panels and frames. Special components are available for
MB Elements for: unauthorised access by personnel to an ongoing these guard units.
Enclosure and Guard production process or contact with moving components.
They also prevent unauthorised access to products etc.
Systems
Enclosures and guards are constructed from system
elements of various product groups. By combining basic
elements, floor elements and, in particular, elements for
rigid and movable panel fasteners or panel elements
themselves, it is possible to create enclosure and guard
systems which comply with relevant safety standards
and can also be customised to the user‘s specific needs.
A whole range of components facilitate the process of
connecting panels to frame structures, constructing
lifting, sliding and swing doors and providing electrical
security for these doors. The complete compatibility of
the products in the MB Building Kit System is reflected
in the functionality of the actual handling system
merging seamlessly with the enclosure and guard
function. Machine safety systems employ the profiles of Slide Guide Strips (Special Elements)
the machine base as support for the panels and frames
which are either fixed or suspended or are attached by
normal or heavy-duty hinges.
In contrast, guard systems which are installed at a
specific distance from the particular production facility
(e.g. cell guarding) or are used as room partitioning
C-Rail (Dynamic Elements)
Security Limit Switch (Special Elements)
Hinges (Fastening Elements)
Grips (Handles and Locks)
Locking Systems (Handles and Locks)
16
Acrylic Glass (Panel Elements) Clamp Profiles (Fastening Elements) Fasteners (Basic Elements)
Sealing Profiles (Fastening Elements)
Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements)
Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)
Hangers (Fastening Elements)
17
General Information Index Practical Applications: Work Bench Systems
Where can I find The item MB System provides the ideal basis for The compatibility of all products in the MB Building Kit
constructing state-of-the-art work benches. The MB System supports a whole range of solutions with diffe-
MB Elements for: Building Kit System can be used to design a whole rent requirements and degrees of automation. Work
Work Bench Systems range of work benches - from simple standard benches benches are constructed using components from the
to special ergonomic solutions to meet specific Basic Elements, Panel Elements and Installation Ele-
requirements. ments product groups or in combination with other
The design requirements for ergonomic working product groups.
environments in manufacturing, assembly and admini-
strative areas range from provision of a simple working
surface to a semi-automated production environment
where the work bench is integrated into a production
facility.
Basic elements can be used to create a simple work
bench to provide a basis for jigs or function as a
working surface. The range of possibilities also extends
to the ergonomically designed TRIGO 272 Work Bench
System, which can be integrated into the production
flow and customised to the operator and his specific
needs.
The item MB Building Kit System can also be used to
provide flexible, cost-effective solutions in non-
production areas. Special elements are used for
designing work benches for offices and storage areas,
but also in material flow processes.
18
Conduits (Installation Elements)
Light Fittings (Special Elements) Sockets (Installation Elements)
Caps (Basic Elements)
Rests (Special Elements)
Runners (Special Elements)
Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements) Table Tops (Panel Elements)
Fasteners (Basic Elements)
Parts Containers (Special Elements) TRIGO 272 Work Bench
19
Corporate Headquarters, main building / item international Solingen
20
When item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH The modular design of the MB Building Kit System
The Company was established in 1976 in Solingen, its initial areas of
operation were the design and construction of
ensures that the elements of the individual product
groups can be combined at will.
customised machines and assembly equipment. Over the years, item has become the market leader on
From the very outset, item set itself a prime goal - the market for modular building kit systems. The
to reduce the cost of building machines in our own standard values which item defined for e.g. modular
company by rationalising machining and assembly dimensions and system grooves are now accepted
operations and by standardising components. worldwide and are often copied.
This resulted directly in the item MB Building Kit By constantly developing the MB Building Kit System
System - a machine-building kit for labour-saving and and its range of products, we are ensuring that item will
cost-cutting constructions of various kinds, from maintain its technological lead in the years ahead.
assembly work benches and facilities to automated
production equipment.
Functional, economic and flexible in use - these are just
some of the many requirements which need to be met by
an industrial building kit system covering the wide
spectrum of modern plant and production installations.
item international
1
1 Main entrance and reception / item
international Solingen
2 Training facilities / item international
Solingen
3 Exhibition / item international
Solingen
4 Purchases and Distribution / item
international Hilden
3
©2000-ANJA&BABBEL&OLLI
21
General Information The Company Product Philosophy
Product All products in the MB Building Kit System are Details of all materials can be found under the individual
developed, manufactured and supplied using the product descriptions.
Philosophy strictest quality criteria. The extremely high level of innovation is reflected in the
The permissible production tolerances are extremely numerous patented products in the MB Building Kit
tight and in some cases lie well below industry standard System.
tolerance levels. By using physical principles to best
effect, item has optimized the relationship between
material usage and system element stability.
Systematic quality management ensures complete
compliance with agreed standard values. And our high
quality naturally also extends to the service portfolio of
each individual item sales partner.
In developing the MB Building Kit System, item pays
particular attention to ensuring the environmental
compatibility of all products. The system elements can
be reused and, where the technology allows, are
produced from only single materials.
This means that the individual components of the
various units can be disassembled later for recycling. All
aluminium profiles can be recycled using procedures 1 Champagne glasses
which are entirely eco-friendly. Plastic and metal parts 2 Cover profile system
all bear details of the materials used.
3 Parts Containers
4 Ladies‘ and gentlemen‘s watches
2 3
When developing new products, particular emphasis is
placed on innovation and design.
The products in the MB Building Kit System have
received many international design awards over the
years.
item‘s design credentials do not stop with the
development and design of industrial components, but
also include highly successful design products for the
consumer goods market.
22
item design awards from 1986 to 2000:
> if ’86 / Die gute Industrieform
for elements in the item MB Building Kit System
> if ’89 / Industrieform Hanover
for item ladies’ and gentlemen’s watches
> Design Innovations ’90 / Award for exceptional
design quality, North-Rhine Westphalia Design Centre
for item servomotors 90/250W
> if ’91 / Industrial Design Forum Hanover
for item ball-bearing guide bushes
for the item HITRAIN 200 modular transfer system
for item Bevel Gearbox
for the TRIGO Work Bench System
for the item cover profile system
for item Parts Containers
6 7
5 TRIGO 272 Work Bench from the
TRIGO Work Bench System
6 Bevel Gear Box
7 Servo motors 90/250W
8 Ball-bearing guide bushes
23
General Information The Company Service Spectrum and Sales Germany
Service Spectrum Numerous local service centres provide users with a

broad spectrum of services:
and Sales Germany
> Fast delivery of all system elements
> Elements machined ready for assembly
> CAD-assisted project engineering, tendering and
design of installations and equipment
> Provision of construction kits
> Turnkey solutions with system elements
> Turnkey installation and commissioning
> Tools, jigs and machines
> CAD software for project management
> User support in resolving special needs
> Provision of technical documentation
> Internal and external training courses
1
3 4
1 CAD-assisted project management
2 Training in the MB Building Kit
System
3 Aluminium profile cut-off unit
4 High-bay warehouse for MB Building
Kit system elements
5 Assembly service
6 User consultancy and services
either at item or at the customer’s
6
24
7 8
10 11
7 item Industrietechnik und
Maschinenbau GmbH, Solingen
8 item Nossen
9 item Industrietechnik und
Maschinenbau GmbH, Ulm
10 item Ölbronn
11 item Freiburg
9
item has a decentralised sales structure in Germany.
Local sales and service centres provide customers with
a full range of services to provide optimum support in
all situations.
7
8
10
9
11
25
General Information The Company International Sales
International With branches, sales partners and a comprehensive

network of service centres worldwide, item can assure
Sales users of continuous support and rapid availability of
products in their direct vicinity.
You can find item sales partners in the following
countries:
> Australia
> Austria
> Belgium
> Brazil
> Canada
> Czech Republic
> Denmark
> Finland
1
> France 1 Italy
> Greece 2 UK
> Hungary 3 Japan

4 USA
> Ireland
5 Austria
> Israel 6 Belgium
> Italy 7 Spain
> Japan 2
> Netherlands For details of where to find your local service partner,
refer to our web site at www.item-international.com.
> New Zealand
> Norway
> Poland
> Singapore
> Slovenia
> South Africa
> Spain
> Sweden
> Switzerland
> UK
> USA
26
3 4
5 7
27
28
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Mechanical Engineering
Modular components from the MB Building Kit System group in order to provide passive protection against
Applications for MB for system solutions in the field of mechanical
engineering.
unauthorised access or moving components. The panel
elements making up the machine frame can also take the
Building Kit System The MB Building Kit System is a cost-effective and flexi- form of swing, sliding or lifting doors.
ble solution for producing a whole range of fixtures and Stable adjustable feet from the Floor Elements product
equipment up to and including automated handling group provide a safe and reliable support capable of
systems. The products of the MB Building Kit System accommodating the loads which arise and also provide a
make the perfect solution for everything from simple means of compensating for uneven floors.
basic frames and testing stations to complex handling The structures can then be combined into fully
units. functional, automated units using dynamic components
The frame structures for mechanical engineering created from elements in fhe Dynamic Elements product
applications are essentially built using components from group.
the Basic Elements product group. Profiles of different
product lines and sizes can be combined into basic
frames with the aid of special connectors. As well as
withstanding applied forces, these basic frames can also
be used for the direct attachment of panels or safety
guards / enclosures from the Panel Elements product
Mechanical Engineering
2
1 Handling system for removing
components
2 Elevator unit for a workpiece store
in an indexing transport system
29
29
3 Workpiece carrier transport system

4 Integrated inspection station for
electrical tools
5 Vertical store for workpiece carriers
6 Workpiece carrier transport system
for feeding workstations
4 5
30
7 Engine assembly line
8 Horizontal and vertical axes for
high loads
9 Handling system for removing iron
mesh from a welding machine
10 Automatic storage and assembly
system
7 8
10
31
11 Fully automatic station for

assembling gear boxes
12 Fully automatic de-palletising
system with integrated sorting station
13 Automatic thread tapping station
(detail) for inserting threads in the end
faces of aluminium profiles
14 Fully automatic assembly system
for kitchen appliances
11
12
13 14
32
15 Loading and unloading station for
wood laminating press
16 Device for machining the ends of
aluminum profiles
17 Protected loading / unloading
station in an automated warehouse
18 Engine assembly line
19 Handling system for lengthy
products
15
16 17
19
18
33
34
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Enclosure and Guard Systems
Modular components from the MB Building Kit System in the functionality of the actual handling system
Applications for MB for system solutions in the field of enclosure and guard
systems.
merging seamlessly with the enclosure and guard
function. Machine safety systems employ the profiles of
Building Kit System Both guard units for machine and production equipment the machine base as support for the panels and frames
which are either fixed or suspended or are attached by
and room partitioning elements in offices and sales
areas can be created quickly and cheaply using the MB normal or heavy-duty hinges.
Building Kit System. In contrast, guard systems which are installed at a
Enclosure and guard system elements cover a broad specific distance from the particular production facility
spectrum of frame constructions to prevent unauthorised (e.g. cell guarding) or are used as room partitioning
access by personnel to an ongoing production process elements use independent stand profiles for attaching
or contact with moving components. They also prevent panels and frames.
unauthorised access to products etc.
A whole range of components facilitate the process of
connecting panels to frame structures, constructing
lifting, sliding and swing doors and providing electrical
security for these doors. The complete compatibility of
the products in the MB Building Kit System is reflected
Enclosure and Guard

Systems
2
1 Large-capacity security enclosure
for a storage area
2 Elevator unit for workpiece carrier
35
35
3
3 Automatic palletising system with 6 Protection of a production facility
transparent protective enclosure against unauthorised access and
providing a full view of the production contamination
process
4 Automatic handling system with
integrated safety guard
5 Security enclosure for a large
storage area
36
7 Display case with transparent
panels
8 Protected machine for mechanical
processing of armature commutators
for electric motors
9 Separating off an access route for
heavy forklift trucks
37
10 11
12
10 Lifting door guarding a processing
machine
11 Flexible modular stations with
direct integration into a transfer system
12 Deep drawing press with integrated
guard unit
13 Automatic storage for aluminium
profiles with handling system and
integrated protective mesh frame
13
38
14 15
16
14 Palletising station for stacking print
products on a transport pallet, with
integrated guard unit
15 Automatic assembly station with
integrated guard areas
16 Loading and unloading unit for
multi-level wood laminating press
17 Fencing off the danger zones on a
robot assembly line
17
39
TRIGO 272 Work Bench System with ergonomically designed table top geometry and independent power-adjusted levels for the footrest, table top and tool rails
40
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Work Bench Systems
Modular components from the MB Building Kit System Work benches are constructed using components from
Applications for MB for system solutions in the field of work bench systems. the Basic Elements, Panel Elements and Installation Ele-
ments product groups or in combination with other
The MB Building Kit System can be used to design a
Building Kit System whole range of work benches - from simple standard product groups.
benches to special ergonomic solutions to meet specific The MB Building Kit System also includes various
requirements. special products for exclusive use in work bench
The design requirements for ergonomic working systems which have been designed with ergonomic
environments in manufacturing, assembly and admini- needs in mind.
strative areas range from provision of a simple working
surface to a semi-automated production environment
where the work bench is integrated into a production
facility.
The compatibility of all products in the MB Building Kit
System supports a whole range of solutions with diffe-
rent requirements and degrees of automation.
Work Bench Systems
1 2
1 Work bench system in a helicopter
production facility
2 Grouped work benches for
standing or sitting in the assembly
area
41
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Work Bench Systems
3 Work benches integrated into a

production workflow
4 Work bench with tool rail
5 Work benches for standing or
sitting in the assembly area
6 TRIGO 272 Work Bench equipped
for office use
7 Work benches in an assembly cell
8 Work bench with pull-out drawer at
a CNC milling machine
4 5 6
7 8
42
9
9 Work benches integrated into a
production line, with materials
supplied on special trolleys adapted to
the specific transport and work bench
requirements
10 Assembly work bench with material
feed and conveyance of the assembled
products by means of roller conveyors
11 Mobile order-picking bench with
integrated scales in a small parts
warehouse
12 Laptop assembly line
10
11 12
43
Digital length measuring system on a roller conveyor
44
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Special Applications and Solutions
Modular components from the MB Building Kit System For exhibitions and presentations, elements such as
Applications for MB for system applications in the field of special
applications and solutions.
brochure stands, display cases and other sales aids can
be produced cheaply and flexibly.
Building Kit System This is where the tremendous versatility of the elements This great diversity is also ideal for private use, where
in the MB Building Kit System comes to the fore. the solutions are only limited by the customer’s imagi-
The system elements can be used to develop solutions nation. A perfect, customised solution can be found for
that go far beyond standard applications in the fields of almost all applications. The following pages show a few
mechanical engineering, enclosure and guard systems examples.
and work bench systems.
MB Building Kit System components can be used to
construct laboratory appliances, systems for producing
electronic components or packaging machines, but also
for highly complex constructions for use in clean rooms.
In the office furniture sector, MB system components
can be used to create a whole range of interesting,
customised system furniture such as filing cabinets,
sideboards, etc.
Special Applications and

Solutions
2
1 Application in the electrical /
electronics industry
2 Fitting out a wheelchair
3 Laboratory apparatus in the
foodstuffs research sector
45
General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Special Applications and Solutions
4 5
4 Picture frame from aluminium
profiles from the MB Building Kit System
5 Garage door guide using C-Rail
6 Filing cabinet for office applications
7 Garden steps from aluminium profiles
8 Fitted kitchen
9 Socket strip from conduit elements
10 Brochure stand
6 7
9 10
46
11 12
13 14
11 Handrail in private household
12 Sand pit
13 Office furniture
14 Stand for outboard motors
15 Kickboard
16 Office cabinet systems
17 Aluminium ladder and roof rack
made from MB system elements
15
16 17
47
48
1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles
The basic elements of the MB Building Kit System

1. Basic Elements consist of profiles, connecting elements and caps.
1.1 Profiles The extruded aluminium construction profiles are The aluminium alloy is resistant to weathering and many
provided with grooves which can be used in conjunction chemicals.
with connecting elements and can also perform a whole The surface of the profiles has been specially treated to
range of additional functions. make it permanently scratch-proof and has also been
corrosion-protected.
All profiles have been designed to deliver maximum
strength for the materials used.
Core Bore and Groove Using high-tensile aluminium profiles, any type of
structure can be assembled cleanly and rapidly without
System further surface processing. All profiles are anodized and
are produced with modular dimensions to ensure that
they are compatible with specific Lines. In practice, they
are re-usable and the material is suitable for recycling.
The MB Building Kit System contains construction
profiles with very small sections from only 20x10 mm
and weights of 0.35 kg/m to profiles with external
Standard Fastener in the core bore Mounting an Adjustable Foot
dimensions and weights of up to 160x80 mm and
13.52 kg/m respectively.
Profiles are also available for special applications. You
can find details of these in the corresponding sections of
the catalogue.
The aluminium profiles are produced in three Lines of
different sizes, the width of groove being used for the
designation:
Line 5: Groove width = 5 mm; Modular dim. 20 mm
Mounting with Multiblock T-Slot Nut in the profile groove Line 6: Groove width = 6 mm; Modular dim. 30 mm
Line 8: Groove width = 8 mm; Modular dim. 40 mm .
Within the Lines, uniform modular dimensions mean
that the accessory elements and combinations of
profiles are fully interchangeable.
All the profiles feature longitudinal grooves to
accommodate connecting elements and for attaching
accessories at any position. The profile grooves are also
suitable for holding cables or hoses.
Groove cover with Cover Profile Al Panel retention
The profiles are also characterised by through core
bores for use with standard fastening elements and to
accommodate accessory components. All the core bores
and profile cavities can also be used as compressed air
ducts.
Guiding shaft assembly Guiding movable elements
Selection of Profile Line When selecting the appropriate profile Line, you need to For areas with lower loads, “light duty” profiles are
consider the maximum profile load anticipated. The available in Line 6 and “light duty” and “E” (Economy)
maximum load of the profiles in the selected Line should profiles in Line 8. This ensures that all components can
be taken into account along with the deflection and still be used throughout, and that the construction is not
material stress, and sufficient safety reserves should be only cost-effective, but can also accommodate the
allowed for. appropriate stresses.
49
Recommended Assembly Where possible, the vertical profiles should extend

through the entire height; this simplifies connection of
Configurations the floor elements and improves the overall appearance.
Vertical through profiles Structures should be designed to withstand the loads

F likely to be placed on them, i.e. by avoiding torsional
stress at the connection points and by giving preference
F to positive locking over friction resistance in the
direction of applied force in all the connections.
F Where possible, profiles should be installed so that the
largest section dimension opposes the load in order to
achieve the maximum flexural strength.
Avoid breaks in the supporting profile when installing
Load-resistant support Preferred orientation of profile additional attachments; the benefits include greater
stability, fewer cuts, fewer connections and reduced
assembly time.
Extend the profiles only with the aid of the corresponding
fastening elements and, where possible, support them at
the joints.
Attachment on the profile

If anodized surfaces are mounted in contact with each
other, we recommend that these surfaces be lubricated in
order to prevent any noise being generated by friction
between the anodized surfaces.
If profile-based structures are likely to be exposed to
extremes of stress, e.g. impact loads, which might cause
displacement at the points of attachment, pin elements
should be installed in order to provide additional
support.
Anodized surfaces mounted on each Support for a joint
other
Technical Data Extruded Profile Tolerances

Symbol Al Mg Si 0.5 F 25 Outer dimensions depending on size ± 0.2 mm to 0.5 mm
Material number 3.3206.72 Deformations such as straightness and flatness
Status: Artificially aged tolerance to DIN 17615 Part 3.
Mechanical details Total length of profiles in packaging units:
(Values apply only in press direction) 6000 mm, effectively 6010 + 100 mm
Tensile strength Rm: min. 245 N/mm2 3000 mm, effectively 3010 + 100 mm
0.2 limit Rp 0.2 min. 195 N/mm2 2000 mm, effectively 2010 + 100 mm
Density 2.7 kg/dm3 Surface
Ductile yield A5 min.10 % The aluminium profiles are natural or black anodized
Ductile yield A10 min. 8 % and are therefore permanently resistant to scratching
Linear coefficient of and corrosion.
expansion: 23.6x10-6 1/K Surface with matt finish (E 6), anodized and compressed
Mod. of elasticity approx. 70,000 N/mm2 oxidation.
Modulus of rigidity approx. 25,000 N/mm2 Minimum layer thickness 10 μm, layer hardness 250 -
Hardness approx. 75 HB - 2.5/187.5 350 HV.
This all-round hard anodized surface covering makes the
saw cut virtually burr-free, so that it does not require
remachining.
All standard Profiles, Profiles light and Profiles E of all

Lines feature defined points of support on the profile
exterior and inclined groove flanks.
The defined points of support ensure a firm and stable
connection with all other components. The controlled
elastic deformation of the groove flanks pre-tensions the
fastening screw in all operating states and protects the
connection against vibration.
50
Profiles 5
Core Bore and Groove Modular dimension/position and dimensional and

positional tolerances of grooves and core bores as a
System function of the profile‘s exterior dimension.
The ø 4.3 mm core bore for M5 is reborable up to max.

ø 6 mm or M6.
Positional tolerance
Groove [n] Core bore [m]
Profiles 5
20x20 0.15 0.20
40x20, 40x40,
60x20, 60x40, 80x20 0.15 0.30
Tensile Loading Incline of groove flank:

Profiles 5 = 0.10 mm
Geometry
Profiles 5 Profiles 5 with closed grooves
51
Profiles 5 The following equations apply for calculating deflection f: An approximate calculation of the deflection is possible
with the help of the nomogram shown on the right. The
Determination of the Profile Example load 1 example shown is worked through in the direction of the
Deflection arrow to determine the deflection.
F x l3
f = ______________________ Based on the given allowable maximum deflection, the
3 x E x I x 104 nomogram calculation procedure can be reversed in
order to determine the required profile sizes or
maximum permissible loads.
Example load 2
Example:
F x l3
f = ______________________ Given:
48 x E x I x 104 F = 1000 N
l = 500 mm
Iy = 5.14 cm4 (Profile 5 40x20, edgewise)
Example load 3 Find:
F x l3 f = Deflection in mm
______________________
f = Results:
192 x E x I x 104 Example load 1
f @ 11.6 mm
Example load 2
f @ 0.72 mm
Example load 3
f @ 0.18 mm
The following equations are to be used for calculating For an approximate calculation of the deflection caused
the deflection caused by the dead weight: by the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F in
As example load 1 the nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.
F x l3
______________________
f =
8 x E x I x 104
As example load 2 Check of the bending stress

5 x F x l3 M b
f = ______________________
s = ________________________
384 x E x I x 104 W x 103
s = Bending stress in N/mm2

As example load 3 Mb = Max. bending moment in Nmm
W = Resistance moment in cm3
F x l3
______________________
f =
384 x E x I x 104 The calculated bending stress s must be compared with
the permissible bending stress sperm.
Rp 0.2
F = Load in N sperm= ________________________
l = Free profile length in mm S

I = Moment of inertia in cm4
E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm2 The safety factor S must be selected depending on the
EAI = 70,000 N/mm2 required application conditions.
52
53
Profiles 5 The following equations apply for calculating the torsion The example shown on the nomogram opposite is based
angle J: on the free profile length and a given torsional moment.
Determination of the Example load 1 The result is the torsion angle as a deformation of Profile
Torsion Angle 5 40x40.
180° x M x l
t
J = _________________________ It is naturally also possible to use the nomogram in
p x G x It x 104 reverse and begin with a maximum permissible torsion
to calculate the required profile sizes or the maximum
loading moments for a specified profile length.
Example load 2
180° x M x l
t
J = _________________________
p x 4 x G x It x 104 Example:
Given:
Where: Mt = 20 Nm
l = 500 mm
Mt = Torsional moment in Nmm It = 5.42 cm4 (Profile 5 40x40)
l = Free profile length in mm
It = Moment of inertia in cm4 Find:
(Values determined by experiment) J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees
G = Modulus of rigidity in N/mm2 Results:
GAI = 25,000 N/mm2 Example load 1
J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees J @ 0.42°
Example load 2
J @ 0.11°
Check of the torsional stress

In practice, the criterion for a profile to fail under a
torsional load is less the fact that the permissible
torsional stress is exceeded, but rather the presence of
excessive twist (torsion angle) even though it is still
within the elastic limit. This deformation greatly impairs
correct functioning of the components. Consequently, a
more torsionally rigid profile must be selected long
before the permissible stress values are reached.
54
55
Profiles 6
Core Bore and Modular dimension/position and dimensional and

Groove System function of the profile‘s exterior dimension.
The ø 5 mm core bore for M6 is reborable up to Positional tolerance

max. ø 8 mm or M8.
Profiles 6
30x30 0.15 0.20
30x30-45°, 60x30
60x60, 120x30 0.15 0.30
120x60 0.20 0.40
Profiles 6
with closed grooves
30x30 0.15 0.30
60x30 0.20 0.40
56
Incline of groove flank:
Tensile Loading
Profiles 6 Profiles 6 light
Geometry
Profiles 6
Profiles 6 light Profiles 6 light with closed grooves
57
Profiles 6 The following equations apply for calculating An approximate calculation of the deflection is possible
deflection f: with the help of the nomogram shown on the right. The
Determination of the Example load 1 example shown is worked through in the direction of the
Profile Deflection arrow to determine the deflection.
F x l3
Example load 2 Example:

3
Fxl Given:
______________________
f = F = 4500 N
48 x E x I x 104 l = 500 mm
Iy = 21.22 cm4 (Profile 6 60x30 light, edgewise)
Example load 3
Find:
______________________
f =
192 x E x I x 104 Results:
Example load 1
f @ 12.6 mm
The following equations are to be used for calculating Example load 2

the deflection caused by the dead weight: f @ 0.79 mm
As example load 1
Example load 3
F x l3 f @ 0.20 mm
______________________
f =
8 x E x I x 104
For an approximate calculation of the deflection caused
by the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F in
the nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.
As example load 2
5 x F x l3
f = ______________________ Check of the bending stress
384 x E x I x 10 4
M b
s = ________________________
W x 103
As example load 3
F x l3 Mb = Max. bending moment in Nmm
f = ______________________ W = Resistance moment in cm3
384 x E x I x 104 The calculated bending stress s must be compared with
the permissible bending stress sperm .
Rp 0.2
F = Load in N sperm= ________________________

E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm2 The safely factor S must be selected depending on the
58
59
180° x M x l
t
J = ________________________ It is naturally also possible to use the nomogram in
Example load 2
180° x M x l
t
J = ____________________________
p x 4 x G x It x 104 Example:
Given:
Where: Mt = 5 Nm
l = 1000 mm
Mt = Torsional moment in Nmm It = 12.23 cm4 (Profiles 6 120x30)
It = Moment of inertia in cm4
(Values determined by experiment) Find:
G = Modulus of rigidity in N/mm2 J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees
GAI = 25,000 N/mm2
J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees Results:
Example load 1
J @ 0.09°
Example load 2
J @ 0.02°
Checking the torsional stress

torsional load is less the fact that the permissible
torsional stress is exceeded, but rather the presence of
excessive deformation in the area of elasticity (torsion
angle). This deformation greatly impairs correct
functioning of the components. Consequently, a more
torsionally rigid profile must be selected long before the
permissible stress values are reached.
60
61
Profiles 8
Core Bore and Groove Modular dimension/position and dimensional and

System function of the profile‘s exterior dimension.
The ø 6.8 mm core bore for M8 of Profiles 8 and Profiles

Positional tolerance
8 light is reborable up to max. ø 13 mm or M12.
Profiles 8
40x40 0.15 0.20
40x40-45°, 80x40 0.15 0.30
80x80-45°, 80x80, 120x40 0.20 0.40
160x40 0.20 0.50
120x80, 160x80 0.20 0.60
Profiles 8
with closed grooves
40x40, 80x40, 80x80 0.15 0.30
80x80-45°,160x40,160x80 0.30 0.60
62
Incline of groove flank:
Tensile Loading
Profiles 8 Profiles 8 light
Profiles 8 E
Geometry
Profiles 8 Profiles 8 light Profiles 8 E
Profiles 8 light with closed grooves Profiles 8 E with closed grooves
63
Profiles 8 The following equations apply for calculating An approximate calculation of the deflection is possible
deflection f: with the help of the nomogram shown on the right. The
F x l3
Example load 2
F x l3 Example:
______________________
f =
48 x E x I x 104 Given:
F = 10,000 N
l = 500 mm
Iy = 69.44 cm4 (Profile 8 80x40 light, edgewise)
Example load 3
Find:
______________________
f =
192 x E x I x 10 4
Results:
Example load 1
f @ 8.56 mm
Example load 2
f @ 0.53 mm
The following equations are to be used for calculating
the deflection caused by the dead weight: Example load 3
f @ 0.13 mm
As example load 1
For an approximate calculation of the deflection caused
Fxl 3 by the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F in
f = ______________________ the nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.
8 x E x I x 104
As example load 2 Check of the bending stress

M b
5 x F x l3 s = ________________________
______________________
f = W x 103
384 x E x I x 104
Mb = Max. bending moment in Nmm
As example load 3 W = Resistance moment in cm3
F x l3
f = ______________________ The calculated bending stress s must be compared with
384 x E x I x 10 4 the permissible bending stress sperm .
Rp 0.2
F = Load in N sperm= ________________________
E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm2 The safety factor S must be selected depending on the
64
65
180° x M x l
t
J = ________________________ It is naturally also possible to use the nomogram in
Example load 2
180° x M x l
t Example:
J = ________________________
p x 4 x G x It x 104 Given:
Mt = 20 Nm
l = 2000 mm
Where: It = 136.98 cm4 (Profile 8 80x80)
Mt = Torsional moment in Nmm
It = Moment of inertia in cm4 Find:
(Values determined by experiment) J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees
G = Modulus of rigidity in N/mm2
GAI = 25,000 N/mm2 Results:
J = Torsion angle in decimal degrees Example load 1
J @ 0.07°
Example load 2
J @ 0.02°
Checking the torsional stress

torsional load is less the fact that the permissible torsional
stress is exceeded, but rather the presence of excessive
deformation in the area of elasticity (torsion angle). This
deformation greatly impairs correct functioning of the
components. Consequently, a more torsionally rigid
profile must be selected long before the permissible
stress values are reached.
66
67
1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.1 Profiles 5
1.1.1 Profiles 5 Profiles 5 are ideal for lightweight constructions of all

kinds. The small exterior dimensions ensure particularly
Modular compact jigs, covers and handling equipment. The full
Dimensions functionality of the building kit is retained.
(Basis 20 mm),
Open and Closed
Grooves
Profiles with closed grooves are suitable for

constructions where particular emphasis is placed on
appearance and ease of cleaning.
Profile 5 20x20
A = 1.80 cm2 I = 0.72 cm4
It = 0.13 cm4
m = 0.48 kg/m W = 0.72 cm3
Cut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.370.03
Cut-off max. 3000 mm, black 0.0.370.15
Profile 5 20x20 1N
A = 1.85 cm2 Ix = 0.74 cm4 Iy = 0.77 cm4
It = 0.20 cm4
m = 0.50 kg/m Wx = 0.74 cm3 Wy = 0.74 cm3
Profile 5 20x20 2N90

A = 1.91 cm2 Ix = 0.78 cm4 Iy = 0.78 cm4
It = 0.42 cm4
m = 0.51 kg/m Wx = 0.76 cm3 Wy = 0.76 cm3

A = 1.90 cm2 Ix = 0.74 cm4 Iy = 0.82 cm4
It = 0.32 cm4
m = 0.51 kg/m Wx = 0.74 cm3 Wy = 0.82 cm3
Profile 5 40x20
A = 3.32 cm2 Ix = 1.41 cm4 Iy = 5.14 cm4
It = 0.97 cm4
m = 0.89 kg/m Wx = 1.41 cm3 Wy = 2.57 cm3
Profile 5 40x20 2N
A = 3.38 cm2 Ix = 1.47 cm4 Iy = 5.21 cm4
It = 1.41 cm4
m = 0.91 kg/m Wx = 1.44 cm3 Wy = 2.61 cm3
68
A = 3.38 cm2 Ix = 1.40 cm4 Iy = 5.46 cm4
It = 1.11 cm4
m = 0.91 kg/m Wx = 1.40 cm3 Wy = 2.73 cm3

A = 3.42 cm2 Ix = 1.48 cm4 Iy = 5.37 cm4
It = 1.64 cm4
m = 0.92 kg/m Wx = 1.44 cm3 Wy = 2.66 cm3

A = 3.46 cm2 Ix = 1.56 cm4 Iy = 5.30 cm4
It = 2.17 cm4
m = 0.93 kg/m Wx = 1.56 cm3 Wy = 2.65 cm3
Profile 5 40x40
A = 5.14 cm2 I = 9.30 cm4
It = 5.42 cm4
m = 1.39 kg/m W = 4.65 cm3
Profile 5 60x20
A = 4.76 cm2 Ix = 2.06 cm4 Iy = 16.09 cm4
It = 1.54 cm4
m = 1.28 kg/m Wx = 2.06 cm3 Wy = 5.36 cm3
Profile 5 60x40
A = 7.67 cm2 Ix =13.52 cm4 Iy = 28.40 cm4
It = 8.15 cm4
m = 2.07 kg/m Wx = 6.76 cm3 Wy = 9.09 cm3
Profile 5 80x20
A = 6.19 cm2 Ix = 2.72 cm4 Iy = 36.08 cm4
It = 2.38 cm4
m = 1.67 kg/m Wx = 2.72 cm3 Wy = 9.02 cm3
69
Profiles 5 Profile 5 20x10 can be used as a grip rail or edge strip.

Profile 5 40x10 and 80x14 can be used as a lightweight
Flat Cross- clamping and mounting surface or as a supporting
Sections profile for the Bearing Units of linear slides.
Profile 5 16x8,5
A = 0.82 cm2 Ix = 0.06 cm4 Iy = 0.23 cm4
It = 0.04 cm4
m = 0.22 kg/m Wx = 0.12 cm3 Wy = 0.28 cm3
Profile 5 20x10
A = 1.29 cm2 Ix = 0.12 cm4 Iy = 0.53 cm4
It = 0.07 cm4
m = 0.35 kg/m Wx = 0.22 cm3 Wy = 0.53 cm3
Profile 5 40x10
A = 2.39 cm2 Ix = 0.24 cm4 Iy = 3.63 cm4
It = 0.27 cm4
m = 0.65 kg/m Wx = 0.44 cm3 Wy = 1.81 cm3
Profile 5 80x14
A = 6.64 cm2 Ix = 1.11 cm4 Iy = 40.69 cm4
It = 0.86 cm4
m = 1.79 kg/m Wx = 1.54 cm3 Wy = 10.17 cm3
70
Profiles 5 R These profiles are ideal for constructing angled
protective hoods, frames, tables or other fixtures.
Closed, The closed outside surface is particularly attractive and
Radiused easy to clean.
Outside Surface
Calculation of the strut length

30°: 1 Profile 5 R20/40-30° or R20/40-60°
45°: 2 Profiles 5 R20/40-45°.
Profile 5 R20-90°
A = 1.71 cm2 I = 0.58 cm4
It = 0.41 cm4
m = 0.46 kg/m Wx = 0.53 cm3
Profile 5 R20/40-30°
A = 1.68 cm2 Ix = 0.43 cm4 Iy = 0.68 cm4
It = 0.22 cm4
m = 0.45 kg/m Wx = 0.38 cm3 Wy = 0.57 cm3
A = 2.38 cm2 Ix = 1.26 cm4 Iy = 0.98 cm4
It = 0.43 cm4
m = 0.64 kg/m Wx = 0.79 cm3 Wy = 0.75 cm3
A = 3.16 cm2 Ix = 2.48 cm4 Iy = 1.65 cm4
It = 1.14 cm4
m = 0.85 kg/m Wx = 1.31 cm3 Wy = 1.09 cm3
A = 4.38 cm2 I = 5.38 cm4
It = 2.14 cm4
m = 1.18 kg/m W = 2.68 cm3
71
1.1.2 Profiles 6 Profiles 6 are suitable for weight-optimised constructions

of all kinds. With the choice of either Profiles 6 or
Modular Profiles 6 light the most suitable material for a given
Dimensions construction task can be selected.
(Basis 30 mm),
Open and Closed
Grooves

constructions where special emphasis is placed on
Profile 6 30x30 light

A = 3.43 cm2 I = 2.90 cm4
It = 0.27 cm4
m = 0.93 kg/m W = 1.94 cm3
Profile 6 30x30
A = 4.67 cm2 I = 4.15 cm4
It = 0.40 cm4
m = 1.26 kg/m W = 2.77 cm3
Profile 6 30x30 1N light

A = 3.49 cm2 Ix = 2.91 cm4 Iy = 3.01 cm4
It = 0.73 cm4
m = 0.94 kg/m Wx = 1.94 cm3 Wy = 1.98 cm3
Profile 6 30x30 2N90 light

A = 3.54 cm2 I = 3.02 cm4
It = 1.68 cm4
m = 0.96 kg/m W = 1.98 cm3

A = 3.54 cm2 Ix = 2.90 cm4 Iy = 3.14 cm4
It = 1.41 cm4
m = 0.96 kg/m Wx = 1.93 cm3 Wy = 2.09 cm3

A = 6.13 cm2 Ix = 5.54 cm4 Iy = 21.22 cm4
It = 3.02 cm4
m = 1.65 kg/m Wx = 3.69 cm3 Wy = 7.07 cm3
72
Profile 6 60x30
A = 8.47 cm2 Ix = 7.92 cm4 Iy = 29.30 cm4
It = 4.81 cm4
m = 2.29 kg/m Wx = 5.28 cm3 Wy = 9.77 cm3

A = 6.24 cm2 Ix = 5.77 cm4 Iy = 21.47 cm4
It = 5.32 cm4
m = 1.68 kg/m Wx = 3.78 cm3 Wy = 7.16 cm3

A = 6.24 cm2 Ix = 5.54 cm4 Iy = 22.21 cm4
It = 4.03 cm4
m = 1.69 kg/m Wx = 3.69 cm3 Wy = 7.40 cm3

A = 6.30 cm2 Ix = 5.77 cm4 Iy = 21.97 cm4
It = 6.26 cm4
m = 1.70 kg/m Wx = 3.78 cm3 Wy = 7.26 cm3

A = 6.36 cm2 Ix = 6.01 cm4 Iy = 21.74 cm4
It = 7.88 cm4
m = 1.72 kg/m Wx = 4.00 cm3 Wy = 7.25 cm3

A = 10.01 cm2 I = 39.47 cm4
It = 20.43 cm4
m = 2.70 kg/m W = 13.16 cm3
Profile 6 60x60
A = 13.33 cm2 I = 53.77 cm4
It = 29.27 cm4
m = 3.60 kg/m W = 17.92 cm3

A = 11.53 cm2 Ix = 10.82 cm4 Iy = 152.65 cm4
It = 9.29 cm4
m = 3.11 kg/m Wx = 7.21 cm3 Wy = 25.44 cm3
Profile 6 120x30
A = 16.00 cm2 Ix = 15.42 cm4 Iy = 210.94 cm4
It = 12.23 cm4
m = 4.32 kg/m Wx = 10.28 cm3 Wy = 35.16 cm3

A = 18.70 cm2 Ix = 76.61 cm4 Iy = 259.65 cm4
It = 62.87 cm4
m = 5.05 kg/m Wx = 25.54 cm3 Wy = 43.27 cm3
Profile 6 120x60
A = 24.84 cm2 Ix =102.71 cm4 Iy = 347.62 cm4
It = 84.85 cm4
m = 6.71 kg/m Wx = 34.24 cm3 Wy = 57.94 cm3
73
Profiles 6 Universal profile for constructing attractive tables, cover

hoods, display cases or other fixtures.
45° Angle
Fastening Set 6 30x30-45° can be used to connect two

or three profiles at angles of 90° (Section 1.3.1
Fasteners).
Profile 6 30x30-45° light

A = 3.12 cm2 I = 2.21 cm4
It = 0.72 cm4
m = 0.84 kg/m W = 1.33 cm3
Profiles 6 R This profile is ideal for constructing angled protective

hoods, frames, tables or other fixtures.
Closed,
Radiused
Outside Surface
Profile 6 R30-90° light

A = 3.07 cm2 I = 2.16 cm4
It = 0.83 cm4
m = 0.83 kg/m W = 1.32 cm3
74
1.1.3 Profiles 8 Profiles 8 are suitable for constructions of all kinds.

The choice of Profiles 8, Profiles 8 light and Profiles 8 E
Modular enable the most suitable material to be selected for a
Dimensions given construction task.
(Basis 40 mm),
Open and Closed
Grooves

constructions where particular emphasis is placed on
Profile 8 40x40 E
A = 5.07 cm2 I = 7.38 cm4
It = 0.99 cm4
m = 1.37 kg/m W = 3.69 cm3

A = 6.46 cm2 I = 9.00 cm4
It = 1.12 cm4
m = 1.74 kg/m W = 4.50 cm3
Profile 8 40x40
A = 9.16 cm2 I = 13.96 cm4
It = 1.93 cm4
m = 2.47 kg/m W = 6.98 cm3

A = 6.61 cm2 Ix = 9.54 cm4 Iy = 9.01 cm4
It = 2.99 cm4
m = 1.78 kg/m Wx = 4.66 cm3 Wy = 4.50 cm3
Profile 8 40x40 2N90 E

A = 4.83 cm2 I = 8.06 cm4
It = 4.33 cm4
m = 1.30 kg/m W = 3.87 cm3

A = 6.80 cm2 I = 9.64 cm4
It = 4.91 cm4
m = 1.84 kg/m W = 4.70 cm3
75
Profiles 8
Modular
Dimensions Profile 8 40x40 2N180 E
A = 4.95 cm2 Ix = 8.10 cm4 Iy = 8.40 cm4
(Basis 40 mm), It = 3.86 cm4
Open and Closed m = 1.33 kg/m Wx = 4.05 cm3 Wy = 4.30 cm3
Grooves Cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 7.0.000.03

A = 6.77 cm2 Ix = 10.11 cm4 Iy = 9.02 cm4
It = 4.88 cm4
m = 1.83 kg/m Wx = 5.05 cm3 Wy = 4.51 cm3
Profile 8 80x40 E
A = 8.93 cm2 Ix = 15.15 cm4 Iy = 57.81 cm4
It = 8.77 cm4
m = 2.42 kg/m Wx = 7.58 cm3 Wy = 14.45 cm3

A = 11.38 cm2 Ix = 16.60 cm4 Iy = 69.54 cm4
It = 10.05 cm4
m = 3.04 kg/m Wx = 8.30 cm3 Wy = 17.38 cm3
Profile 8 80x40
A = 16.76 cm2 Ix = 26.87 cm4 Iy = 101.19 cm4
It = 20.84 cm4
m = 4.53 kg/m Wx = 13.44 cm3 Wy = 25.29 cm3

A = 11.60 cm2 Ix = 17.73 cm4 Iy = 70.87 cm4
It = 18.51 cm4
m = 3.13 kg/m Wx = 8.63 cm3 Wy = 17.72 cm3

A = 8.44 cm2 Ix = 15.85 cm4 Iy = 54.51 cm4
It = 21.82 cm4
m = 2.28 kg/m Wx = 7.93 cm3 Wy = 13.63 cm3

A = 8.24 cm2 Ix = 15.32 cm4 Iy = 54.69 cm4
It = 16.53 cm4
m = 2.22 kg/m Wx = 7.51 cm3 Wy = 13.40 cm3

A = 8.04 cm2 Ix = 15.12 cm4 Iy = 55.41 cm4
It = 11.89 cm4
m = 2.17 kg/m Wx = 7.56 cm3 Wy = 13.85 cm3
Profile 8 80x80 E
A = 14.86 cm2 I = 100.69 cm4
It = 46.35 cm4
m = 4.01 kg/m W = 25.17 cm3
76
A = 19.75 cm2 I = 134.06 cm4
It = 82.91 cm4
m = 5.33 kg/m W = 33.51 cm3
Profile 8 80x80
A = 26.66 cm2 I = 187.70 cm4
It = 136.98 cm4
m = 7.19 kg/m W = 46.92 cm3

A = 20.08 cm2 Ix = 139.00 cm4 Iy = 135.00 cm4
It = 104.97 cm4
m = 5.42 kg/m Wx = 34.25 cm3 Wy = 33.68 cm3

A = 20.39 cm2 I = 140.00 cm4
It = 122.46 cm4
m = 5.50 kg/m W = 34.48 cm3

A = 16.12 cm2 Ix = 24.22 cm4 Iy = 220.54 cm4
It = 18.14 cm4
m = 4.35 kg/m Wx = 12.11 cm3 Wy = 36.76 cm3
Profile 8 120x40
A = 24.38 cm2 Ix = 39.80 cm4 Iy = 322.66 cm4
It = 35.15 cm4
m = 6.58 kg/m Wx = 19.90 cm3 Wy = 53.77 cm3

A = 30.13 cm2 Ix = 201.89 cm4 Iy = 421.67 cm4
It =128.39 cm4
m = 8.13 kg/m Wx = 50.47 cm3 Wy = 68.34 cm3
Profile 8 120x80
A = 40.05 cm2 Ix = 274.86 cm4 Iy = 574.86 cm4
It = 255.63 cm4
m = 10.81 kg/m Wx = 68.71 cm3 Wy = 92.72 cm3

A = 20.90 cm2 Ix = 31.81 cm4 Iy = 500.32 cm4
It = 29.19 cm4
m = 5.64 kg/m Wx = 15.90 cm3 Wy = 62.54 cm3
Profile 8 160x40
A = 32.00 cm2 Ix = 52.72 cm4 Iy = 739.62 cm4
It = 51.34 cm4
m = 8.64 kg/m Wx = 26.36 cm3 Wy = 92.45 cm3
77
Profiles 8
Modular
Dimensions Profile 8 160x40 4N light
A = 21.50 cm2 Ix = 33.90 cm4 Iy = 512.66 cm4
(Basis 40 mm), It = 55.98 cm4
Open and Closed m = 5.80 kg/m Wx = 16.52 cm3 Wy = 64.08 cm3
Grooves Cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.429.04

A = 37.80 cm2 Ix = 267.07 cm4 Iy = 907.88 cm4
It = 261.72 cm4
m = 10.21 kg/m Wx = 66.77 cm3 Wy = 113.48 cm3
Profile 8 160x80
A = 50.07 cm2 Ix = 360.89 cm4 Iy =1228.33 cm4
it = 398.58 cm4
m = 13.52 kg/m Wx = 90.22 cm3 Wy = 153.54 cm3

A = 38.34 cm2 Ix = 275.90 cm4 Iy = 919.80 cm4
It = 315.79 cm4
m = 10.35 kg/m Wx = 68.97 cm3 Wy = 114.97 cm3
Profiles 8 Profiles 8 40x16 and 40x16 E are ideal for attaching

elements such as valves or limit switches.
Flat Cross-
Sections
Profile 8 40x16 E can be used in conjunction with Hand

Grip Element 8 to construct grip rails and handles.
Profiles 8 80x16 and 160x28 are perfect for

constructing guide slides of Roller Guides 8 D6 or D14.
When using the centre groove of Profile 8 80x16, an
access hole must be provided at the envisaged fastening
position.
78
Profile 8 160x28 can also be used as a clamping and
mounting surface or edgewise as a heavy-duty supporting
profile.
Profile 8 160x16 can be used as a mounting and front

plate, particularly for switch box systems.
Profile 8 40x16 E
A = 2.40 cm2 Ix = 0.65 cm4 Iy = 3.66 cm4
It = 0.35 cm4
m = 0.64 kg/m Wx = 0.81 cm3 Wy = 1.83 cm3
Profile 8 40x16
A = 4.24 cm2 Ix = 1.05 cm4 Iy = 6.89 cm4
It = 1.09 cm4
m = 1.13 kg/m Wx = 1.22 cm3 Wy = 3.45 cm3
Profile 8 80x16 E
A = 4.86 cm2 Ix = 1.49 cm4 Iy = 29.28 cm4
It = 1.53 cm4
m = 1.31 kg/m Wx = 1.78 cm3 Wy = 7.32 cm3
Profile 8 80x16
A = 8.13 cm2 Ix = 2.15 cm4 Iy = 50.76 cm4
It = 2.20 cm4
m = 2.20 kg/m Wx = 2.69 cm3 Wy = 12.69 cm3
Profile 8 160x16
A = 13.88 cm2 Ix = 3.80 cm4 Iy = 307.83 cm4
It = 2.37 cm4
m = 3.75 kg/m Wx = 4.25 cm3 Wy = 38.48 cm3
Profile 8 160x28
A = 30.93 cm2 Ix = 20.27 cm4 Iy = 723.74 cm4
It = 21.81 cm4
m = 8.35 kg/m Wx = 14.16 cm3 Wy = 90.47 cm3
79
Bed Plate Bed Plate Profiles 8 for producing areas of any size with
groove 8 and modular dimension 40 mm.
Profile 8 The Bed Plate Profile can be secured to all types of
substructures.
Options for connecting the plate to the frame structure

(using Button-Head Screw M8x16, washer DIN 125-8.4
and T-Slot Nut 8 St M8).
Bed Plate Profile 8 152x20

Al, anodized
A = 18.39 cm2 Ix = 7.39 cm4 Iy = 350.50 cm4
m= 4.97 kg/m Wx = 7.20 cm3 Wy = 46.12 cm3
Bed Plate Connection Profile 8 55x20

Al, anodized
A = 5.71 cm2 Ix = 2.12 cm4 Iy = 11.30 cm4
m = 1.54 kg/m Wx = 1.98 cm3 Wy = 4.10 cm3
80
Profiles 8 Universal profiles for constructing attractive tables,
cover hoods, display cases or other fixtures.
45° Angle
Fastening Set 8 40x40-45° can be used to connect two

or three profiles at angles of 90° (Section 1.3.1
Fasteners).
Profile 8 40x40-45° E
A = 4.35 cm2 I = 5.70 cm4
It = 2.49 cm4
m = 1.17 kg/m Wx = 2.51 cm3

A = 5.58 cm2 I = 6.50 cm4
It = 2.59 cm4
m = 1.50 kg/m W = 2.90 cm3

Profile 8 40x40-45°
A = 7.30 cm2 I = 9.39 cm4
It = 2.70 cm4
m = 1.97 kg/m W = 4.08 cm3
81
Profiles 8
45° Angle
A = 18.86 cm2 I = 109.11 cm4
It = 68.71 cm4
m = 5.09 kg/m W = 24.97 cm3

Profile 8 80x80-45° 4N90 light

A = 19.48 cm2 I = 106.20 cm4
It = 78.54 cm4
m = 5.25 kg/m W = 24.69 cm3
Profiles 8 D Profile 8 80x80 D40 is ideal for mounting bearings or

for accommodating shafts, spindles, axles and similar
with Internal components.
Diameter
Profile 8 80x80-45° D60 is the basis for Coupling

Housings 8 D30 and 8 D55, Profile 8 120x120-45°
D87 is used for Coupling Housing 8 D80. The profiles
can be used to produce Coupling Housings of special
lengths or housings for synchronising shafts between
mechanical drive elements.
82
Profile 8 80x80 D40
A = 37.20 cm2 I = 222.00 cm4
It = 189.65 cm4
m = 10.04 kg/m W = 55.50 cm3

Profile 8 80x80-45° D60

Al, anodized
A = 15.26 cm2 I = 109.56 cm4
It = 98.17 cm4
m = 4.12 kg/m W = 27.39 cm3

Profile 8 120x120-45° D87

Al, anodized
A = 31.29 cm2 I = 465.86 cm4
It = 647.23 cm4
m = 8.45 kg/m W = 77.64 cm3

Profiles 8 R These profiles are ideal for constructing angled

protective hoods, frames, tables or other fixtures. They
Closed, are both attractive and easy to clean.
Radiused
Outside Surface
83
Profiles 8 R Calculation of strut length

30°: 1 Profile 8 R40/80-30° or R40/80-60°
Closed, 45°: 2 Profiles 8 40/80-45°.
Radiused
Outside Surface
Profile 8 R40-90° light

A = 5.72 cm2 I = 6.65 cm4
It = 2.93 cm4
m = 1.54 kg/m W = 3.04 cm3
A = 6.20 cm2 Ix = 6.42 cm4 Iy = 8.90 cm4
It = 3.18 cm4
m = 1.67 kg/m Wx = 2.84 cm3 Wy = 3.80 cm3
A = 10.23 cm2 Ix = 21.33 cm4 Iy = 16.06 cm4
It = 12.41 cm4
m = 2.76 kg/m Wx = 6.74 cm3 Wy = 6.14 cm3
A = 10.50 cm2 Ix = 22.64 cm4 Iy = 34.92 cm4
It = 19.18 cm4
m = 2.83 kg/m Wx = 5.96 cm3 Wy = 11.56 cm3
A = 15.00 cm2 I = 76.25 cm4
It = 45.84 cm4
m = 4.05 kg/m W = 18.69 cm3
84
Profiles 8 W Angled profiles for supporting shelves, as simple panel-
fixing strips or simple guides and similar applications.
Angle Geometry
The inside corner of the angled profiles is provided with

an undercut. This means that attachments can therefore
be bolted flush with the surface.
Profile 8 W40x40 E
A = 4.09 cm2 I = 5.40 cm4
It = 0.71 cm4
m = 1.10 kg/m W = 2.22 cm3
Profile 8 W80x80 E
A = 8.82 cm2 I = 51.87 cm4
It = 3.05 cm4
m = 2.38 kg/m W = 9.61 cm3
Profile 8 W80x80x40 light

A = 17.77 cm2 I = 95.32 cm4
It = 31.41 cm4
m = 4.79 kg/m W = 20.54 cm3
85
1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles
1.1.4 Angled and In order to mount a wide variety of bought-in

components to the profile frame, some elements which
Flat Profiles can be easily adapted to suit them are often required.
> Angled and flat profiles from aluminium, anodized, in
system dimensions of the MB Building Kit System for
customised processing.
Profile Edging Can be used as a grip rail or edging and for stabilising
panel elements.
Profile Edging 15x8

A = 0.56 cm2 Ix = 0.09 cm4 Iy = 0.16 cm4
m = 0.15 kg/m Wx = 0.16 cm3 Wy = 0.17 cm3
Profile Edging 19x11,5

A = 1.14 cm2 Ix = 0.41 cm4 Iy = 0.13 cm4
m = 0.30 kg/m Wx = 0.30 cm3 Wy = 0.17 cm3
86
Profiles M and Highly versatile, e.g. can be used for edging any panel
elements, as a terminating strip or support strip, as a
MW special construction without profile grooves or as a
guide strip etc.
Profile M 20x4 E
A = 0.78 cm2 Ix = 0.24 cm4 Iy = 0.01 cm4
R = 2.00 mm
m = 0.21 kg/m Wx = 0.24 cm3 Wy = 0.05 cm3
1 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 7.0.002.62
Profile M 20x4 R0 E
A = 0.79 cm2 Ix = 0.26 cm4 Iy = 0.01 cm4
R = 0.20 mm
m = 0.21 kg/m Wx = 0.26 cm3 Wy = 0.05 cm3
Profile M 40x4 E
A = 1.57 cm2 Ix = 2.06 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4
R = 2.00 mm
m = 0.42 kg/m Wx = 1.03 cm3 Wy = 0.10 cm3
Profile M 40x4 R0 E
A = 1.59 cm2 Ix = 2.12 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4
R = 0.20 mm
m = 0.43 kg/m Wx = 1.06 cm3 Wy = 0.10 cm3
Profile M 80x8 E
A = 6.32 cm2 Ix = 33.05 cm4 Iy = 0.33 cm4
R = 4.00 mm
m = 1.70 kg/m Wx = 8.26 cm3 Wy = 0.81 cm3
Profile M 80x8 R0 E
A = 6.40 cm2 Ix = 34.09 cm4 Iy = 0.34 cm4
R = 0.20 mm
m = 1.72 kg/m Wx = 8.25 cm3 Wy = 0.85 cm3
87
1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles
Profiles M and
MW
Profile M W20x20x4 E
A = 1.41 cm2 I = 0.48 cm4
R = 2.00 mm
m = 0.38 kg/m Wx = 0.35 cm3
A = 2.21 cm2 Ix = 0.59 cm4 Iy = 3.52 cm4
R = 2.00 mm
m = 0.59 kg/m Wx = 0.38 cm3 Wy = 1.40 cm3
A = 3.01 cm2 I = 4.51 cm4
R = 2.00 mm
m = 0.81 kg/m Wx = 1.58 cm3
A = 8.85 cm2 Ix = 9.48 cm4 Iy = 56.54 cm4
R = 4.00 mm
m = 2.39 kg/m Wx = 3.12 cm3 Wy = 11.25 cm3
A = 12.05 cm2 I = 72.27 cm4
R = 4.00 mm
m = 3.25 kg/m Wx = 12.66 cm3
Other profiles of the MB Building Kit System have been

specially developed for special applications. You can
find these in the respective product groups for specific
applications, e.g.
> Clamp Profiles (Sections 3.3 and 3.4 Rigid and
Movable Panel Fasteners)
> Stand Profiles (Section 7.2 Profiles with Integrated
Conduit)
> Roller Profiles, Shaft-Clamp Profiles (Section 8.1.1
Roller Guides)
88
1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces
1.2 Accessories The profile accessories consist of caps and cover profiles
which are ideal for sealing side/end faces and bores/holes.
for Profiles
1.2.1 Caps for Radiused caps for the end faces of the various profile
geometries; the cut face does not need to be deburred.
Profile End Faces
Cap PA
Plastic caps are secured by pressing/knocking them into
the core bores.
Cap with Fastening Screw Cap PA for round profiles
Caps 5
for Profiles 5
Modular PA-GF, black
Dimensions Cap 5 20x20
(Basis 20 mm) m = 1.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.09
Cap 5 40x20
m = 2.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.11
Cap 5 40x40
m= 5g
1 pce. 0.0.370.13
Cap 5 60x20
m = 3.3 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.53
Cap 5 60x40
m = 7.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.56
Cap 5 80x20
m = 4.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.92
89
Caps 5
for Profiles 5
Flat Cross- PA-GF, black
Sections Cap 5 16x8.5
m = 0.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.364.60
Cap 5 20x10
m = 0.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.12
Cap 5 40x10
m = 1.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.14
Cap 5 80x14
m = 3.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.91
Caps 5
Radiused
Outside Surface PA-GF, black
Cap 5 R20-90°
m = 0.9 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.71
Cap 5 R20/40-30°
a = 30° m = 0.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.59
Cap 5 R20/40-45°
a = 45° m = 1.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.62
Cap 5 R20/40-60°
a = 60° m = 1.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.65
Cap 5 R20/40-90°
a = 90° m = 2.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.68
90
Caps 6
for Profiles 6
(Basis 30 mm) m = 2.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.22
Cap 6 60x30
m = 5.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.23
Cap 6 60x60
m = 9.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.24
Cap 6 120x30
m = 10.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.25
Cap 6 120x60
m = 20.8 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.26
Caps 6
45° Angle
Cap 6 30x30-45°
PA-GF, black
m = 1.9 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.74
Caps 6
Radiused Outside
Surface Cap 6 R30-90°
PA-GF, black
m = 2.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.75
91
Caps 8
for Profiles 8
(Basis 40 mm) m = 4.8 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.01
Cap 8 80x40
m = 9.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.02
Cap 8 80x80
m = 19.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.37
Cap 8 120x40
m = 15.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.54
Cap 8 120x80
m = 30.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.57
Cap 8 160x40
m = 21.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.39
Cap 8 160x80
m = 37.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.40
Caps 8
for Profiles 8
Flat Cross- PA-GF, black
Sections Cap 8 40x16
m = 2.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.79
Cap 8 80x16
m = 4.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.98
Cap 8 160x16
m = 8.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.00
Cap 8 160x28
m = 16.1 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.80
92
Caps 8
45° Angle
Cap 8 40x40-45°
PA-GF, black
m = 4.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.48
Cap 8 80x80-45°
PA-GF, black
m = 17.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.36
Caps 8
Radiused
Cap 8 R40-90°
m = 4.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.34
Cap 8 R40/80-30°
a = 30° m = 4.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.427.69
Cap 8 R40/80-45°
a = 45° m = 5.8 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.15
Cap 8 R40/80-60°
a = 60° m = 7.8 g
1 pce. 0.0.427.70
Cap 8 R40/80-90°
a = 90° m = 11.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.427.71
93
Caps 8
for Profiles 8 W
Angle Geometry Cap 8 W40x40 E
PA-GF, black
m = 4.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.51
Cap 8 W80x80 E
PA-GF, black
m = 9.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.54
Cap 8 W80x80x40
PA-GF, black
m = 14.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.465.50
Fastening Screw Screw for reinforcing the retention force of Caps 8 (PA-GF)
in the core bores of Profiles 8.
The machining required is limited to counter boring and

countersinking of the Caps.
Fastening Screw 8 5x14

St, black
m = 160 g/100
100 pce., black 0.0.422.22
94
Caps 8 Zn Caps made of zinc, chrome-plated or powder-coated, are
secured with screws into the core bores.
for Profiles 8
Modular
Dimensions
(Basis 40 mm)
Cap 8 40x40 Zn
GD-Zn, powder-coated or chrome-plated
m = 26 g
1 pce., black RAL9005 0.0.427.09
100 pce., special colour 0.0.428.11
1 pce., chrome-plated 0.0.427.10
Cap 8 80x40 Zn
m = 49 g
1 pce., black RAL9005 0.0.427.11
Cap 8 80x80 Zn
m = 96 g
1 pce., black RAL9005 0.0.427.13
Countersunk Self-threading screw for securing Caps Zn in the core

bore of Profiles 8.
Screw SF
x
Countersunk Screw 8 SF M7,1
St, black, slide-coating
Head shape to DIN 7991 (M6)
m = 430 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.428.06
95
1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove
1.2.2 Cover for The profile groove is an important feature for many
functions and ensures the versatility of the MB Building
Profile Groove Kit System. It may be necessary when finishing off
production of fixtures and equipment to cover this profile
groove for various functional and optical reasons and /
or to maintain cleanliness.
Cover Profile Al Aluminium Cover Profile covers over the profile groove
to ensure easy cleaning and prevent dust entering.
Cover Profile 5 Al
Al, anodized
m = 20 g/m

10 pce., length 2000 mm, black 0.0.464.33
Cover Profile 6 Al
Al, anodized
m = 30 g/m
Cover Profile 8 Al
Al, anodized
m = 32 g/m
96
Cover Profiles The Cover Profile is ideal for covering the profile groove
and holding panel elements.
PP
Cover Profile 5 PP
PP
a = max. 1.5-2 mm
m = 13.5 g/m
Cover Profile 6 PP
PP
a = 2-3.5 mm
m = 20.4 g/m
Cover Profile 8 PP
PP
a = 4-5.5 mm
m = 26.0 g/m
97
Cover Profiles Cover Profiles R, WR and F for side faces, both round
and flat, ensure particularly attractive styling.
R, WR and F
They can be retrofitted to all accessible profile side faces.
Cover Profile WR blends into the profile contour, making

the assembly appear as a single profile.
Cover Caps R and F integrate the cap of the basic profile.
The round and flat Cover Profiles R, W and F are inserted

into the grooves of Profiles 8 in conjunction with Clip 8 St.
Innovation
German
utility model
295 16 689
Cover Profile 8 R40 Al

Al, anodized
m = 190 g/m
Cover Profile 8 WR40 Al

Al, anodized
m = 200 g/m
98
Cover Profile 8 R80 Al
Al, anodized
m = 550 g/m
Cover Profile 8 F40 Al

Al, anodized
m = 170 g/m
Cover Profile 8 F80 Al

Al, anodized
m = 380 g/m
Clip 8 St
St, bright-zinc plated
Recommended amount: 5 pce. on 1 m
m = 2.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.428.97
Caps
R and F
Cap 8 R40
PA-GF, black
m = 0.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.60
Cap 8 R80
PA-GF, black
m = 2.3 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.61
Cap 8 F40
PA-GF, black
m = 0.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.62
Cap 8 F80
PA-GF, black
m = 0.8 g
1 pce. 0.0.429.63
99
Cover Profiles Cover Profiles provide an elastic cover for the profile
groove or profile side faces. Ideal for non-slip surfaces
NBR e.g. steps, buffer strip for sliding doors etc.
Cover Profile 5 16x3 NBR

NBR, black
Hardness 80° Shore A oil and water resisting
m = 57 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.425.24

NBR, black
m = 119 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.439.35

NBR, black
m = 180 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.373.63
100
1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.3 Covers for Bores/Holes
1.2.3 Covers for Cap for closing bores/holes ø 4.3 mm, ø 5.5 mm and
ø 7 mm.
Bores/Holes Ideal for covering connection processing for standard
connections in profiles with closed grooves.
Cap 5 D4.3
PA, black
m = 8 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.437.90
Cap 6 D5.5
PA, black
m = 14 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.439.88
Cap 6 D5.5-45°
PA, black
m = 18 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.439.90
Cap 8 D7
PA, black
m = 27 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.429.65
Cap 8 D7-45°
PA, black
m = 36 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.436.98
101
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners
1.3 Fasteners The elements in the “Fasteners” product group provide use fasteners such as Angle Brackets, sheet materials,
power-locking profile connections of extreme rigidity. etc. Different variants of the range of fasteners make it
The flexible screw attachment principle of all the possible to combine profiles from different Lines.
fastening elements is of particular benefit when making Pressure-tight fastening elements are available for
modifications to the structure at a later date, easily profiles which are also intended for use as compressed
allowing enlargements or reductions in size. air lines (Section 6.2 Pneumatic Applications)
item fastening elements are characterised by:
> Screw connections secured by means of the pre-
tensioning effect in the flexible area of the groove flanks
> The only tools required for assembly are standard
hexagon keys
> Several fastening elements can be used when larger
profile cross-sections are employed
In addition to the four main types of fastener - Standard,
Universal, Automatic and Direct - it is also possible to
Right-Angled Connections A range of fasteners for right-angled connections with

optimal application of clamping force and precisely
positioned attachment of profiles to each other.
The fastening elements vary in terms of the processing
effort required and in the functions for retro-fitting or
displacement of the fastening along the groove.
Standard Connection
Automatic Connection Universal Connection
Angle Bracket Zn Fastening Sets
Joining Plates Direct-Fastening Set 8 90°
102
Angled Connections Other special fastening elements are particularly suitable
for the construction of latticework structures or visually
attractive fixtures or for connecting profiles at any angle.
Hinges, heavy duty
Angle Elements T1
Cross-Profile Connections The Direct Fastener is used to connect profiles whose

external surfaces are in contact. In this arrangement, the
grooves may be assembled parallel to each other or they
can cross at any angle.
Direct Connection
The Angle Hinge Bracket and Angle Clamp Bracket are
ideal for connecting two profiles of the same Line whose
side faces are in contact and cross at any angle.
Angle Hinge Bracket
103
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners
Butt Connections For end-face profile connections, e.g. for extending the
profile lengths.
Universal-Butt Connection Automatic-Butt Connection
Parallel-Profile Connections Connection Profiles are specially designed for

continuous connection of several profiles in longitudinal
direction.
Connection Profiles can be used to create “composite
profiles” with large external dimensions but relatively
small tolerances.
Connection Profile 8
Connection Profile Brace 8 Connection Profile 8 40
Secure Connections For preventing displacement under the effects of heavy

loads or for fixing aligned profiles.
Pin Element
104
How to choose the correct fastener
Position of the profiles relative to each other Right-angled Right-angled Right-angled Right-angled
Groove at 3 profiles on Groove at right angles Groove

right angles 3 different to profile end face against profile
to profile planes end face, any
end face rotation
• Position of connection point Specified Specified Movable (along the profile groove) Movable
(through (at end of (along the
hole profiles) profile groove)
required)
• Fitted subsequently between profiles No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

of an existing construction
• Profile processing without tools No Yes Yes No Yes No No
• Load bearing capability of connection ++ + + ++ ++ +

(rated relative to each other) (used in (used in (used in (used in
pairs) pairs) pairs) pairs)
Fastener selected Standard Fastening Angle Universal Automatic Joining Direct

Fastener Sets Bracket Zn Fastener Fastener Plates Fastener
90°
Available in Lines
Positions of the profiles relative to each other Contacting Any Crossing End faces Parallel
at an angle groove against at any angle, contacting to each

of 45° profile end groove over groove other at a
face, any distance
angle
• Position of connection point Movable Movable Movable Fixed Movable

(along the (along the (along the profile groove) (at end of profiles) (along the
profile groove) profile groove) profile groove)
• Fitted subsequently between Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
existing constructions
• Profile processing without tools Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
• Load bearing capability of connection + + + + ++

(rated relative to each other) (moment (used in (used in (used in
resistance) pairs) pairs) pairs)
+
(axial load)
Fastener selected Angle Hinges, Direct Angle Clamp Universal- Automatic- Connection
Elements Heavy Duty Fastener and Angle Butt Butt Profiles
Hinge Brackets Fastener Fastener
Available in Lines
++ very high + high adequate
105
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections
1.3.1 Right-Angled High-load fastening elements for basic frame profiles.

Connections
Standard-Fastening Sets Right-angled, power-locking profile connections with

high-strength and minimum processing requirement.
The standard connecting plate ensures optimum load
application, with the profiles being correctly fixed relative
to each other.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 136 431
Standard-Fastening Set
5 6 8 8E
a ø 4.3 mm ø 5.5 mm ø 7.0 mm ø 7.0 mm
b M5, M6, M8, -
12.0 mm deep 15.0 mm deep 16.0 mm deep
c 20.0 mm 30.0 mm 40.0 mm 40.0 mm
d 10.0 mm 15.0 mm 20.0 mm 20.0 mm
The standard connecting plates can be arranged in the

required direction to match the way in which the profiles
are fitted.
Large profiles with high load-bearing capabilities can be
connected using a larger number of Standard Fasteners.
106
Standard-Fastening Set 5
Standard connecting plate 5, St, stainless
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x12,
St, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 4.5 Nm
Mstainl. = 3.6 Nm
m = 4g
1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.08
1 set, stainless 0.0.437.49
Standard connecting plate 6,
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x14, St, stainless
or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 10.0 Nm
Mstainl.= 8.0 Nm
m = 9g
Standard connecting plate 8,
Special Button-Head Screw similar to ISO 7380-M8x20,
Mbzp. = 25 Nm
Mstainl.= 20 Nm
m = 21 g
For connections with slightly reduced loading, Line 8

features Standard-Fastening Set 8 E with a self-
threading special screw which further reduces the
x machining requirement.
Standard-Fastening Set 8 E
Standard connecting plate 8, St, bright zinc-plated
Self-threading, Button-Head Screw, head shape similar to
ISO 7380-M7,3x20, St, bright zinc-plated
M = 20 Nm
m = 20 g
107
Universal- For universal power-lock connection of all profiles of

one Line. Suitable for profiles which need to be moved
Fastening Sets subsequently, since only one profile is processed. These
Fastening Sets can be installed easily into existing
constructions.
For connecting profiles used as compressed air
conduits, the Universal Fastener is also available in a
special version (Section 6.2 Pneumatic Applications).
Innovation
German patent
34 38 773
Where required, the anti-torsion pin of the Universal

Fastener can be broken off at a specified breakpoint.
Universal-Fastening Set
5 6 8
a 10.0 mm 15.0 mm 20 mm
b ø 12.0 mm ø 16.0 mm ø 20 mm
c 8.5 mm 12.7 mm 16 mm
d ø 4.3 mm ø 5.5 mm ø 7 mm
e 5.8 mm 8.7 mm 12 mm
Universal-Fastening Sets should always be used in

pairs.
Universal-Fastening Set 5
Universal Fastener 5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Hexigon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x14, St, stainless
T-Slot Nut St M4, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 3.0 Nm
Mstainl.= 2.4 Nm
m = 7.0 g
108
T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 8.0 Nm
Mstainl. = 6.5 Nm
m = 18.0 g
Mbzp. = 25 Nm
Mstainl.= 20 Nm
m = 41 g
Universal- For universal power-lock interconnection of Profiles 5

and Profiles 8. Suitable for profiles which need to be
Fastening Sets moved subsequently, since only one profile is
5/8 and 8/5 processed. These Fastening Sets can be installed easily
into existing constructions. Connection processing of
the profiles is the same as for the Universal-Fastening
Sets.

pairs. Where required, the anti-torsion pin of the Univer-
sal Fastener can be broken off at a specified breakpoint.
Universal-Fastening Set 5/8

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x18, St,
bright zinc-plated
Special T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4, bright zinc-plated
M = 3 Nm
m= 9g
1 set 0.0.370.34
Universal-Fastening Set 8/5

Universal Fastener 8/5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x25, St, bright zinc-plated
T-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-plated
M = 3 Nm
m = 18 g
1 set 0.0.370.25
109
Automatic-Fastening Sets For universal power-lock connection of all profiles of

one Line. Suitable for profiles which need to be moved
subsequently, since the Fasteners are only screwed into
one profile. These Fastening Sets can be installed easily
into existing constructions. The profiles do not need to
be machined in order to use the Automatic-Fastening Sets.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patents
EP 0 458 069
The Fastener is screwed into a profile groove in the end

face, the thread being cut automatically. Use of a lubricant
is recommended.
Note: All Fasteners with a through bore for the fastening
screw have a counter-clockwise thread on the outside in
order to prevent the Fastener twisting when the screw is
tightened.
Automatic-Fastening Set 5 should be inserted so that the

flattening on the thread is flush with the outer edge of
the profile.
With Automatic-Fastening Sets 6 and 8, twisting can be
prevented by screwing out the Fastener (after the profile
has been assembled) until the head of the Fastener
projects into the other profile groove.
Automatic-Fastening Set 8 also contains a Cap which

can be fitted subsequently over the Fastener.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Automatic-Fastening Sets should always be used in

pairs.
110
Automatic-Fastening Set 5
Automatic Fastener 5, St, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Screw M4x30, St, stainless or bright zinc-plated
s = 4 A/F
Mbzp. = 2.5 N
Mstainl. = 2.5 Nm
m = 8.0 g
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M5x35, St, stainless
s = 5 A/F
Mbzp. = 8.0 Nm
Mstainl. = 6.5 Nm
m = 18.0 g
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x40, St, stainless
Cap, PA-GF, black
s = 6 A/F
Mbzp. = 14 Nm
Mstainl. = 11 Nm
m = 35 g
111
Angle Bracket Zn For power-lock connection (without machining) between

profiles or for reinforcing profile connections or for
fastening a range of components to profiles.
The Angle Bracket is ideal for connecting installation

conduits (Section 7.1 Conduits). The rounding of the
inside edge prevents damage to the cable.
Note: With Line 8 Angle Brackets, a special washer

(13.5x9x1) is used in view of the screw length and to
improve the clamping force.
When used to reinforce the joints of large profiles or
conduits, several Angle Brackets can be used in parallel.
Angle Bracket 5 20x20 Zn F < 250 N ^ F x l < 5 Nm The load-bearing capacity must be checked to determine
whether both conditions are met.
Angle Bracket 5 40x40 Zn F < 500 N ^ F x l < 25 Nm
Angle Bracket 5 20x20 Zn

GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium
m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.03
Angle Bracket Cap 5 20x20

PA-GF, black
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.425.04
Set of Angle Brackets 5 20x20

2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M5x8, St, bright zinc-
plated
2 T-Slot Nuts 5 St M5, bright zinc-plated
m = 23 g
1 set 0.0.425.02
112
m = 39 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.06

PA-GF, black
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.425.07

4 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M5x8,
St, bright zinc-plated
m = 58 g
1 set 0.0.425.05

m = 47 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.63

PA-GF, black
m=4g
1 pce. 0.0.419.64

2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x12,
m = 66 g
1 set 0.0.419.67

m = 130 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.65

PA-GF, black
m=7g
1 pce. 0.0.419.66

4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380- M6x12,
m = 166 g
1 set 0.0.419.68
113
Angle Bracket Zn

m = 106 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.24

PA-GF, black
m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.411.26

2 Washers 13.5x9x1 St, bright zinc-plated
m = 150 g
1 set 0.0.411.15

m = 270 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.23

PA-GF, black
m = 13 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.25

m = 360 g
1 set 0.0.411.32

m = 530 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.23
114
PA-GF, black
m = 23 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.25

m = 662 g
1 set 0.0.436.24
Washer 13.5x9x1
m = 6 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.429.11
Fastening Sets Fastening Sets can be used to construct a corner unit

with three profiles or one corner angle with two profiles
ensuring a continuous profile geometry.
Fastening Sets are ideal for constructing attractive
display cases, tables, cover hoods etc.
The profiles must be provided with threads in the core
bores.
115
Fastening Sets
Fastener 5 20x20
GD-Zn, black
m = 13 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.95
Fastener Cap 5 R20-90°

PA-GF, black
m = 0,7 g
1 pce. 0.0.425.94
Fastening Set 5 R20-90°

Fastener 5 20x20
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.425.97
Fastener Cap 5 20x20x20

PA-GF, black
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.437.73
Fastening Set 5 20x20x20

Fastener 5 20x20
m = 22 g
1 set 0.0.437.96
116
Fastener 6 30x30
GD-Zn, black
m = 39 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.76

PA-GF, black
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.434.83

Fastener 6 30x30
m = 54 g
1 set 0.0.434.87
Fastener Cap 6 30x30-45°

PA-GF, black
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.434.85
Fastening Set 6 30x30-45°

Fastener 6 30x30
m = 54 g
1 set 0.0.434.86

PA-GF, black
m=8g
1 pce. 0.0.434.84

Fastener 6 30x30
m = 59 g
1 set 0.0.434.88
117
Fastening Sets
Fastener 8 40x40
GD-Zn, black
m = 92 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.51

PA-GF, black
m=8g
1 pce. 0.0.436.32

Fastener 8 40x40
m = 120 g
1 set 0.0.436.35
Fastener Cap 8 40x40-2x45°

PA-GF, black
m = 10 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.62
Fastening Set 8 40x40-2x45°

Fastener 8 40x40
Fastener Cap 8 40x40-2x45°
m = 128 g
1 set 0.0.436.63

PA-GF, black
m=9g
1 pce. 0.0.373.52
Fastening Set 8 40x40-45°

Fastener 8 40x40
m = 128 g
1 set 0.0.388.68

PA-GF, black
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.415.97

Fastener 8 40x40
m = 133 g
1 set 0.0.416.08
118
Joining Plates Universal fastening element for simple, non-machining
connections of profiles, conduit elements and similar
components with low loads.
Bores ø 7 mm (for M6) are provided for fastening.
Caps can be subsequently snap-fitted over the heads of
the Countersunk Screws DIN 7991.
For connecting profiles to other profiles, the Joining

Plates are fitted with appropriate anti-torsion blocks.
When using Joining Plates as fastening elements for
Profiles 8, the anti-torsion function does not apply.
The Joining Plate can be turned around for connecting

various other components.
Joining Plate 6 30-0°

m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.89

m = 42 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.91

m = 55 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.93

m = 69 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.95
119
Joining Plates
Fastening Set for Joining Plate 6

1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x14, St, bright zinc-plated
1 T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-plated
m=8g
1 set 0.0.434.36
Joining Plate
Caps
Joining Plate Cap 6 30-0°
PA-GF, black
m=4g
1 pce. 0.0.419.90

PA-GF, black
m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.419.92

PA-GF, black
m=7g
1 pce. 0.0.419.94

PA-GF, black
m=9g
1 pce. 0.0.419.96
120
Direct- Direct-Fastening Set 8 90° is used for right-angled
connection of Profiles 8. The profile can be secured at
Fastening Set the end face and at any angle. The core bore must have
8 90° an M8x16 thread.
Direct-Fastening Set 8 90° is particularly suitable for
movable fastening of profiles, with in part closed
grooves, where Universal or Automatic Fasteners cannot
be used in pairs.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 490 086
Direct-Fastening Set 8 90°

Fastener, G-St, stainless
Countersunk Screw M8x27, St, stainless
O-ring, NBR, black
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 7984-M6x14,
St, stainless
M = 5.5 Nm
m = 30 g
121
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections
1.3.2 Angled Components for connecting profiles at fixed, freely

selectable or adjustable angles.
Connections
Angle Elements Connection elements for fastening a profile at an angle

of 45° when working with bracing and latticework. The
T1 Angle Elements are screw-connected with Button-Head
Screws ISO 7380-M8x16 and washers DIN 125-8.4. The
profile to be connected can be attached using two Uni-
versal Fasteners 8 (without anti-torsion pins) and But-
ton-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x25.
Covering of the profile ends with Caps 8 40x40-45°
(Section 1.2 Accessories for Profiles).
Angle Element 8 T1-40

Al, anodized
m = 73 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.388.00

1 pce., black 0.0.388.04

Al, anodized
m = 148 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.388.01

1 pce., black 0.0.388.05
122
Angle Bracket Connection elements for fastening two profiles at an
angle of 45° when working with bracing and latticework.
Elements T2 Fastening with Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16.
The profiles are screw-connected using two Universal
Fasteners 8, two Button-Head Screws M8x30 and a
special T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-36 or 76 or using two
Automatic Fasteners 8, two Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screws DIN 912-M6x40 and a special T-Slot Nut 8 St
2xM6-36 or 76 (Section 3.1 T-Slot Nuts).


Al, anodized
m = 67 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.388.02

1 pce., black 0.0.388.06

Al, anodized
m = 135 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.388.03

1 pce., black 0.0.388.07
123
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections
Hinges, heavy-duty For connecting profiles at various angles up to 180° and

for use as heavy-duty hinges (adjustment range ± 90°).
When used in conjunction with the spacer rings, they
can be used as freely movable hinges. If the spacer rings
are removed, they can be used as rigid angle elements,
e.g. bracing, and can also be pinned.
The Hinges with Clamp Lever can be locked in position
or released. Particularly suitable for adjustable holders,
swivel-type booms for Parts Containers and other
similar equipment.
Calculation of the strut length L:

L= x2 + y2 - 2z
Hinge, Dowel Button-Head Screw Nut Connection

heavy- DIN 6325 ISO 7380 DIN 439 rigid movable
duty a b c d e F1 F2 F1 F2
6 30x30 4m6x30 10 mm M6x14 M6 3.5 mm 1,750 N 500 N 500 N 500 N
8 40x40 4m6x40 12 mm M8x16 M8 5.0 mm 5,000 N 1,000N 750 N 750 N
8 80x40 6m6x40 24 mm M8x16 M8 5.0 mm 10,000 N 2,000N 1,500 N 1,500 N
124
Hinge 6 30x30, heavy-duty
2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium
4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
2 thread bushes M5, St, zinc-plated, black
2 spacer rings, St, stainless
2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x8, St, black
m = 125 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.80
Hinge 6 30x30, heavy-duty with Clamp Lever

Thread bush M5, St, zinc-plated, black
Bush liner, St, zinc-plated, black
Spacer collar, St, black
Clamp lever M5x30, black
Max. holding torque = 10 Nm
m = 163 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.85

2 thread bushes M8, St, zinc-plated, black
m = 320 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.31

Thread bush M8, St, zinc-plated, black
Bush liner, St, zinc-plated, black
m = 410 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.93

2 collared bushes, St, zinc-plated, black
m = 1020 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.91
125
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections
1.3.3 Suitable for connecting profiles which cross at any angle.

The connection is made by power-locking the profile end
Cross-Profile faces.
Connections
Direct- For power-lock connection of two Profiles 8 whose

groove sides are contacting.
Fastening Set 8 The profiles can also run parallel to each other for a
certain distance. Neither profile needs to be machined,
thereby ensuring that the profiles can be moved in both
grooves. The Direct-Fastening Set is particularly
suitable for connecting the profiles of ball-bush guide
blocks with other profiles, so that the profiles can be
moved and no machining is required.
Note: Where anodized surfaces are to be fitted together,
we recommend greasing the contact points. This
minimises the level of noise generated.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 490 086
Installation note:
Slightly loosen the Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw so
that the small wedge (figure on far left) is seated
correctly to ensure the maximum clamping distance, and
slightly tighten the Countersunk Screw, so that the
profiles can only just be moved by hand.
After positioning both profiles, tension the Direct-
Fastening Set by tightening the Hexagon Socket Head
Cap Screw.
Direct-Fastening Set 8
Fastener, G-St, stainless
Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x20,
Spacer sleeve, POM, black
Mbzp. = 5.5 Nm
Mstainl.= 4.5 Nm
m = 37.0 g
126
Angle Hinge The Angle Hinge Brackets and Angle Clamp Brackets are
used for connecting two profiles of the same Line whose
Brackets, Angle side faces are in contact and which cross at an angle.
Clamp Brackets
The Angle Hinge Bracket serves as a fixed point of

rotation for profiles crossing each other. When the
screws are tight, the rotational position around the
bearing bush can still be selected at will.
The Angle Clamp Bracket can be used in combination

with an Angle Hinge Bracket or a second Angle Clamp
Bracket to provide a simple connection between two
crossing profiles.
Loosening the screw or clamp lever releases the tension
in the two profile grooves and allows rotation at any
angle and movement along the grooves.
Combination of Angle Hinge Bracket and Angle Clamp

Bracket, e.g. for adjusting the angle of a rest around a
fixed point of rotation.
Combination of two Angle Clamp Brackets, e.g. for
adjusting a rest (in terms of height, lateral location and
angle).
Angle Hinge Bracket 5

GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium
1 bearing bush, St, bright zinc-plated
1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x8,St, bright zinc-plated
1 dome-head screw M5x10, St, bright zinc-plated
a = 10 mm
m = 20 g
1 set 0.0.437.83
127
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections
Angle Hinge
Bracket, Angle
Clamp Bracket Angle Clamp Bracket 5
m = 19 g
1 set 0.0.437.84
Angle Clamp Bracket 5 with Clamp Lever

1 clamp lever M5x20, black
1 sleeve, St, black
m = 51 g
1 set 0.0.437.85

2 dome-head screws M6x14, St, bright zinc-plated
a = 15 mm
m = 65 g
1 set 0.0.441.97
Angle Clamp Bracket 6

m = 66 g
1 set 0.0.441.98

1 sleeve, St, black
m = 103 g
1 set 0.0.441.99

a = 20 mm
m = 135 g
1 set 0.0.457.76
Angle Clamp Bracket 8

m = 130 g
1 set 0.0.457.77

1 sleeve, St, black
m = 225 g
1 set 0.0.457.78
128
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.4 Butt Connections
1.3.4 Butt Connection of profiles end face to end face in order to

extend constructions: can also be retrofitted in some
Connections cases.
Universal-Butt- The Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets can be used to

connect the end faces of two profiles from the same
Fastening Sets Line. Universal-Butt-Fasfening Sets should always be
used in pairs.
Depending on the profile size and load, several pairs
may be necessary. Connection processing of the profiles
is the same as for the Universal-Fastening Sets.
Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 5
2 Universal Fasteners 5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M4, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 3 Nm Mstainl.= 2.5 Nm
m = 10 g

2 Universal Fasteners 6, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, stainless or bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 8.0 Nm
Mstainl.= 6.5 Nm
m =27.4 g

129
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.4 Butt Connections
Universal-Butt-
Fastening Sets
1 Universal Fastener 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
1 Universal Fastener 8 with threaded bore,
GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 25 Nm
Mstainl.= 20 Nm
m = 60 g

Automatic Butt- The Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets can be used to

connect the end faces of two profiles from the same Line
Fastening Sets without mechanical processing. Automatic Butt-
Fastening Sets should always be used in pairs.
Depending on the profile size and load, several pairs
may be necessary.

tightened. The Fasteners with internal threads have a
clockwise thread on the outside.
Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 5 should be inserted so

that the flattening on the thread is flush with the outer
edge of the profile.
130
Additional anti-torsion protection can be provided by
ensuring that the Fastener with internal thread is twisted
into the profile only so far till the end of the Fastener
projects into the groove opposite. The Fastener with
through bore must be screwed in the appropriate
distance.
Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 8 also contains two Caps
which can be fitted subsequently over the Fastening Set.
Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 5

1 Automatic Fastener 5 with through bore,
1 Automatic Fastener 5 with threaded bore,
Screw M4x40, St, stainless or bright zinc-plated
s = 4 A/F
Mbzp. = 2.5 Nm
Mstainl. = 2.5 Nm
m = 11.0 g

Hex. Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M5x45, St, stainless
s = 5 A/F
Mbzp. = 8.0 Nm
Mstainl. = 6.5 Nm
m = 23.0 g

1 Automatic Fastener 8 with through bore, St,
stainless or bright zinc-plated
1 Automatic Fastener 8 with threaded bore, St,
stainless or bright zinc-plated
Hex. Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x50, St, stainless
2 Caps, PA-GF, black
s = 6 A/F
Mbzp. = 14 Nm
Mstainl. = 11 Nm
m = 43 g
131
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.5 Paralllel-Profile Connections
1.3.5 Profile for the continuous connection of several profiles The load-carrying capacity of the attached composite
in longitudinal direction. The Connection Profiles allow profiles depends on the construction design and must
Parallel-Profile the user to create “composite profiles” with large exter- be determined for each case individually.
Connections nal dimensions and corresponding tolerances, but with
the small tolerances needed in the area of the groove
geometry or the core bores. These small tolerances
allow the use of all components in the MB Building Kit
System, in particular fasteners, dynamic elements etc.
Connection Connection Profile 8 40 is supplied in pairs and

machined with ø 11 mm bores (bore spacing 200 mm)
Profiles for the fastening screws.
Use of Captive Nuts (designed to fix positions and
prevent torsion) allows the Connection Profile to be
secured from one side. Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screws (tightening torque 34 Nm) DIN 912- M10x60,
M10x100 or M10x140 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts) of
the corresponding lengths are used to join Connection
Profiles.
The joint or screw heads and Captive Nuts can be fitted
with a dust-tight Cover Profile 32.
Innovation
German
utility model
94 03 157
Connection Profile 8 40
Al, anodized
A = 8.91 cm2 Ix = 5.65 cm4 Iy = 19.78 cm4
It = 4.53 cm4
m = 2.40 kg/m Wx = 2.84 cm3 Wy = 6.94 cm3
(The values apply for an individual profile section

and not for a pair)
1 pair, cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.422.35
Cover Profile 32
Al, anodized
m = 0.11 kg/m
Captive Nut M10

Cage and square nut, St, bright zinc-plated
m=8g
1 pce. 8.0.004.02
132
Connection Profiles 8 160 and 8 240 are supplied in
pairs and machined with bores (bore spacing 160 mm)
for the fastening screws DIN 912-M8x60 (tightening
torque 25 Nm) and Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M8 (Section
3.2 Screws and Nuts).
Innovation
German
utility model
298 18 331
The Connection Profile Braces (45° sections of the

Connection Profiles) are suitable for constructing
lightweight, open “composite profiles”. These Connection
Profile Braces consist of left and right diagonal sections
together with the corresponding nuts and bolts. They
can be retrofitted at any point and any distance
(dimension a / b) along the profiles which are being
joined. With a fixed spacing of 160 or 240 mm, the
Connection Profiles Braces represent an inexpensive
alternative to the latticework construction.

Al, anodized
A = 17.80 cm2 Ix = 16.70 cm4 Iy = 606.30 cm4
m = 4.76 kg/m Wx = 6.70 cm3 Wy = 67.80 cm3

and not for a pair)
Connection Profile Brace 8 160-45°

Al, anodized
1 Brace right
1 Brace left
2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x60, St,
bright zinc-plated
2 Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M8, St, bright zinc-plated
amin. = 33 mm (recommended 40 mm)
bmin. = 65 mm (recommended 80 mm)
m = 488 g
1 set 0.0.458.18
133
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections
Connection
Profiles
Al, anodized
A = 26.00 cm2 Ix = 19.20 cm4 Iy = 1804.00 cm4
m = 6.97 kg/m Wx = 7.10 cm3 Wy = 139.30 cm3

and not for a pair)
Connection Profile Brace 8 240-45°

Al, anodized
1 Brace right
1 Brace left
amin. = 38 mm (recommended 40 mm)
bmin. = 76 mm (recommended 80 mm)
m = 846 g
1 set 0.0.458.21
134
1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.6 Secure Connections
1.3.6 Secure To reinforce power-lock profile connections, additional,

positive-lock devices must be provided under certain
Connections loads (e.g. impact).
Pin Element The Pin Element is used for positive locking of power-
lock connections, e.g. for horizontal braces of
continuous vertical profiles which are subject to heavy
load. The Pin Element can be used, preferably in pairs,
to provide additional support for Standard, Universal
and Automatic Fasteners.
The Pin Element is inserted into the profile groove in the

end face and, after applying the Standard, Universal or
Automatic Fasteners, is then pushed against the end of
the profile and fixed in position. A ø 5.9 mm bore is
provided in the profile for the dowel.
The load-bearing capacity of the connection against
movement is increased to max. 3000 N per element.
Pin Element 8
Basic unit, St, nickel-plated
Grub screw DIN 916-M6x12, St, bright zinc-plated
Dowel DIN 7979-6m6x16, St, hardened
m = 34 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.37
135
136
2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded
The Floor Elements product group comprises: When selecting floor elements, it is important to take
2. Floor Elements > Adjustable Feet for jigs, machines and enclosures
> Castors for apparatus, containers and other mobile
into account the dynamic forces which are anticipated.
Floor elements are also used to compensate the height
applications and angle relative to the fastening face.
> Special elements for securing constructions to the
floor or wall
> Transport and base plates for connecting adjustable
feet and castors to various applications
2.1 Adjustable Feet

2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, The infinitely adjustable feet are suitable for structures
of all kinds. Depending on the particular application, the
Threaded adjustable feet can be fitted in the core bores of profiles
or used in combination with Base Plates / Transport
Plates. The range of applications can be extended by
appropriate inserts and foot clamps.
The minimum foot height is obtained by removing the
counter nut. Slope compensation is by means of ball
and socket. With Knuckle Foot 17 A/F, M5x36, the slope
is compensated by a spherical supporting surface in the
plate. The Foot is thread-locked by a plastic coating.
Adjustable Foot Load F Slope

(vertical) a
17 AF, M5x36 750 N 7,5°
D30, M6x45 900 N 15°

D30, M6x60 900 N 15°
D30, M8x29 AT 1000 N 0°
D40, M8x60 1500 N 15°

D40, M8x80 1500 N 15°
D40, M10x80 1500 N 15°
D60, M10x75 5000 N 7°

D60, M12x75 5000 N 7°
D60, M10x120 5000 N 7°
D60, M12x120 5000 N 7°
D80, M10x80 10,000 N 7°

D80, M12x100 10,000 N 7°
D80, M16x100 10,000 N 7°
D80, M12x160 10,000 N 7°
D80, M16x160 10,000 N 7°
137
2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded
Adjustable Feet,
Threaded
Knuckle Foot 17 AF, M5x36
Spindle, St, bright zinc-plated
Foot plate, PA, black
m =7g
1 pce. 0.0.370.81
Knuckle Foot D30, M6x45

Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.52

m = 17 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.51
Knuckle Foot D30, M8x29 AT

Foot plate, PA-GF, black
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.433.08

m = 37 g
1 pce. 0.0.364.68

m = 43 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.69

m = 65 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.74
138
Spindle, St, bright zinc-plated; foot plate, GD-Zn, black
m = 140 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.29

Spindle, St, bright zinc-plated; foot plate, GD-Zn, black
m = 162 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.22

Foot plate, GD-Zn, black
m = 163 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.30

m = 193 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.23

m = 263 g
1 pce. 0.0.432.84

m = 300 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.67

m = 366 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.29

m = 340 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.68

m = 450 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.66
139
2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded
2.1.2 The accessories extend the range of applications for

threaded adjustable feet.
Accessories for
Adjustable Feet,
Threaded
Rubber Inserts The Rubber Inserts are suitable for use as anti-slip
devices and floor protectors.
They can be retrofitted to Knuckle Feet D30 (not D30,
M8x29 AT), D40, D60 and D80.
Rubber Insert D80 can also be used in combination with

Adjustable Foot 8 PA.
This increases the overall height of the Adjustable Foot
by 12 mm.
Rubber Insert D30

NBR, black, hardness 80 Sh A,
oil and water resisting
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.434.50
Rubber Insert D40

m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.265.70
Rubber Insert D60

m = 18 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.33
Rubber Insert D80

m = 42 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.61
140
Anti-Vibration The Anti-Vibration Insert can be inserted into Knuckle
Foot D80 to absorb shocks and vibrations by internal
Insert friction.
The material is resistant to aging and corrosion as well
as to oils, greases, acids and solvents.
Spring The effective height (h) when not under load is 9 mm.
The value of h decreases by the spring distance a as a
distance function of the force F.
F a
2,000 N 4 mm
10,000 N 6 mm
The degree of vibration damping depends on the

excitation frequency. Shocks (excitation below the
natural frequency) will be reduced by the self-damping.
Anti-Vibration Insert D80

Woven steel fabrics, stainless
Self-damping: Approx. 15%
Natural frequency: 20-25 Hz
Resonance ratio: Approx. 3.3
Static load Fstat: 2000 N
Max. dynamic pressure loading Fdyn: 10,000 N
m = 115 g
1 pce. 0.0.458.93
141
2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded
Foot Clamps Foot Clamps are used, particularly in conjunction with

the Floor-Fastening Sets, for floor or wall mounting of
Knuckle Feet D60 and D80.
Floor-Fastening Sets 10x110 (Section 2.3 Accessories
for Floor Elements) should be used for wall or floor
mounting.
The permissible load for the Foot Clamps at the

fastening point is Fperm. = 5000 N.
Foot Clamp D60

GD-Zn, black
m = 223 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.37
Foot Clamp D80

GD-Zn, black
m = 492 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.30
142
2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet
2.1.3 Special These Adjustable Feet and fastenings are designed for
special applications such as furniture building and
Adjustable Feet protective walls for conveyor equipment and heavy-duty
machinery.
Adjustable Foot Adjustable Foot 8 PA is a height-adjustable foot for

tables and light equipment.
PA The height can be adjusted without the need for tools by
simply turning the lower part of the foot.
Various options for fastening to Profiles 8.

F = 1500 N
Fastening options on Profiles 5 with Base Plate/Transport

Plate 5 40x40, M8.
The anti-torsion pins must be removed.
Adjustable Foot 8 PA
Housing, PA-GF, black
Spindle, nut and washer St, bright zinc-plated
m = 71 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.64
143
Foot Plate Foot Plate 8 80x40 is an infinitely height-adjustable

element for stands and other structures used in
8 80x40 combination with Profiles 8 80x40 and Stand Profiles
8 80x40 K60 or 2xK60 (Section 7.2 Installation
Elements).
Fmax. = 1500 N
Grub screw DIN 914-M8x80 for height adustment can be

located at 4 positions by rotating the support plate.
Foot Plate 8 80x40

Base plate, St, black
Cap, PA-GF, black
Support Plate, St, black
2 grub screws DIN 916-M8x12, St, bright zinc-plated
1 grub screw DIN 914-M8x80, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 372 g
1 pce. 0.0.388.81
144
Adjustable Ball Adjustable Ball Foot 8 80x40 is suitable for securing
the Stand Profiles of cell guarding to the floor. It can be
Foot 8 80x40 inclined by ±4° and moved horizontally ±6 mm .
Profiles can be secured to the floor by using a central
Floor Fastening Set 10x110.
The connection holes can be used for securing Profiles
8 and 6 to the body of the Adjustable Ball Foot.
The ball socket and ring adjust to uneven floors.

The Adjustable Ball Foot can also be moved horizontally.
F =10,000 N
M = 150 Nm
Adjustable Ball Foot 8 80x40

Body GD-Zn, black
2 Washers St, black
Ring St, black
m = 850 g
1 pce. 0.0.458.57
L-Based Feet L-Based Feet are ideal for wall or floor mounting of
light-duty and heavy-duty equipment.
They are secured to the profile by a Fastening Screw
and T-Slot Nut.
Floor Fastening Set 10x110 should be used for wall
or floor mounting.
145
L-Based Feet
The adjustable L-Based Foot provides an easy means of

compensating for any unevenness of the floor or for
height adjustment.
The foot is adjusted by turning the setting screw. The
selected height should be fixed in position by tightening
the lateral Fastening Screw.
L-Based Foot 6 adjustable

Housing, GD-Al, black
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x60, St, bright zinc-plated and
slide-coated
Square nut M6, St, bright zinc-plated
amax. = 53.5 mm
amin. = 8.5 mm
c = 8 - 16 mm
Fmax. = 3000 N
m = 111 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.71
L-Based Foot 6 non-adjustable

m = 91 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.70
146
L-Based Foot 8 adjustable
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x80, St, bright zinc-plated and
slide-coated
Square nut M8, St, bright zinc-plated
amax. = 75 mm
amin. = 10 mm
c = 13 - 25 mm
Fmax. = 6000 N
m = 272 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.45
L-Based Foot 8 non-adjustable

c = 13 - 25 mm
m = 223 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.44
Foot Plate This heavy-duty Foot Plate is ideal for high-load

equipment and can be secured to the floor if necessary.
8 280 By inverting the Base Plate (offset groove location), it is
possible to connect different sizes of Stand Profiles.
Foot Plate 8 280

1 Base Plate 8 280
4 Knuckle Feet D80, M16x100
4 washers DIN 125-17, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 3.8 kg
1 pce. 0.0.265.58
147
Floor-Fixing The Floor-Fixing Plate is used for floor mounting and

levelling of machine frames.
Plate
Floor-Fixing Plate 8
GD-AL, black
Fmax. = 10,000 N
m = 610 g
1 pce. 0.0.388.12
Fastening Set 8, on profile side for Floor-

Fixing Plate 8
2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 44 g
1 set 0.0.404.19
148
Base Plates The Base Plates are used for attaching Stand Profiles to
the floor and levelling them.
By inverting the Base Plate (offset groove location), it is

possible to connect different sizes of Stand Profiles in
different positions.
Base Plate 8 160

Base plate, Al, natural anodized
2 Caps 8 160x28
3 Floor-Fastening Sets 10x110
m = 1.6 kg
1 pce. 0.0.026.17
Base Plate 8 280

Base plate, Al, natural anodized
2 Caps 8 160x28
m = 2.3 kg
1 pce. 0.0.388.69
149
2. Floor Elements 2.2 Castors
2.2 Castors Castors are available in a range of sizes, in the form of

Swivel Castors, Swivel Castors with double brake (brake
Castors, Swivel and Fixed for wheel axis and swivelling axis) and Fixed Castors.
The castors feature easy movement and high load-
bearing capacity. They are capable of withstanding the
majority of adverse environmental conditions.
The castors are also available with anti-static properties,

with tyres and fully-conductive wheels or housings, for
use in electronics environments. The discharge
resistance of the anti-static version is 105 W.
The specified carrying capacities are maximum values

under ideal operating conditions, at walking speed
(max. 4 km/h) and over smooth and flat surfaces.
If the floor is uneven and weight badly distributed, the
load per castor should be calculated in accordance with
the following formula:
dead weight + load

F=
3
Castor line D65 (castor diameter 65 mm) consists of the

variants: Swivel Castor and Swivel Castor with brake
(brake for wheel axis).
Castor lines D75 and D125 consist of the variants:
Swivel Castor, Swivel Castor with double-brake (brake
for wheel axis and swivelling axis) and Fixed Castor.
Swivel Castor D65 with brake Fixed Castor

The castors can be secured in the end faces of all Profile
Lines by means of a thread in the core bore (counter
boring and tapping may be required) or by using Base
Plates/Transport Plates (Section 2.3 Accessories for
Floor Elements).
The castors can be fitted to the groove side of the
profiles using appropriate Base Plates/Transport Plates
(thread lengths may need to be compensated by washers
DIN 125). A combination with Floor-Fastening Plate 8 is
also possible for specific applications.
Resistance of tyring Castor Line D65 Castor Line D75 Castor Line D125
PU Anti-Static NBR Anti-Static PU Anti-Static
Water x x x x x x
Salt water x x x x x x
Road-salt solution x x x x x x
Oils x x x x x
Animal and vegetable fats x x x x x
Diesel oil x x x
Petrol x
Cleansing agents x x x x
Soap solutions up to approx. 50° C x x x
150
Radius of Swivel (a) Offset (b) Thickness(t)
Castor D65 swivel 57 mm 20.0 mm -

Castor D65 swivel 68 mm 20.0 mm -
with brake
Castor D75 swivel 70 mm 30.5 mm 5 mm
with double-brake
Castor D75 fixed - - 2 mm
with double-brake
Castor D125 fixed - - 14 mm
Castor Line D65
Housing PA, black

Swivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slide bearing,
threaded pin protected against torsion,
dust shield, carrying capacity 50 kg/castor
Castor D65 swivel

Twin tyres PU, 80 Sh A, black
m = 167 g
1 pce. 0.0.444.94
Antistatic version
m = 172 g
1 pce. 0.0.444.92
Castor D65 swivel with brake

m = 178 g
1 pce. 0.0.444.95
Antistatic version
m = 183 g
1 pce. 0.0.444.93
Castor Line D75
Sheet-metal housing, bright zinc-plated, black

Swivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slide
bearing, dust shield, carrying capacity 60 kg/castor
Castor D75 swivel

Tyres NBR, 80 Sh A, grey
m = 306 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.14
Antistatic version
Tyres SBR, 80 Sh A, black
m = 285 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.15
151
2. Floor Elements 2.2 Castors
Castor Line D75
Castor D75 swivel with double-brake

m = 340 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.16
Antistatic version
m = 317 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.17
Castor D75 fixed

m = 260 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.12
Antistatic version
m = 240 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.13
Castor Line
D125
Sheet-metal casing, bright zinc-plated, black
Swivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slide bearing,
dust shield, carrying capacity 100 kg/castor
Castor D125 swivel

Tyres PU, 95 Sh A, black
m = 710 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.08
Antistatic version
m = 960 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.09
Castor D125 swivel with double-brake

m = 860 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.10
Antistatic version
Tyres NBR, 80 Sh A, black
m = 1100 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.11
Castor D125 fixed

m = 550 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.06
Antistatic version
Tyres NBR, 80 Sh A, black
m = 780 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.07
152
2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.1 Floor-Fastening Sets
2.3 Accessories Accessories for connecting floor elements to profiles or

for wall and floor mounting.
for Floor Ele-
ments
2.3.1 Floor- The Floor-Fastening Sets are used for floor and wall
fastening of Adjustable Feet, Base Plates, Floor-Fixing
Fastening Sets Plates, Foot Clamp D80 and other components.
Floor-Fastening Set 8x85

M = 20 Nm
m = 39 g
1 pce. 0.0.432.97

M = 20 Nm
m = 82 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.79

M = 35 Nm
m = 125 g
1 pce. 0.0.364.44
153
2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.2 Base Plates/Transport Plates
2.3.2 Base The Base Plates/Transport Plates, made from zinc

diecasting, are powder-coated on all sides and can be
Plates/Transport screwed into the core bores of the profile end faces.
Plates Threads of different diameters accommodate eyebolts,
Adjustable Feet, Castors and other elements.
GD-Zn, black
Base Plate/Transport Plate 5 40x20, M8

m = 56 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.58

m = 112 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.59

m = 109 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.60

m = 107 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.61
GD-Zn, black

m = 102 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.16
m = 101 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.06
m = 95 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.07

m = 193 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.15
m = 192 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.08
m = 186 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.09
154
GD-Zn, black

m = 253 g
1 pce. 0.0.440.71
m = 251 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.32
m = 241 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.33

m = 461 g
1 pce. 0.0.440.72
m = 459 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.22
m = 449 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.23
m = 440 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.24
Base Plate/Transport Plate 8 80x80-45°, M12

m = 427 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.50
Base Plate/Transport Plate 8 80x80-45°, M16

m = 412 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.51
155
156
3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts
The Fastening Elements product group contains: > Securing profile frames rigidly to machinery and
3. Fastening > Screws and T-Slot Nuts for securing components to
the profile groove
guard units
> Movable panel fastenings for swivelling, sliding and
Elements > System elements for securing panels rigidly to
profile structures
lifting doors, flaps, profile frames and shutters
> Clamping profiles for holding panel elements in

profile frames
3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts Special fastening elements are inserted into the profile
grooves to connect one profile to another or to secure
components to profile structures. Different types of T-
Slot Nuts with threads and groove profiles for
customised processing generate a counter-bearing for
the screw in the groove.
The T-Slot Nuts have different load-bearing capacities
depending on their design. These range from light-duty
applications such as fastening signs to highly stable
profile connections capable of withstanding even high
dynamic loading.
Where vibration resistance is required, use of T-Slot
Nuts St is recommended.
The profiles of the basic frame must only be connected
using T-Slot Nuts St.
The decision which T-Slot Nut to use depends on the

loads occurring during operation.
T-Slot Nut Order No. Recommended Permissible

tightening torque operating load F
5 St M5 0.0.370.01 4.5 Nm 500 N

5 St M5, stainless 0.0.425.11 3.6 Nm 400 N
5 St M4 0.0.370.06 3.0 Nm 500 N

5 St M4, stainless 0.0.425.10 2.4 Nm 400 N
5 St M3 0.0.437.19 1.5 Nm 500 N
5 Zn M3 0.0.391.20 1.0 Nm 50 N
5 Zn M2,5 0.0.391.22 0.7 Nm 50 N
5 Zn M2 0.0.391.24 0.5 Nm 50 N
6 St M6 0.0.419.40 14.0 Nm 1750 N *

6 St M6, stainless 0.0.439.75 11.0 Nm 1400 N *
6 St M5 0.0.419.43 8.0 Nm 1750 N *
6 St M4 0.0.419.46 4.0 Nm 1750 N *
6 Zn M4 0.0.441.45 1.5 Nm 150 N

6 Zn M3 0.0.441.42 1.0 Nm 150 N
157
T-Slot Nuts T-Slot Nuts Order No. Recommended Permissible

tightening torque operating load
8 St M8 heavy 0.0.420.83 34.0 Nm 5000 N *

8 St M6 heavy 0.0.427.75 14.0 Nm 3500 N *
8 St M8 0.0.026.18 25.0 Nm 5000 N *
8 St M6 0.0.026.23 14.0 Nm 3500 N *
8 St M5 0.0.420.05 8.0 Nm 2500 N *
8 St M4 0.0.420.06 4.0 Nm 2500 N *
8 St/PA M6 0.0.416.17 8.0 Nm 1000 N

8 St/PA M5 0.0.416.20 4.5 Nm 1000 N
8 St/PA M4 0.0.416.23 2.0 Nm 500 N
8 St/PA M3 0.0.416.26 1.0 Nm 500 N
8 Zn M5 0.0.373.44 1.5 Nm 250 N

8 Zn M4 0.0.373.58 1.5 Nm 250 N
8 Zn M3 0.0.373.59 1.0 Nm 250 N
8 PA 0.0.436.52 1.5 Nm 150 N
* Maximum load achievable in standard Profile only. Check profile properties if using e.g. Profile Light or Profile E.
The total load of a screw connection comprises the sum

of the pre-tensioning force and the operating load!
The recommended operating load is based on a safety
factor of 1.5.
158
T-Slot Nuts Fastening elements for securing components to the
profile groove with particular ease. When locked in the
Zn and PA groove, this produces a fixed thread. They are not
suitable for connecting profiles to other profiles.
T-Slot Nuts Zn and PA are prefitted (using the screw) to

the component to be secured and are inserted at any
position in the profile groove.
Tightening the screw automatically locks the T-Slot Nut
in the groove.
Pulling the screw fixes T-Slot Nuts Zn in the groove by
means of the conical flanks.
Fastening of components to T-Slot Nut 8 PA using self-

tapping Button-Head Screws T4 (Section 3.2 Fastening
Elements).
T-Slot Nut 5 Zn M2
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.391.24
T-Slot Nut 5 Zn M2.5

m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.391.22
T-Slot Nut 5 Zn M3
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.391.20
159
T-Slot Nuts
Zn and PA
T-Slot Nut 6 Zn M3
m = 2.3 g
1 pce. 0.0.441.42
T-Slot Nut 6 Zn M4
m = 2.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.441.45
T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M3
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.373.59
T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.373.58
T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M5
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.373.44
T-Slot Nut 8 PA
PA-GF, black
m= 1g
1 pce. 0.0.436.52
160
T-Slot Nuts T-Slot Nuts St for heavy-duty applications or for use in
fastening applications.
St and St/PA
T-Slot Nuts St/PA have the same function, but are only
suitable for low strength requirements and,
consequently, not for connecting one profile to another.
T-Slot Nuts St and St/PA are inserted into the profile

groove where they are secured in position by means of
thrust fingers.
St, bright zinc-plated or stainless
T-Slot Nut 5 St M3
m=2g
1 pce., bright zinc-plated 0.0.437.19
T-Slot Nut 5 St M4
m=2g
1 pce., stainless 0.0.425.10
T-Slot Nut 5 St M5
m=2g

T-Slot Nut 6 St M4
m=4g
161
T-Slot Nuts
St and St/PA
T-Slot Nut 6 St M5
m=4g

T-Slot Nut 6 St M6
m=4g

T-Slot Nut 8 St M4
m = 11 g
T-Slot Nut 8 St M5
m = 11 g
T-Slot Nut 8 St M8
m = 10 g
T-Slot Nut 8 St M6
m = 10 g

Basic unit PA-GF, black

Square nut insert St, black
Innovation T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M3

German patent m=2g
and foreign patent 1 pce. 0.0.416.26
EP 0 641 943
T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M4
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.416.23

m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.416.20

m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.416.17
162
T-Slot Nuts St T-Slot Nuts 8 St with 2 threads are best used in
conjunction with Angle Elements 8 T2 and Universal
with 2 Threads Fasteners or Automatic Fasteners for securing profiles at
45°, but can also be used for all other profile
connections.
T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM6-36

a = M6 b = 36 mm c = 26,4 mm
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.77

a = M6 b = 76 mm c = 66,4 mm
m = 38 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.78

a = M8 b = 36 mm c = 24 mm
m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.404.21

a = M8 b = 76 mm c = 64 mm
m = 36 g
1 pce. 0.0.404.23
163
T-Slot Nuts T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty, can be used for very heavy-
duty fastening applications.
St, heavy-duty They are inserted into the profile groove in the end
face where they are secured in position by means of a
thrust finger.
T-Slot Nut 8 St M6, heavy-duty

a = M6 b = 6.5 mm
m = 17 g
1 pce. 0.0.427.75

a = M8 b = 7.5 mm
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.420.83
164
3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles
3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Fastening elements for easy unit assembly, e.g. valves
and limit switches, or heavy-duty units with modular
Profiles dimensions which can be customised with bores and
corresponding threads as required.
Profile Bars and Groove Profiles and Profile Bars for special applications,
e.g. assembling complete modules.
Groove Profiles
The ability to customise the Profile Bars and Groove

Profiles mean that fastening elements can be produced
which are geared to the needs of specific applications.
Profile Bars St are inserted into the profile groove. Profi-

le Bars St, heavy-duty or Profile Bar 8 Al and Groove
Profiles Al are fitted into the groove profile. Profile Bar 8
Al is secured in the Al Profiles by means of its conical
flanks.
Profile Bar 5 St
Threaded bore max. M5
m = 89 g
1 pce., length 500 mm, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.56
1 pce., length 500 mm, stainless 0.0.425.18
Groove Profile 5 Al
Al, anodized
m = 178 g
165
3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles
Profile Bars and

Groove Profiles
Profile Bar 6 St
m = 170 g
Groove Profile 6 Al
Al, anodized
m = 400 g
Profile Bar 8 St
m = 270 g
Profile Bar 8 St, heavy-duty

m = 410 g
1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.427.23
Profile Bar 8 Al
Al, anodized
m = 110 g
Groove Profile 8 Al
Al, anodized
m = 632 g
Groove Profile 8 St
m = 440 g
1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.444.32
166
Screw Strips Al Screw Strips Al are fastening elements which are
particularly suitable for retrofitting into existing
constructions. The Screw Strips are pressed into the
profile groove from above and provide thread-cutting
screws (Section. 3.2 Screws and Nuts - Self-Tapping
Screws DIN 7981 St 4.2) with a screw channel along
their entire length.
s L
to 1 4.2 x 9.5
1 to 4 4.2 x 13
4 to 7 4.2 x 16
7 to 10 4.2 x 19
10 to 13 4.2 x 22
13 to 16 4.2 x 25
Screw Strip 6 Al
Al, anodized
m = 70 g/m
Screw Strip 8 Al
Al, anodized
m = 130 g/m
167
3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.1 Screws and Nuts
3.2 Screws and

Nuts
3.2.1 Screws Button-Head Screws, Self-Tapping Screws, Hexagon

Socket Head Cap Screws, Countersunk Screws and
and Nuts Hexagon Nuts with metric threads in different diameters
and lengths are all available.
Note: The galvanic treatment of the surfaces can result in
hydrogen induction in high-strength fastening elements.
Despite meticulous thermal post-treatment it is not
possible to totally rule out brittle fractures. This should
be taken into account in the design phase.
Button-Head Button-Head Screws T4 are thread-cutting screws for

screw connections in thremoplastics (for core bores
Screws T4 of ø 3.2 mm), in particular for T-Slot Nut PA.
St, black
Button-Head Screw T4x12

l = 12 mm m = 100 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.440.11

l = 14 mm m = 110 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.440.12

l = 16 mm m = 120 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.440.13

l = 18 mm m = 130 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.440.14

l = 25 mm m = 160 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.440.15
168
Self-Tapping
Screws
DIN 7981 St
Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7981 St 2.2x6.5

l = 6.5 mm m = 19 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.67

l = 9.5 mm m = 29 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.70

l = 9.5 mm m = 131 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.98
Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7981 St 4.2x13

l = 13 mm m = 160 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.34

l = 16 mm m = 178 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.35

l = 19 mm m = 200 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.36

l = 22 mm m = 223 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.37

l = 25 mm m = 240 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.000.38
169
Hexagon Socket
Head Cap
Screws
St, bright zinc-plated; property class 10.9
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M4x14

l = 14 mm m = 200 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.370.60

l = 16 mm m = 215 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.406.75

l = 18 mm m = 226 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.370.61

l = 20 mm m = 244 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.370.62

l = 20 mm m = 604 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.004.78

l = 28 mm m = 755 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.411.60

l = 100 mm m = 23 g
1 pce. 8.0.004.70

l = 140 mm m = 31.5 g
1 pce. 8.0.004.74

l = 60 mm m = 2900 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.006.37

l = 60 mm m = 44 g
1 pce. 8.0.003.98

l = 100 mm m = 68.5 g
1 pce. 8.0.004.47

l = 140 mm m = 92.5 g
1 pce. 8.0.004.50
170

l = 8 mm m = 260 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.004.89

l = 40 mm m = 950 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.007.44

l = 50 mm m = 2.9 g
1 pce., black 8.0.004.61

l = 60 mm m = 3.3 g
1 pce., black 8.0.004.83
Button-Head
Screws
ISO 7380
Button-Head Screw M4x8

l = 8 mm m = 107 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.001.99
l = 10 mm m = 121 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.02
l = 12 mm m = 134 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.05
l = 14 mm m = 149 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.08
171
Button-Head
Screws
ISO 7380 St, bright zinc-plated; property class 10.9

l = 16 mm m = 162 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.391.33
l = 18 mm m = 176 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.11
l = 20 mm m = 192 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.14
l = 25 mm m = 230 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.20
l = 30 mm m = 268 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.23

l = 8 mm m = 190 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.370.63

l = 10 mm m = 210 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.68

l = 12 mm m = 231 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.25

l = 14 mm m = 259 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.417.29

l = 16 mm m = 285 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.69

l = 18 mm m = 304 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.26

l = 20 mm m = 330 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.404.12

l = 25 mm m = 390 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.370.67

l = 30 mm m = 448 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.32

l = 35 mm m = 510 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.35

l = 40 mm m = 569 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.391.27
172

l = 45 mm m = 625 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.005.25

l = 10 mm m = 292 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.38

l = 12 mm m = 325 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.41

l = 14 mm m = 357 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.417.28
l = 16 mm m = 405 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.43

l = 18 mm m = 431 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.46

l = 20 mm m = 467 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.70

l = 25 mm m = 547 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.71

l = 30 mm m = 636 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.26

l = 35 mm m = 737 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.27

l = 40 mm m = 818 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.51

l = 45 mm m = 891 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.54

l = 50 mm m = 997 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.57
173
Button-Head
Screws St, bright zinc-plated; property class 10.9
ISO 7380
l = 10 mm m = 586 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.28

l = 12 mm m = 652 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.60

l = 14 mm m = 698 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.29

l = 16 mm m = 803 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.30

l = 18 mm m = 850 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.72

l = 20 mm m = 893 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.73
Button-Head Screw M8x20, stainless

St, stainless
l = 20 mm m = 850 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.388.95

l = 25 mm m = 1063 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.74

l = 30 mm m = 1231 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.75

l = 35 mm m = 1369 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.66

l = 40 mm m = 1559 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.76

l = 45 mm m = 1712 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.364.31

l = 50 mm m = 1887 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.69

l = 55 mm m = 2000 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.72

l = 60 mm m = 2130 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.77

l = 80 mm m = 2775 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.196.78
174
Countersunk
Screws DIN 7991
Property class 10.9
Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M5x10

St, black
l = 10 mm m = 180 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.005.64

l = 14 mm m = 329 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.005.22

St, black
l = 16 mm m = 745 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.006.16

St, black
l = 18 mm m = 775 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.006.18
Hexagon Nut DIN

934
Property class 8
Hexagon Nut DIN 934 M8

m = 500 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.006.38
175
3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements
3.2.2 Special Components for fastening parts to the profile groove.

Fastening Ele-
ments
Locating Locating Washers for optimising the application of

screw forces when using screws in profile grooves
Washers which are wider than the screw‘s nominal diameter
(suitable for Button-Head Screws DIN ISO 7380).
The screw can be tightened through a mounting bore
(similar to Standard Profile Connection).
Locating Washers can be used to conceal the

component securing mechanism (screw head in
profile groove, thread in component). In addition,
the Locating Washers allow Standard Connections
between profiles of different Lines.
Locating Washer 5 D3
amin. = ø 3 mm m = 66 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.63
amin. = ø 3.5 mm m = 63 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.61
amin. = ø 3 mm m = 240 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.59
amin. = ø 3.5 mm m = 238 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.57
amin. = ø 4 mm m = 245 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.55
176
amin. = ø 3.5 mm
m = 371 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.53
amin. = ø 4 mm
m = 390 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.51
amin. = ø 5 mm
m = 383 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.444.49
Bracket flat and Fastening elements suitable for connecting and

attaching Support and Wall Profiles or any other
Angle Bracket components.
right-angled When connecting Bracket flat and Angle Bracket
right-angled with components without profile grooves,
these must be provided with appropriate through
bores or threads.
Angle Bracket 8 40 right-angled is used to support

a table top on a profile structure.
177
3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements
Bracket flat and

Angle Bracket
right-angled Bracket 5 20 flat
St, black
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.464.23
Angle Bracket 5 20 right-angled

St, black
m = 24 g
1 pce. 0.0.464.22
Fastening Set 5 for Bracket /Angle Bracket 5 20

1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x8, St, black
m = 2.5 g
1 set 0.0.370.70
Bracket 6 30 flat
St, black
m = 38 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.11

St, black
m = 37 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.12

m=7g
1 set 0.0.459.26
Bracket 8 40 flat
St, black
m = 90 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.86

St, black
m = 85 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.87

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x14, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 16 g
1 set 0.0.350.17
178
3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners
Panel Fasteners There are numerous applications using the MB Building The diverse range of functions where rigid and movable
Kit System where the securing of panel elements to a panels are used is made possible by panel fastening
profile construction is required: elements.
> Construction of enclosures and guard units
> Panelling of casings
> Shelves, working surfaces, steps
> Swing, sliding and lifting doors
3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners In conjunction with standard profiles, panel elements
can either be mounted in the profile groove or they can
be attached offset from the groove with the aid of
appropriate components, e.g. Double Panel Profiles or
Multiblocks.
For example the profiles can form a self-contained frame
for the panel element as in the case of machine doors, or
the panels can be fitted directly into the basic frame.
The rigid connection is therefore made using
components which differ depending on the requirements
made on them in terms of strength, installation and
design. Rigid panels can be formed using profiles or
special clamping profiles.
179
3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.1 Fastening Panels in the Groove
3.3.1 Fastening Panel elements are secured in the profile groove using
Cover Profile PP or the Lip Seal.
Panels in the The panel elements may need to be notched at their
Groove corners. When fitting / removing, the frame may also
need to be partially disassembled.
Cover Profiles PP can also be used as a groove cover by
turning them through 180°.
Cover Profiles Cover Profile PP can be used as a cover for the profile
groove or as a panel-fixing profile for panel elements.
PP
Cover Profile 5 PP
PP
a = max. 1.5-2 mm m = 13.5 g/m
Cover Profile 6 PP
PP
a = 2-3.5 mm m = 20.4 g/m
Cover Profile 8 PP
PP
a = 4-5.5 mm m = 26.0 g/m
180
Lip Seals For fastening and sealing panel elements of differing
thickness which are inserted into profile grooves 5, 6
and 8.
Lip Seal 5 2-3mm

TPE, black
a = 2-3 mm
m = 19 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.437.12
Lip Seal 6 2-4mm

TPE, black
a = 2-4 mm
m = 24 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.439.20
Lip Seal 8 2-4mm

TPE, black
a = 2-4 mm
m = 74 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.436.85
Lip Seal 8 4-6mm

TPE, black
a = 4-6 mm
m = 29 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.436.88
181
3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.2 Fastening Panels on the Groove
3.3.2 Fastening Panels on Subsequent fastening of panel elements onto the profile
groove of an existing frame is made possible by means
the Groove of Multiblocks, Clamp Multiblocks, Screw Strips and
Panel Clamps etc.
Multiblocks The Multiblocks can be used to provide a secure method

of fastening any panel elements to the groove:
> Rapid and secure assembly or disassembly at a later
stage
> Fastening at any position on the profile groove and the
panel element
> Suitable for various loads
> Option of screwless or screw-type fastener
> Can be adapted for use with different panel element
thicknesses
Multiblocks PA Multiblock PA is inserted into the profile groove at any

position. Lightweight cladding panels, panel elements
made of acrylic glass, plastic or composite materials
must be drilled at the appropriate position and screw-
fitted to the Multiblock.
The mounting dimensions can be varied through
repositioning the contact face and through the movable
height adjuster.
The panels are secured using either the through bores or
the square nuts in the basic unit. This ensures a wide
tolerance range for the position of the screw holes relative
to the outer edges of the panel elements, since the
inserted square nuts can be positioned freely.
The Multiblocks can be moved within the groove in
order to align them with the bore in the panel element.
Innovation
German patent
34 22 222
Recommendation for fitting the panel element.

F
5 PA 100 N
6 PA 150 N
8 PA 250 N
182
5 PA
Panel elements of thickness 2, 4 and 6 mm can be fitted

flush with the outer edge of the profile.
Multiblock 5 PA
Basic unit and height adjuster, PA-GF, black
Square nut DIN 562-M4, St, bright zinc-plated
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.370.71
6 PA
Panel elements of thickness 3, 6 and 9 mm can be fitted

flush with the outer edge of the profile.
Multiblock 6 PA
m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.419.58
183
Multiblocks PA
8 PA
Panel elements of thickness 5, 10 and 15 mm can be

fitted flush with the outer edge of the profile.
Multiblock 8 PA
Leaf spring, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.72
Multiblocks Zn For fixing panel elements to profile grooves, particularly

where heavy loads are involved.
Multiblock Zn is screwed to the profile groove with a
screw and T-Slot Nut. The anti-torsion pin, which is
adjustable in millimetre increments, ensures flush
attachment for panels of different thicknesses. The panel
elements must be drilled in the appropriate position to
line up with either the through bore or the square nut
(which is secured against falling out by a leaf spring)
incorporated in the Multiblock.
F1 F2
6 Zn 1000 N 500 N
8 Zn 2000 N 1000 N
Recommended mounting arrangement and load data

across and along the groove.
184
6 Zn
To attach a panel element with an M6 screw from above,

the existing hole in the Multiblock must be tapped M6.
Multiblock 6 Zn
Basic unit and locating lug, GD-Zn, black
Leaf spring, St, stainless
m = 44 g
1 pce. 0.0.439.85
185
Multiblocks Zn
8 Zn
To attach a panel element with an M8 screw from above,

an M8 thread must be cut into the Multiblock core bore.
Multiblock 8 Zn
Basic unit and locating lug, GD-Zn, black
Leaf spring, St, stainless
m = 66 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.23
186
Clamp Multi- Clamp Multiblock PA is inserted into the profile groove;
a locating lug secures lightweight panel elements of
blocks PA different thicknesses, such as cladding panels, panel
elements made from acrylic glass, etc.
Apart from cutting to length, no further processing is
required on the panel elements.
Innovation
German patent
34 22 222
The locating lug can be detached again by means of a

screwdriver.
The basic unit is twisted into the groove, the panel

element fitted and clamped in position by means of the
locating lug.
F1 F2
5 PA 100 N 20 N
6 PA 150 N 30 N
8 PA 250 N 50 N
5 PA Mounting dimensions can be varied through

repositioning the contact faces.
Clamp Multiblock 5 PA
Basic unit and locating lug, PA-GF, black
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.437.24
187
Clamp Multi-
blocks
6 PA
m=4g
1 pce. 0.0.439.66
8 PA
m = 10 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.63
188
Double Panel Double Panel Profile for retrofitting panel elements into The facing screw channels allow the construction of
existing frame constructions using Self-Tapping Screws double-walled frame elements. Used in conjunction with
Profiles DIN 7981 St 4.2 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts). Sound-Insulating Material 20 (Section 5 Panel Elements)
and Sealing Strip 6x3 sk, it is possible to construct
elements which are air-tight and noise-reducing.
Double Panel Double Panel Profile 8 Al E can be locked into the

groove of Profiles 8 without need for screw connections.
Profile
8 Al E
Innovation
German patent
195 04 593
Assembling and disassembling Double Panel Profile 8

1. Al E.
2.
s L
to 3 4.2 x 9.5
3 to 6 4.2 x 13
6 to 9 4.2 x 16
9 to 12 4.2 x 19
12 to 15 4.2 x 22
15 to 18 4.2 x 25
Double Panel Profile 8 Al E

Al, anodized
A = 1.35 cm2 Ix = 0.35 cm4 Iy = 0.44 cm4
m = 0.36 kg/m Wx = 0.31 cm3 Wy = 0.43 cm3
189
Double Panel Profile 8 Al Double Panel Profile 8 Al is ideal for profile

constructions with Universal Fasteners and / or Lip Seal
6x3 sk is to be used.
Innovation
German patent
195 04 454
Assembling and disassembling Double Panel Profile 8

Al. Fastening on the profile groove via Clip 8 PA.
s L
to 3 4.2 x 9.5
3 to 6 4.2 x 13.0
6 to 9 4.2 x 16.0
9 to 12 4.2 x 19.0
12 to 15 4.2 x 22.0
15 to 18 4.2 x 25.0
Double Panel Profile in conjunction with Lip Seal 6x3 sk

or Sound-Insulating Material 20.
Double Panel Profile 8 Al can also be screwed directly

onto a panel element etc.
190
Double Panel Profile 8 Al
Al, anodized
A = 1.62 cm2 Ix = 0.86 cm4 Iy = 0.44 cm4
m = 0.44 kg/m Wx = 0.72 cm3 Wy = 0.40 cm3
Clip 8 PA
PA-GF, black
Recommended number: 4 pce./m
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.422.38
Sealing Strip Sealing Strip, self-adhesive on one side, for sealing

frame elements. Can also be used as a damping element
on mating surfaces, particularly in combination with
Double Panel Profile 8 Al.
Sealing Strip 6x3 sk

Cellular rubber, closed-cell, self-adhesive on one side, black
Temperature range: –30°C to +110°C
Resistant to many oils, fuels, acids and alkaline solutions
m = 3 g/m
1 roll, length 10m 0.0.422.66
191
Panel-Fixing Used in conjunction with Double Panel Profile 8 Al and

Clip 8 PA, the Panel-Fixing Strip is ideal for retrofitting
Strip essentially air-tight panel elements into existing frame
constructions.
Apart from the cut-off, no additional machining is required
for the panel element.
Panel-Fixing Strip 8
PVC
m = 55 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm, grey 0.0.440.33
192
Rebate Profiles Rebate Profile for universal fastening of various
elements to Profiles 8. Suitable as a continuous screw
strip for practically dust and dirt-tight constructions, in
combination with panel elements and Sealing Strips or
as a rebate strip for doors.
The Rebate Profile is inserted into the groove and fixed

in position with grub screws.
Rebate Profile 8 Al 19“ is used for fixing 19“ front plates

or 19“ housings or other panel elements. These are
secured to the Rebate Profile by means of Captive Nuts.
1 height unit (HU) corresponds to a length of 44.45 mm
Rebate Profile 8 Al
Al, anodized
m = 310 g/m
Rebate Profile 8 Al 19“

Al, anodized
Fully machined with 91 openings and 21 M6 threads incl. grub screws
DIN 913-M6x12, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 630 g
193
Captive Nuts Universal usage for installation in Rebate Profile 8 Al

19“ or in panel elements. The Captive Nuts can be
installed by snapping the latch springs into the
corresponding recess.
The recesses can be either:

Square - with anti-torsion block
Round - without anti-torsion block.
Captive Nut M4
m = 400 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.411.64
Captive Nut M5
m = 500 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.411.65
Captive Nut M6
m = 500 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.411.66
194
Panel Clamp For securing panel elements to Profiles 8 without the
need for additional machining. Tightening the clamping
screw fixes the Panel Clamp to both the panel element
and the profile.
Particularly suitable for attachment of unframed panels
etc. Not suitable for mesh and corrugated mesh. The
panel elements of thickness 4-10 mm can be clamped in
position by the asymmetrical spacer washers.
Depending on the particular application, it may be
necessary to rotate the spacer washers in the housing.
Max. loading for each Panel Clamp without pinning.

Fmax = 100 N
Possible pinning position for securing the panel element

against movement.
Panel Clamp 8
2 housing halves, PA-GF, black
1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x20, St,
bright zinc-plated
1 Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, St, bright zinc-plated
2 spacer washers, NBR, black
m = 56 g
1 set 0.0.388.91
195
3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles
3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Clamp Profiles are particularly suitable for panel
elements such as corrugated mesh which are not stable
Special Profiles in themselves. The panel elements are secured in the
Clamp Profiles to produce a stable frame element.
The finished frame elements made of standard profiles
or special Clamp Profiles can be either fixed to the basic
construction or can be movable in the form of a door etc.
Clamp Profiles Any panel element can be clamped in the Clamp Profiles
and combined to form stable frame elements. The Clamp
Profiles are particularly suitable for use with non-
inherently stable panels such as corrugated mesh, thin
sheet panels etc.
The stable frames can be incorporated into the basic
frame of a fixture in the form of rigid panels or swing,
sliding or lifting doors.
Other applications include large-capacity guards and
enclosures, installed as free-standing units around
machinery at production plants (cell guarding), and
room dividers in offices, warehouses or points of sale.
Clamp Profile 8 40x40

Handling is enhanced compared with conventional
structures, partly because of the significantly lower
material weight and the optimum static rigidity achieved
by clamping the panel element in the profile frame.
All enclosure and guard units can be quickly modified,
extended at will and re-used at other locations.
The benefits for the user:
> Substantial reduction in mounting and dismantling
Clamp Profile 8 32x18 times due to easy and clean installation procedures
> Low material weight requires less personnel for
mounting and dismantling
> Use of special hangers means frame elements can be
removed quickly
> Can be used for all panel elements
196
Clamp Profile 8 Particularly suitable for constructing guards and
enclosures, doors and other panelling structures. 10 mm
thick panel elements can be fitted into the groove
without using Clamping Springs.
Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 8 32x18 ensures a
correctly positioned corner connection for the profiles.
The number of Clamping Springs required depends on
the load and the size of the panel element.
Innovation
German
utility model
91 10 357
Instead of Clamping Spring 8, a Lip Seal 8 can also be

used for securing inherently stable panel elements.

Al, anodized
A = 2.50 cm2 Ix = 1.89 cm4 Iy = 1.11 cm4
m = 0.67 kg/m Wx = 1.18 cm3 Wy = 1.23 cm3
Cap 8 32x18
PA-GF, black
m = 2.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.388.87
Clamping Spring 8
St, stainless
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.406.21
Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 8 32x18

Fastener, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
M = 4.5 Nm
m = 11 g
1 set 0.0.404.09
197
Clamp-Profile System E Clamp-Profile System E is ideal for easy and fast

construction of frame elements for enclosure and guard
systems. A stainless steel strip is inserted into the
weight-optimised profiles to protect the various panel
elements from becoming dislodged from the groove.
Securing and clamping the panels increases the overall
strength of the frame elements.
Innovation
German
utility model
297 04 548
The profiles are connected by means of special corner

blocks which can also assume additional functions when
hooking the frame into the basic construction or can
also serve as hinges.
Innovation The Clamp-Profile Hangers E which engage in the
Clamp-Profile Fasteners are used for suspending the
German frame elements.
utility model
297 06 040
By drilling the Clamp-Profile Fastener at a prepared

point and pressing in a grooved pin, the Fastener and
Clamp-Profile Hinge E can also be used for attaching
swing doors.
The Clamp-Profile Fastener can be combined with any

desired Profiles 6 30x30 or 8 40x40 and also with the
existing Clamp Profiles 6 30x30 or 8 40x40. The fact
that the Clamp-Profile Fastener has a special cavity
means that the panels to be fitted in the profile grooves
do not need to be notched.
Connection of Clamp-Profiles E with Clamp-Profile
Fasteners E.
Installation sequence:
2. 1. Insert the Clamp-Profile Strip into the spring cavity in
the Clamp Profile.
2. Press in the panel element.
1.
Producing frames:
1. Cut-off of panel element = inside frame dimension + 2
x insertion depth (t).
2. Fit the Clamp-Profile Fastener loosely onto the
upright frame profiles.
3. Place the horizontal frame profiles centrally onto the
panel element so as to ensure initial gentle clamping by
the steel strip. The panel element must not yet be
pressed all the way into the groove.
4. Assemble the frame and tighten the bolts. The panel
element will be pressed into the groove by varying
amounts (depending on the tolerance position) when the
bolts are tightened.
198
Clamp Profile 6 30x30 E
Al, anodized
a = 2 - 6 mm
t = 16 mm
A = 3.58 cm2 Ix = 2.77 cm4 Iy = 3.24 cm4
m = 0.97 kg/m Wx = 1.81 cm3 Wy = 2.14 cm3
Clamp-Profile Strip 6 23x0,15 E

St, stainless
m = 27 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.441.52
Clamp-Profile Fastener 6 30x30 E

bright zinc-plated
m = 78 g
1 set 0.0.441.80
Clamp Profile 8 40x40 E

Al, anodized
a = 2 - 8.5 mm
t = 21 mm
A = 6.50 cm2 Ix = 8.79 cm4 Iy =10.67 cm4
m = 1.76 kg/m Wx = 4.29 cm3 Wy = 5.25 cm3
Clamp-Profile Strip 8 30x0,15 E

St, stainless
m = 35 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.440.48
Clamp-Profile Fastener 8 40x40 E

bright zinc-plated
m = 187 g
1 set 0.0.444.76
199
Clamp-Profile Clamp-Profile Hangers E can be used to hang frame

elements into any desired construction with Clamp-
Hangers E Profile Fasteners E. By integrating the suspension
facility into the corner areas of the frame element, it is
possible to achieve a very narrow gap (12 mm) between
the frame element and the stand.
Suspended frame elements can also be locked if

required by subsequently moving the lower Clamp-
Profile Hanger.
1. Hook the frame element into the existing construction.
2. Fix the height of the frame element using the upper
hangers.
3. Move the lower Clamp-Profile Hangers to lock the
frame element in position.
Clamp-Profile Hanger 6 E
a = 4.75 mm
4 bolts, St, black
4 washers DIN 9021-6.4, St, black
m = 76 g
1 set 0.0.441.11
Clamp-Profile Hanger 8 E
a = 8.25 mm
4 bolts, St, black
m = 112 g
1 set 0.0.440.05
200
Clamp-Profile Clamp-Profile Hinge E enables frame elements with
Clamp-Profile Fasteners to be used as swing doors.
Hinges E Clamp-Profile Hinge E can be used in combination with
Clamp-Profile Fasteners 6 30x30 E and 8 40x40 E.
The Clamp-Profile Fasteners are prepared by drilling the

basic bore to ø 5 mm and then pressing in grooved pin
DIN 1474.
The fastening screws for the two halves of the hinge can
be reached easily when the door is open and allow the
door to be fitted by sliding together the two halves of the
hinge.
Clamp-Profile Hinge E
2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, black
4 Washers DIN 125-5.3, St, black
2 grooved pins DIN 1474-5x40, St
m = 202 g
1 set 0.0.444.12
Clamp-Profile Hinge Fastening Set 6

4 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M6x12, St, black
m = 36 g
1 set 0.0.441.66
Clamp-Profile Hinge Fastening Set 8

m = 58 g
1 set 0.0.444.11
201
Clamp Profiles The Clamp Profiles are particularly suitable for

constructing and subdividing large-area guards and
enclosures as well as swing and sliding doors.
Corrugated mesh, sheet material, panels and plastic
panel elements can be clamped into position.
The secure clamping of the panel elements reinforces
the high rigidity of the frame element.
When designing panel frames it is important to ensure

that the vertical profiles are the through profiles, i.e. that
x
the horizontal struts run between them. (Section 9.3.2
Connection Processing).
Where the panels are to be divided by a central strut, this
should always be run between the outer frame profiles.
When the Clamp Profiles are attached to 2 panel
elements, this should only be done on the end face of
the profile.
The Profile Edging (i.e. clamping strip) will need to be
interrupted accordingly.
Clamp Profile 6 Clamp Profile 8

30x30 30x30-180° 40x40 40x40-180°
c - 12-1 mm - 15+1 mm
M M d 15+1 mm - 20+2 mm -
Mmax. 2 Nm 8 Nm
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380
a M6x30 M8x40
b 150 mm 200 mm
s 2 - 6 mm 2 - 8.5 mm
202
Al, anodized
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x12, St,
bright zinc-plated
A = 4.14 cm2 Ix = 3.20 cm4 Iy = 3.54 cm4
m = 1.27 kg/m Wx = 2.04 cm3 Wy = 2.34 cm3
Clamp Profile 6 30x30-180°

Al, anodized
bright zinc-plated
A = 4.64 cm2 Ix = 3.53 cm4 Iy = 3.88 cm4
m = 1.55 kg/m Wx = 2.35 cm3 Wy = 2.54 cm3

Al, anodized
bright zinc-plated
A = 7.40 cm2 Ix = 11.96 cm4 Iy = 9.58 cm4
m = 2.30 kg/m Wx = 5.93 cm3 Wy = 4.55 cm3
Clamp Profile 8 40x40-180°

Al, anodized
bright zinc-plated
A = 8.38 cm2 Ix = 11.40 cm4 Iy = 13.00 cm4
m = 2.56 kg/m Wx = 5.70 cm3 Wy = 6.20 cm3
203
Clamp-Profile The Clamp-Profile Cross Connector is designed for

connecting Clamp Profiles / Clamp Profiles E of Lines 6
Cross Connector and 8.
It can be used for the construction of framed panel
elements for enclosures and guards which feature inside
corners, cut-outs or internal apertures.
In addition, up to 4 Clamp Profiles can be secured at a
single intersection point.
Installation note:
The following screws are required for securing the
Clamp-Profile Cross Connectors to the Clamp Profiles:
Clamp Profile 6 30x30: Screw ISO 7380 M6x14
Clamp Profile 8 40x40: Screw ISO 7380 M8x20
Inside corner with a Clamp-Profile Cross Connector and

two Clamp Profile Connectors.
Cut-out with two Clamp Profile Cross Connectors and
two Clamp Profile Connectors.
Central aperture with four Clamp Profile Cross

Connectors.
When planning panel element cut-outs, the penetration

depth (a) specified here must be taken into account
irrespective of the penetration depth specified for the
Clamp Profiles.
Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 6 30x30

St, RAL 9006 white aluminium
a = 12 -1 mm
m = 74 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.09
Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 8 40x40

St, RAL 9006 white aluminium
a = 15 +1 mm
m = 168 g
1 pce. 0.0.457.92
204
Fastening Frame Elements Rapid assembly or disassembly of frame elements is
required when enclosure and guard systems are used as
an integral part of the fixture itself or as free-standing
machine guards (cell guarding).
Quick and simple assembly is facilitated by hangers and
door rabbets.
Hanger 6-8 Hanger for securing frame elements to Stand Profiles,

including combinations, of Lines 6 and 8.
In terms of its function, the hanger is not restricted to
use with frame elements and can be used for any module
which has to be replaced quickly. If required, the
Hangers can be screwed together front and rear using
grub screw DIN 913-M5x10 in order to prevent lifting.
205
Hanger 6-8 Profiles 6 and 8 can be combined by turning around the

anti-torsion block.
Fastening to Profile 6 using Button-Head Screw ISO
7380-M6x14 and T-Slot Nut 6 St M6.
Fastening to Profile 8 using Button-Head Screw ISO
7380-M6x16 and T-Slot Nut 8 St M6.
Attaching the Hanger from the front ensures that the

frame and panel elements can be fitted without space.
Hanger 6-8 can be used to maintain very small gaps

between the frame and the Stand Profile.
F = approx. 400 N
Hanger 6-8
2 hangers, GD-Zn, black
2 anti-torsion blocks, GD-Zn, black
1 grub screw DIN 913-M5x10, black
m = 70 g
1 set 0.0.441.33
206
Hanger 8 Particularly robust version allows frequent attachment
and securing of frame elements to Stand Profiles 8.
If required, Hangers 8 can be screw-connected to each
other from the front or rear.
Two Hangers 8 and appropriate Fastening Sets are
required for each attachment point.
Hanger 8 GD-Zn in conjunction with Clamp Profile 8

40x40.
Hanger 8 GD-Zn in conjunction with Clamp Profile 8

32x18.
Attaching the Hanger from the front ensures that the

frame and panel elements can be fitted without space.
F = approx. 750 N
Hanger 8
1 Hanger, GD-Zn, black
1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x16,
1 Washer DIN 125-6.4 St, bright zinc-plated
m = 87 g
1 set 0.0.196.44
Fastening Set 8 for Hanger 8

1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x25,
2 spring washers, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.265.05
207
Door Rabbet Screw-connected rabbet for swing doors, but can also
be used as a hanger if the frame element needs to be
screw-connected for safety reasons.
The frame element cannot be hung without a securing
screw and therefore removal of the screw will be
detected immediately.
Door example with Hinges 8 40 Zn (left) and Door

Rabbets 8 with Door Lock 8 (right).
Door Rabbet 8
2 Door Rabbets, GD-Zn, black
4 spring washers, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 190 g
1 set 0.0.265.15
208
3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.1 Hinges
3.4 Movable Panel Swing, sliding or lifting doors can be produced with the
aid of movable panel fasteners.
Fasteners In this arrangement, the doors can be in the form of
either inherently stable panels without frames or frame
elements with integral panels.
Sliding door from a frame element with Corrugated Mesh Al and Clamp Profile
8 32x18
3.4.1 Hinges The Hinges can be used for direct attachment of

frameless panel elements, for a movable fastening
between two profiles and for attachment of framed
panels to the basic frame. They can also be mounted in
front of the profile or panel and even in the space
between the panel frame and the main frame or door
post.
Hinges PA Hinges PA are simple components for lightweight doors

and lids. They are provided with an anti-torsion element
which engages on the profile grooves.
Panel elements secured with Hinges PA must be
machined with the appropriate holes.
Double Hinges PA can only be used on 20 mm wide

profiles in Line 5, on 30 mm wide profiles in Line 6 and
on 40 mm wide profiles in Line 8.
209
Hinges PA
Hinge / Double Hinge
5 PA 6 PA 8PA
a = Countersunk Screw
DIN 7991 M5x8 M5x14 M6x16
b = T-Slot Nut 5 St M5 6 St M5 8 St M6
c ø 5 mm ø 6.3 mm ø 8.2 mm
d 15 mm 22 mm 24 mm
e 9 mm 14 mm 18 mm
f M5 M5 M6
F 50 N 75 N 100 N
PA-GF, black ; cannot be lifted out
Hinge 5 PA
m= 6 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.18
Double Hinge 5 PA
m = 10 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.33
Fastening Set 5 profile side for Hinge 5 PA

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x8, St, black
m=3g
1 set 0.0.370.70
210
Door elements of Lines 6 and 8 can be fitted so that they
can either be lifted off subsequently or remain fitted
permanently.
With the lift-off version, the door must be fitted with the
appropriate right-hand or left-hand hinges.
For the non-lift version, right-hand and left-hand hinges
must be combined in each case.
Hinge halves, PA-GF, black

Dowel, St, bright zinc-plated
Washer, PA, black
Hinge 6 PA, right

m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.23
Hinge 6 PA, left

m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.25
Double Hinge 6 PA
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.27

m=7g
1 set 0.0.434.65
Hinge halves, PA-GF, black

Dowel, St, bright zinc-plated
Washer, PA, black
Washer 8 PA, right

m = 21 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.12
Hinge 8 PA, left

m = 21 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.10
Double Hinge 8 PA
m = 40 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.42

m = 14 g
1 set 0.0.026.28
211
Hinge St Universal hinge for doors and lids. Can be mounted on

the inside or outside of the door (when mounted on the
inside it cannot be unscrewed).
This attachment version of Hinge St cannot be

unscrewed from the outside.
The panel element (door) can be swung around 180°.
F = 250 N
Hinge St
Hinge halves, St, black
3 dome-head screws M5x8, St, black
Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M5, St, black
Washer DIN 125-5,3, St, black
Cup square bolt DIN 603-M5x16, St, black
m = 51 g
1 set 0.0.373.82
212
Hinges 6 Zn Hinge 6 Zn can be used to construct swing doors with
Profiles 6, Profiles 8 or any desired panel elements.
The basic unit of the hinge used in conjunction with
asymmetric anti-torsion blocks allows a whole range of
combinations in Lines 6 and 8.
The anti-torsion blocks can be removed for making
screw-connections to panel elements.
Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/6
Possibilities for mounting the anti-torsion block with a
gap width of 6.2 mm.
Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/8
gap width of 6.2 mm and 8 mm.
Hinge 6 30 Zn 8/8
gap width of 8 mm.
Hinge F
6 30 Zn 6/6 300 N
6 30 Zn 6/8 300 N
6 30 Zn 8/8 300 N
213
Hinges 6 Zn
Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/6
Hinge, GD-Zn, black
2 anti-torsion blocks 6, GD-Zn, black
m = 62 g
1 set 0.0.441.58
Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/8
Hinge, GD-Zn, black
1 anti-torsion block 6, GD-Zn, black
1 anti-torsion block 8, GD-Zn, black
m = 63 g
1 set 0.0.441.61
Hinge 6 30 Zn 8/8
Hinge, GD-Zn, black
2 anti-torsion blocks 8, GD-Zn, black
m = 63 g
1 set 0.0.441.81
Hinge 8 Zn Suitable for higher loads, e.g. large machine doors and
doors for guard units, and as compact connecting
element for profiles positioned at various angles. Hinges
8 Zn are suitable for right-hand and left-hand
application. Fastening is possible on the outer surfaces
or end faces of profiles (using either long holes or ø 8
mm bore).
Integrated anti-torsion pins to provide additional
stability in the groove.
If required, e.g. when fitting to a panel element, the anti-

torsion pin should be removed with a screwdriver.
214
Attaching Hinge 8 40 Zn to the profile grooves of Line 8.
Hinge 8 40 Zn can be screw-connected to the end face

or to the profile groove.
F = 750 N
Hinge 8 40 Zn
Hinge halves, GD-Zn, black
m = 180 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.36
215
3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.2 Movable Fasteners
3.4.2 Movable The Movable Fasteners product group comprises Heavy sliding doors can be made to move particularly
components which are used for constructing sliding, easily using C-Rail profiles.
Fasteners lifting and folding doors. These products can be found in Section 8.1 Linear
In addition to slide and rolling elements, a complete Slides.
Roller Shutter System is also provided for a movable
secured panel.
Sliding-Door For the construction of sliding doors from unframed

panel elements.
Guide Set 8 One Sliding Door Guide Set 8 is required for each
sliding door. Each slide piece is secured in position by
means of two Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x12.
Panel elements thicker than 5 mm must be secured with
Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16.
The slide pieces can be fitted from either side to suit the
application.
The maximum permissible weight of one door is 10 kg.
There can be either 1 or 2 sliding doors in a single Pro-

file 8 groove.
The slide pieces function as stops or catches for the se-
cond door at the terminal position.
Sliding-Door Guide Set 8

4 slide pieces (2x right, 2x left), POM, black
4 spacer pieces, POM, black
8 threaded bushings, St, black
m = 58 g
1 set 0.0.406.66
216
Sliding-Door For the construction of sliding doors in conjunction with
Clamp Profile 8 32x18.
Guide Set 8/8 One Sliding-Door Guide Set 8/8 is required for each
sliding door. Fastening is by means of a spring bolt
locking into the ø 7 mm mounting bore of Clamp-Profile
Fastening Set 8 32x18.
Should fastening elements in the guide groove cause
obstruction, the slide piece can be fixed at an alternative
position by drilling an additional ø 7 mm hole in the
door profile.
For sliding door constructions with n door elements of

the same size, the following equation can be used to
calculate the door width l:
L + 32 (n-1) - 8
________________________
l=
n
An overlap of Caps 8 32x18 of 4 mm is taken into

account.
The maximum permissible weight of one door is 10 kg.

There can be either 1 or 2 sliding doors in a single Pro-
file 8 groove.
The slide pieces function as stops or catches for the se-
cond door at the terminal position.
Sliding-Door Guide Set 8/8

4 slide pieces (2xright, 2xleft), POM, black
Spring bolt, St, bright zinc-plated
Spring, St, stainless
m = 49 g
1 set 0.0.404.87
217
T-Slot Slider The T-Slot Slider enables elements to slide in the profile
grooves while simultaneously rotating around the
fastening point.
It can be used to construct simple guides for various
components, e.g. keyboard pull-outs, panels for
operating instructions, or simple lifting, folding and
sliding doors in Line 5 or Line 6 profile grooves.
Construction of a folding door with T-Slot Sliders 6.
Unrestricted rotation of the T-Slot Slider around the hub

also compensates for possible alignment errors.
T-Slot Slider 5
T-Slot Slider, POM, black
T-Slot Slider hub, St, black
T-Slot Nut 5 St M3
a = 11 mm
F = 30 N
m= 6g
1 set 0.0.437.98
T-Slot Slider 6
T-Slot Slider, POM, black
T-Slot Slider hub, St, black
T-Slot Nut 6 St M4
a = 13 mm
F = 40 N
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.459.07
218
T-Slot Roller T-Slot Roller 8 can be used to construct a simple guide
for various components, e.g. keyboard pull-out, panels
for operating manuals or simple lifting doors in Profile 8
grooves.
T-Slot Roller 8 F corresponds to a fixed bearing end and
can absorb radial forces and axial forces (only for
securing position). To prevent strains resulting from saw
tolerances, etc., T-Slot Roller 8 L offers a solution which
transfers only radial forces in the direction of the groove
flanks. As a rule, the two types of roller must be used in
combination (e.g. T-Slot Roller 8 F for a keyboard pull-
out at the fixed bearing end, T-Slot Roller 8 L as a radial
support in the groove at the opposite end).
The T-Slot Rollers connect Profile 8 with the moving

component without any central offset.
The special T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4e with a central offset of

1 mm is available for moving elements made of Line 8
components in order to ensure free movement.
T-Slot Roller 8 L 50 N
T-Slot Roller 8 F 50 N
T-Slot Roller 8 L
1 floating bearing roller, POM, black
1 bearing hub, St, black
m=4g
1 set 0.0.457.60
T-Slot Roller 8 F
1 fixed bearing roller, POM, black
1 bearing hub, St, black
m=5g
1 set 0.0.457.51
T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4e

GD-Zn, black
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.457.47
219
Slide Guide Strips The Slide Guide Strip can be mounted directly in the
profile groove to create simple slide mechanisms. It can
be screw-connected to the profiles of the surrounding
frames or to moving modules.
Slide Guides L and F are only suitable for installation on
moving profiles.
The offset "e" prevents the moving components from
colliding with the fixed frame elements.
Slide Guide L (A = floating bearing) and Slide Guide F

(B = fixed bearing) as guide elements, secured to a
moving component.
Required machining and fastening elements for fixing a

Slide Guide Strip of any required length at the floating
bearing end.
The distance between the fastening elements should be
chosen to reflect the load.
Required machining and fastening elements for fixing

the Slide Guide Strip at the fixed bearing end.
Slide Guide Strip 5/5e must be counterbored by c = 2
mm in the area of the screw head.
Slide Guide Strip

Line 5 Line 6 Line 8
a M2.5 M3 M4
b M2.5x8 M3x12 M4x16
DIN 916 DIN 916 DIN 916
c 2.0 mm - -
d DIN 9021-2.7 DIN 9021-3.2 DIN 9021-4.3
e 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 2.0 mm
f M2.5x8 M3x12 M4x16
DIN 912 ISO 7380 ISO 7380
l 7.0 ±0,5 mm 7.5 ±0,5 mm 9.5 ±0,5 mm
220
Slide Guide Strip 5/5e
PE-UHMW, black
m = 80 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.464.24
Slide Guide 5/5e L

PE-UHMW, black, with threaded bores
2 grub screws DIN 916-M2.5x8, St, bright zinc-plated
m=5g
1 set 0.0.464.29
Slide Guide 5/5e F

PE-UHMW, black, with through bores
2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M3x14, St, bright zinc-plated
2 O-rings 3x1
m=8g
1 set 0.0.464.27

PE-UHMW, black
m = 150 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.459.27
Slide Guide 6/6e L

m = 11 g
1 set 0.0.459.32
Slide Guide 6/6e F

2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M3x18, St,
bright zinc-plated
2 O-rings 3x1
m = 19 g
1 set 0.0.459.30

PE-UHMW, black
m = 260 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.58
Slide Guide 8/8e L

m = 22 g
1 set 0.0.465.26
Slide Guide 8/8e F

bright zinc-plated
2 O-rings 4x1.5
m = 44 g
1 set 0.0.465.24
221
Lifting-Door Guide Set Lifting-Door Guide Set 8 facilitates the construction of

lifting doors consisting of frame elements with various
panel elements which are located between two Stand
Profiles.
One or two counter-weights which are connected to the

lifting door using Timing-Belt Reverse Units and Timing
Belts (Section 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements)
compensate for the weight of the door. The lifting door
and counter-weights are guided in the grooves of the
Stand Profiles by means of Guide Sets.
In addition, the Guide Sets connect the Timing Belt to
the lifting door and counter-weight. As a rule, four
Lifting Door Guide Sets are required for the lifting door
and two for each counter-weight. The size of the counter-
weight is determined by the weight of the lifting door.
Whether one or two counter-weights are installed
depends on the door weight and the ratio between the
door width and door height, i.e. guide length.
For the construction of the counter-weight, Support Pro-
files 80 and 160 with grooves 8 and Wall Profiles 80
(Section 7.1 Conduits) are used as well as Counter-
Weight Bottom Plates 80x80 and 160x80 with an
appropriate filling. Flat or round steel bars, metal scrap,
steel-blasting material etc. are suitable for use as filling
material.
The use of Timing-Belt Reverse Units is a basic

requirement for using drive units. The process of
opening and closing lifting doors can thus be automated
and integrated into manufacturing systems or transport
sequences.
222
Lifting-Door Guide Set 8
Housing halves, POM, black
Steel insert, St, bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
m = 94 g
1 set 0.0.388.70
Counter-Weight Bottom Plate 80x80 for cable conduit

4 Universal Fasteners, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
m = 315 g
1 set 0.0.373.76
Counter-Weight Bottom Plate 160x80 for cable conduit

4 Universal Fasteners, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
m = 512 g
1 set 0.0.373.75
223
Castors Versatile Castors which can be mounted in the profile

grooves.
POM and PA
Light, intrinsically stable panel elements can be used as

sliding doors in conjunction with the Castors.
F a b
Castor 5 POM 50 N 5 mm 4 mm
Castor 6 POM 100 N 8.5 mm 5.5 mm
Castor 8 PA 150 N 12.0 mm 10.0 mm
Castor 5 POM
Castor, POM, black
Bearing hub, St, black
Washer DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-plated
m= 4 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.97
Castor 6 POM
Castor, POM, black
Bearing hub, St, black
m= 16 g
1 pce. 0.0.419.79
Castor 8 PA
Castor, PA-GF, black
2 deep groove ball bearings, sealed
m= 32 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.83
224
Castor Unit Fully covered Castor running in profile groove 8.
The Castor Unit can be secured to Profiles 5, 6 and 8 as
8 PA well as directly to any chosen surfaces.
The mounting slots in the flange can be used to adjust

the height of the Castor Unit.
Castor 8 is asymmetrical. This means that the offset
between the profiles can be altered (0 or 2 mm)
depending on how it is installed.
F = max. 75 N
Castor Unit 8 PA
Flange, PA-GF, black
Cap, PA-GF, black
Castor 8 PA, black
2 hexagon screws DIN 933-M5x16, St, bright zinc-plated
2 washers, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 66 g
1 set 0.0.458.85
225
Roller Shutter (RS) System Roller Shutters (RS) can be used primarily as moving
panel elements for locking cabinet systems, control
panels and operating consoles etc. The major advantage
of the system is its flexibility, allowing it to be housed
within the cabinet, and requiring far less space than
swing or sliding doors.
The RS System is suitable for constructing manually-
operated vertical and horizontal roller shutters on frames
built from Profiles 8. The system consists of the RS
Guide and the Roller Shutter itself, both of which are of
modular design. The Roller Shutter is available in
aluminium or plastic.
RS Systems should be designed so that the width-to-
height ratio of the Roller Shutter is less than 2.5. Plastic
Roller Shutters should not be made wider than 1000 mm
in order to ensure they maintain stability.
Example of an RS System in a system cabinet. The RS

Guide has been matched to the contour of the cabinet.
View of an RS Guide positioned behind a fixed panel

element.
226
RS Guide The RS Guide is of modular design and consists of an
RS Guide Profile and RS Curved Guides 45°. The RS
Guide Strip is mounted onto the guide elements in order
to ensure that the Roller Shutter glides smoothly and
securely.
The process of assembling the guide begins with
defining the position of all the guide elements. The
lengths required for the RS Guide Profiles are shown in
the following table.
The total length of the guide must allow the Roller
Shutter to be moved to each terminal position.
Lengths a and b are used for measuring the lengths of

Guide routing options
Groove
the RS Guide Profiles. The dimension L designates the

5 6 7 8 length of the Guide Profile required between Curved
Guides 45°.
L = 140 L = 120 L = 80 L = 60
Example:
1 a = 125 a = 125.5 a =122.5 a =123.5 Guide for Roller Shutter from groove 1 into groove 5
b = 125 b = 110.5 b = 82.5 b = 68 L = 140 mm
L = 120 L = 140 L = 100 L = 80 a = 125 mm
b = 125 mm
2 a = 110.5 a = 125 a =121.5 a =122.5
b = 125.5 b = 125 b = 95 b = 82.5
L = 80 L = 60 L = 20 L= 0
3 a = 82.5 a = 83.5 a = 80 a = 80.5
b = 122.5 b = 108 b = 80 b = 65.5
L = 60 L = 80 L= 0 L = 20
4 a = 68 a = 82.5 a = 65.5 a = 80
b = 123.5 b = 122.5 b = 80.5 b = 80
RS Guide Profile 8
Al, anodized
A = 2.28 cm2
m = 613 g/m
Clip 8 St
Recommended number: 5 per 1 m
m = 2.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.428.97
RS Curved Guide Set 45°

2 Curved Guide 45°, PA, black
4 Countersunk Screws DIN 965 M2.5x5, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 135 g
1 set 0.0.465.70
RS Slide Strip
PE-HD, black
A = 45.7 mm2
m = 880 g/20m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.458.64
227
Aluminium Aluminium Roller Shutters are constructed as Slat Profi-

les Al with Slat Insulators between them. Each slat must
Roller Shutters be provided with Slat Sliding Shoes at each end. Weight
of aluminium Roller Shutter: 8 kg / m2
Length of aluminium RS Slats: X-24 mm
RS Slat Profile Al
Al, anodized
A = 0.58 cm2
m = 157 g/m
RS Slat Insulator
PA, transparent
Recommended usage: 4 per 1m
m = 40 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.465.68
RS Slat Sliding Shoe

PA, black
m = 60 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.465.62
Plastic Roller RS Slat Profile K is connected to a Roller Shutter by

means of the integrated locking segments. No Slat
Shutters Insulators or Slat Sliding Shoes are required.
Weight of plastic Roller Shutter: 3.7 kg / m2
Length of plastic RS Slats: X-16 mm
RS Slat Profile K
PVC, grey, aluminium-coloured coating
m = 465 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.91
228
RS End Strip The RS End Strip is used to terminate the Roller Shutter.
The Locking System and any desired handles can be
secured in the End Strip.
If two End Strips are to interlock (two Roller Shutters
meeting), one of the End Strips must be fitted with a
headless screw in order to engage the locking bar.
Length of the RS End Strip: X-50 mm
RS End Strip
Al, anodized
A = 2.95 cm2
m = 796 g/m
RS End Strip Guide Set

1 RS End Strip cap, left, PA, black
1 RS End Strip cap, right, PA, black
2 RS End Strip rollers, POM/St, black
m=8g
1 set 0.0.465.58
RS Locking System 8
Cylinder Lock, all keys identical
Key, locking bar, nab
Headless screw
m = 105 g
1 set 0.0.465.57
229
230
4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles
The Handles and Locks product group contains:

4. Handles and Locks > Handles
> Grip systems
> Locks and door locks
They therefore augment the movable panel fastening
elements used for constructing guards and enclosures.
Grip systems can also be used, however, for
constructing handling and transport devices.
4.1. Handles Swing, sliding and lifting doors are operated with
handles or grip systems. The grips are either screwed
directly into an inherently stable panel element or they
are attached to the profile of the panel frame.
Handles PA Handles PA for highly versatile application; they can be

attached from the front or rear (concealed) and are
particularly suitable for sliding and swing doors.
231
4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles
Handles PA
Handle PA 80
PA-GF, black
m = 9g
1 pce. 0.0.391.34
Handle PA 120
PA-GF, black
m = 30 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.35
Handle PA 160
PA-GF, black
m = 93 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.57
Handles Al Handles of straight and angled design.
Angled handles are particularly suitable for sliding and

swing doors.
232
Can be rear-mounted (concealed). Can also be front-
mounted in conjunction with Fastening Sets.
Handle Al 120
Al, black
m = 37 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.85
Handle Al 120 cranked

Al, black
m = 43 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.87
Fastening Set for Handle Al 120

2 connection elements 120, GD-Zn, black
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.418.81
Handle Al 200
Al, black
m = 261 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.81
Handle Al 200 cranked

Al, black
m = 312 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.83
Fastening Set for Handle Al 200

2 connection elements 200, GD-Zn, black
m = 130 g
1 set 0.0.418.82
233
4. Handles and Locks 4.2 Grip Systems
Handle, light Lightweight handle for universal application.

duty
Can be rear-mounted (concealed) using M5 screws.
Handle, light duty

Al, anodized
m = 87 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.026.44
4.2 Grip Systems Grip systems or grip rails contribute to the rigidity of
frameless panel elements.
234
Hand-Grip Hand-Grip Elements, in conjunction with profiles and
Caps, can be used to construct handles which, when the
Elements panel elements are attached, have a supplementary
stabilising effect.
Hand-Grip Element
5 8
a 10 mm 20 mm
b ø 4.3 mm ø 7.0 mm
c Button-Head Screw Button-Head Screw

ISO 7380 ISO 7380
M5x40 M8x60
d Washer DIN 125 Washer DIN 125

ø 5.3 mm ø 8.4 mm
e Button-Head Screw Button-Head Screw

ISO 7380 ISO 7380
M5x(t+38 mm) M8x(t+56 mm)
Hand-Grip Element 5
PA-GF, black
m=7g
1 pce. 0.0.391.19
Hand-Grip Element 8
PA-GF, black
m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.60
235
4. Handles and Locks 4.2 Grip Systems
Grip Rail Profile Grip Rail Profile for universal application on swing and
sliding doors, drawers etc.
Particularly suitable for applications where injuries may
otherwise occur.
When attached to panel elements, the Grip Rail Profile
also has a stabilising effect.
Grip Rail Profile

Al, anodized
A =2.80 cm2 Ix = 5.56 cm4 Iy = 2.66 cm4
m =0.76 kg/m Wx = 2.24cm3 Wy = 1.62 cm3
Grip Rail Cap Set

Grip Rail Cap, right, PA-GF, black
Grip Rail Cap, left, PA-GF, black
m = 3,5 g
1 set 0.0.432.28
236
Grip System Grip system for constructing handles from Profiles 5 or 6.
The Grip End Cap must be screw-connected in the
profile‘s core bore with Countersunk Screw DIN 7991.
Grip system 6 is ideal for heavy doors etc.
Discontinuation of the Grip Cover Profile for right-

angled profile connections.
Can be connected using Standard or Universal

Fastening Set.
Can be connected from the inside of the door using T-Slot
Nut St and Button-Head Screw ISO 7380.
Grip Cover Profile 5 20x4

TPE, black
Hardness 73 Sh A
Oil, UV and water resisting
m = 78.2 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.437.04
Grip End Cap 5 D28

PA-GF, black
m = 1.9 g
1 pce. 0.0.437.06
Grip Cover Profile 6 30x6

TPE, black
Hardness 65 Sh A
m = 170 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.441.85
Grip End Cap 6 D42

PA-GF, black
m=4g
1 pce. 0.0.441.87
237
4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.1 Door Catches
4.3 Locks and As well as the latching function, locking systems also
provide security against unauthorised entry via swing or
Catches sliding doors constructed from inherently stable panel
elements.
4.3.1 Door
Catches
Magnetic Magnetic Catches are particularly suitable for latching
swing and sliding doors.
Catches They can be adjusted to the thickness of the panel
elements by means of mounting slots. The Magnetic
Catch can be rotated around 180° for different holding
strengths.
Magnetic Catch
5 8
a Hexagon Socket Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screw Head Cap Screw
DIN 912 DIN 912
M4x12 M6x20
b 1 mm -
c - 1 mm
d 7 mm 14 mm
e M4 M5
f 8 mm 10 mm
F1 3N 10 N
Magnetic Catch 5
PA-GF, black
Flat head screw DIN 921-M4x5, St, bright zinc-plated as holding plate
m= 9 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.32
Magnetic Catch 8
PA-GF, black
Flat head screw DIN 921-M5x6, St, bright zinc-plated as holding plate
m = 34 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.48
238
Ball Latch Versatile quick-action latch for sliding and swing doors.
Can be adjusted to the thickness of the panel element by
means of the mounting slots. It can be set as a stop for
both sliding and swing doors.
New low-wear design with increased holding force.
The mounting slots in the Ball Latch casing means that

the sliding door and Stand Profile can be offset.
Recommended fastening to the profile: Hexagon Socket
Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M5 and Washer DIN 125-5.3.
Use of Multiblock Zn permits narrow door gap.
Ball Latch 8 PA
PA-GF, black
Ball pin St, bright zinc-plated
Holding forcemax. = 75 N
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.388.20
239
4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.2 Locking Systems
4.3.2 Locking As well as the latching function, Locking Systems also

Systems sliding doors constructed from inherently stable panel
elements.
The Locking Systems can be used for left-hand or right-
hand application by turning the locking bar.
The panel elements will need to be machined for
Locking Systems 5 and 8 which are used with
unframed doors.
Nab, with two different mounting positions for sliding

and swing doors.
Locking System 5, Cylinder Lock

Cylinder lock (all keys identical)
m = 91 g
1 set 0.0.391.16
Locking System 5, Double-Beard Lock

Double-beard insert
m = 120 g
1 set 0.0.391.17

m = 116 g
1 set 0.0.196.61

Double-beard insert
m = 143 g
1 set 0.0.196.62
240
4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.3 Door Locks
4.3.3 For locking and securing sliding and swing doors.

Frame and Stand Profiles do not need to be machined.
Door Locks
Depending on the application, the anti-torsion blocks in

the housing can be repositioned.
The nabs have two different mounting positions for
sliding and swing doors.
Door Lock 8 with Cylinder Lock

Housing and anti-torsion blocks, PA-GF, black
bright zinc-plated
m = 204 g
1 set 0.0.265.08
Door Lock 8 with Double-Beard Insert

Double-beard insert
Housing and anti-torsion blocks, PA-GF, black
bright zinc-plated
m = 237 g
1 set 0.0.265.09
241
Door Locks For locking and securing swing and sliding doors from
Clamp Profiles 8 40x40.
The mortise lock is prepared for fitting standard profile
cylinders and can be fitted into both right-hand and
left-hand doors.
Suitable for integration in MK / GMK suites or for use of
individual profile cylinders.
When the door is closed, the gap between the door

frame and the Stand Profile is 22 mm.
The Profile Cylinder can be used with a knob when

constructing escape doors. Closed doors which are
equipped in this way can be opened from the knob side
without need for a key.
A specially machined Clamp Profile 8 40 x 40 as part of

the door frame serves to accommodate the mortise lock.
The lock centring pieces are only employed for a sliding
door.
242
Door Lock 8 for Profile Cylinder
Door Lock for Profile Cylinder
Mortise lock, St, bright zinc-plated
1 locking cam, PA-GF, black
2 lock centring pieces, PA-GF, black
1 cover, PA-GF, black
m = 450 g
1 set 0.0.388.27
Profile 8 machined for Door Lock for Profile Cylinder

Preparation of Clamp Profile 8 40x40 to accommodate the mortise lock
and Profile Cylinder
1 pce. 0.0.404.15
Profile Cylinder with Knob, keys identical

Cylinder matt nickel-plated, all keys identical
Knob PA, black
3 keys
m = 217 g
1 pce. 0.0.388.36
Lock System For locking swing and sliding doors from Profiles 6 or 8
and a combination of both Lines. The profile frame does
6-8 not need to be machined for holding the Lock System.
The screws concealed when the door is locked prevent
the Lock System from being dismantled by
unauthorised persons.
The lock housing is suitable for use with mortise locks
to DIN 18251, pin dimension 65 mm.
Its versatile fastening options mean that Lock System
6-8 can be fitted to both right-opening and left-opening
doors and to the inside and outside of doors.
The lock can be chosen to suit the specific function.
243
Lock System 6-8 Outward-opening swing door, stop provided by the lock
housing rabbet.
Inward-opening swing door, stop provided by the lock

housing rabbet on the lock case.
Lock System 6-8 fitted to a sliding door.
The panel element may need to be drilled for fitting door

handles and standard cylinder locks. The lock housing
contains the preformed openings for the holes.
The distance to the edge of the door determines the
position of the through holes in the panel element which
are required for the door handle and profile cylinder.
The door gap does not depend on the Profile Line used.
The lengths of the standard Profile Cylinder on the side and the combination of stand and frame profiles.
facing the panel element must be calculated using the
thickness of the panel element, the frame profile used
244
Lock System 6-8
Lock housing, PA-GF, black
Lock case, PA-GF, black with nab, St
Lock housing rabbet, St, black
2 angle brackets, Al, anodized
2 door handles, PA, black
1 spacer sleeve, PA, black
2 drive nuts M4, St, black
m = 1360 g
1 set 0.0.458.33
Sliding-Door Lock
Lock insert, St, suitable for standard cylinder locks
2 drive nuts M4, St, black
m = 812 g
1 set 0.0.458.34
Swing-Door Lock
Lock insert with movable latch, St, suitable for
standard cylinder locks
m = 850 g
1 pce. 0.0.458.35
Profile Cylinder
Cylinder matt nickel-plated, all keys identical
1 Countersunk Screw M5x80, St
3 keys
m = 250 g
1 pce. 0.0.458.42
Fastening Set 6 for Lock System 6-8

m = 15 g
1 set 0.0.459.05
Fastening Set 8 for Lock System 6-8

m = 27 g
1 set 0.0.458.36
245
246
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels
This product group comprises panel elements of

5. Panel Elements various materials.
These panel elements are ideal for producing machine
casings, guards, enclosures and housings as well as
for constructing work benches.
The specified maximum panel dimensions apply for
unmachined panel edges as delivered.
The maximum cut-off dimensions are 30 mm less in
each case.
Because of the production methods used for
manufacturing plastic panel elements, tolerances in
material thicknesses are unavoidable.
The Roller Shutter is a variable panel element. The entire
Roller Shutter System can be found in Section 3.4
Movable Panel Fasteners.
5.1 Panels Acrylic glass, clear or tinted; suitable for translucent

casings or doors, with wear-resistant surface.
Polycarbonate, clear or tinted; particularly suitable for
transparent casings or doors, to satisfy demanding
fracture-resistance requirements.
Plastic (resin-bonded, hot-pressed cellulose); suitable
for heavy-duty working surfaces and casings.
Composite material (plastic, coated on both sides with
natural-finish anodized aluminium); particularly suitable
for inherently stable lightweight doors and casings.
Aluminium sheet, polished and not degreased, or
colour-coated, used as a panel element for machine
casings; can be painted.
The aluminium chequer sheet is particularly suitable for
walk-on platforms or steps.
Aluminium panel segments with matching tongue-and-
Commutator lathe
groove geometry; for constructing individually designed
panel elements. The segmented panel elements can be
transported and stored with ease and offer virtually
unlimited options for expansion to a whole range of
panel forms.
247
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.1 Transparent Panels
5.1.1 Transparent Cast Acrylic Glass with hard-wearing surface is

particularly suitable for doors and panelling.
Panels High gloss is possible through polishing.
Acrylic Glass Polycarbonate is impact-resistant and shatterproof and
Polycarbonate is therefore ideal for doors and panelling with high
safety requirements. Long-term use of cooling
lubricants with polycarbonate panels can result in the
material becoming brittle and reduce the strength of
the safety panel.
PMMA, natural or tinted

Thickness tolerance ± 10%
Acrylic Glass 5mm

m = 5.90 kg/m2
Panel dimensions max. 3050x2030 mm
Cut-off, natural 0.0.428.21
Cut-off, tinted 0.0.388.97
Acrylic Glass 8mm

m = 9.44 kg/m2
PC, natural or tinted

Polycarbonate 5mm
m = 6.00 kg/m2
Polycarbonate 8mm
m = 9.60 kg/m2
248
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels
5.1.2 Non- Sheet Material Al is suitable for machine casings

of all types.
Transparent
Panels
Sheet Material
Sheet Material Al 2mm

AlMg1
m = 5.40 kg/m2
Cut-off, cold rolled (not degreased) 0.0.428.27
Cut-off, one side polyester coated, green RAL6011, 0.0.364.36
Cut-off, natural anodized 0.0.473.08
Compound Compound Material consists of two anodized aluminium

outer layers which are bonded together by means of a PE
Material core. It is ideal for lightweight doors and panelling.
Compound Material 4mm

Al-PE compound
m = 5.80 kg/m2
Cut-off, natural anodized 0.0.026.73
249
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels
Plastics Plastic is particularly suitable for highly stressed

working surfaces and panelling.
The surfaces are anti-static.
Resin-bonded cellulose laminate, colour-coated on both sides,

similar to RAL colour code
Plastic 4mm
m = 5.72 kg/m2
Cut-off, traffic-white, similar to RAL9016 0.0.473.04
Cut-off, green, similar to RAL6011 0.0.428.41
Cut-off, red, similar to RAL3000 0.0.428.43
Cut-off, yellow, similar to RAL1034 0.0.428.44
Cut-off, blue, similar to RAL5014 0.0.428.45
Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7035 (light) 0.0.428.46
Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7030 (medium) 0.0.428.47
Plastic 10mm
m = 14.60 kg/m2
Cut-off, traffic-white, similar to RAL9016 0.0.473.06
Cut-off, green, similar to RAL6011 0.0.364.32
Cut-off, red, similar to RAL3000 0.0.428.89
Cut-off, yellow, similar to RAL1034 0.0.428.90
Cut-off, blue, similar to RAL5014 0.0.428.91
Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7035 (light) 0.0.428.92
Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7030 (medium) 0.0.428.93
250
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.3 Modular Panels
Chequer Sheet Aluminium chequer sheet is used for walk-on surfaces

or steps.
Chequer Sheet Al 5mm

AlMg3, cold rolled (not degreased)
“Duett” chequering DIN EN 1386
Panel dimensions max. 3000x1500mm
m = 9.90 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.428.53
5.1.3 Modular The modular segments with corresponding groove-and-

tongue geometry can be used for constructing
Panels customised panel elements. Offset or appropriate butt
Panel Segments joints between the individual segments enable long
panels to be constructed from short individual segments
and also permit holes and openings to be constructed in
the panel. They also ensure easier handling for
transport, storage and cut-off procedures.
Waste can be optimised or avoided altogether.
Innovation
German
utility model
296 13 885
251
5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.3 Modular Panels
Panel Segments Panel Segment 55 E can be used as an end element for

the Panel Segments with tongue and groove in order to
achieve any desired panel element size. It can be cut to
any desired point.
The resulting panel can be secured in an existing frame
using Cover Profiles PP, screw-connection, etc.
Panel Segment 40 E
Al, anodized
A = 0.93 cm2 Ix = 2.06 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4
m = 0.25 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 0.05 cm3
Panel Segment 80 E
Al, anodized
A = 1.55 cm2 Ix =11.53 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4
m = 0.42 kg/m Wx = 2.58 cm3 Wy = 0.06 cm3
Panel Segment 160 E

Al, anodized
A = 2.80 cm2 Ix =72.54 cm4 Iy = 0.03 cm4
m = 0.75 kg/m Wx = 8.56 cm3 Wy = 0.07 cm3
Panel Segment 55 E
Al, anodized
A = 1.41 cm2 Ix = 3.51 cm4 Iy = 0.04 cm4
m = 0.38 kg/m Wx = 1.24 cm3 Wy = 0.18 cm3
252
5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels
5.2 Mesh Corrugated Mesh and Steel Mesh are particularly

suitable for guards, enclosures and partitioning in
Panels conjunction with Clamp Profiles (Section 3.3 Rigid
Panel Fasteners).
The aluminium Perforated Sheet is an ideal panel
element for air-permeable machine panelling.
Automatisches Handlingsystem
Corrugated
Mesh Al
Al, anodized
max. 3000x1810 mm
Corrugated Mesh Al 3mm 20x20

Mesh: 20 mm Wire thickness: 3 mm
m = 1.8 kg/m2
Corrugated Mesh Al 4mm 30x30

m = 2.1 kg/m2
253
5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels
Corrugated
Mesh St
St, electrogalvanized wires

max. 3000x1810 mm
Corrugated Mesh St 3mm 20x20

m = 2.8 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.428.32

m = 4.9 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.428.34

m = 4.6 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.428.36
Steel Mesh Due to the high inherent stability of the Steel Mesh
(straight wires, welded), it is also hightly suitable for
direct use in the profile groove.
254
Steel wire (straight wires)
welded, zinc-plated or coated
Max. 2000x1000 mm
Mesh: 40 mm Wire thickness: 3.8 mm
Steel Mesh 3.8mm 40x40

Electrogalvanized
m = 5.1 kg/m2
Cut-off, bright zinc-plated 0.0.428.38
Hot-dip galvanized and powder coated

m = 5.3 kg/m2
Cut-off, black RAL9005 0.0.428.39
Perforated
Sheet
Perforated Sheet Al 3mm

AlMg3, cold rolled (not degreased) or coated
Hole diameter = 10 mm in offset rows
DIN 24041; residual area approx. 60%
m = 4.80 kg/m2
Cut-off, cold rolled 0.0.428.29
Cut-off, black powder-coated RAL9005 0.0.428.30
255
5. Panel Elements 5.3 Panels for Work Bench Design
5.3 Panels for Panel Elements for the construction of shelves, benches
and other fixtures.
Work Bench > Beech Multi-Ply, available in different thicknesses for
Design use on robust work benches or furniture cladding panels
for all applications
> Ready-made Beech Multi-Ply table tops (30 mm)
ergonomically designed
In many cases, panel elements for machine casings are

used in work bench design:
> Plastic, used as a load-bearing durable table top or
side panel
> Aluminium Perforated Sheet, used as a leg screen or
as a rack for tools
> Sheet Materials and Composite Materials used as side
panels
> Aluminium Chequer Sheets in the vicinity of the
footrest
TRIGO Work Bench, four legs
Beech Multi-Ply Beech Multi-Ply panels, 30 mm, with moisture-resistant

adhesive, for sturdy, impact-resistant and vibration-
damping work surfaces, and 8 mm thickness for side
panels and shelving in workshops and office areas.
Since wood is a natural product, there may be differences
in the grain and tone. Environmental influences
(moisture) can also affect dimensions.
A diagonal corner section (45°) is also available which

allows special accessories to be used when designing
work benches.
When ordering, specify the dimension of cut-off b x t,
the direction of the grain, any processing of the cut
edges which is required, and the position and size of
any diagonal sections ds.
Ready-to-use Beech Multi-Ply panels in fixed modular
dimensions for work benches can be found in Section
6.5 Work Bench Design.
Beech Multi-Ply, clear coated on both sides with

phenolic resin, oil-resistant, water-repellant
Adhesive: AW to DIN 68705T2
Wood tone: reddish, grain in longitudinal direction
(2000 mm)
Beech Multi-Ply 8mm

m = 5.9 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.433.35
Beech Multi-Ply 30mm
m = 22.1 kg/m2
Cut-off 0.0.433.36
Diagonal Section ds-45°
1 pce. 0.2.000.82
256
5. Panel Elements 5.4 Accessories for Panel Elements
5.4 Accessories The Accessories for Panel Elements are used when the
design needs to meet special requirements:
for Panel > Noise-damping casings or noise-dampened
Elements devices can be produced very easily using Sound-
Insulating Material.
> Edge Profile S3 Al is particularly suitable for covering
sharp, cut edges on thin-wall panel elements.
Sound- Sound-Insulating Material for reducing the effect of

sound emission to the environment can be used for both
Insulating complete encapsulation and individual partitions.
Material It is self-adhesive on one side (rubber-based adhesive,
peel-away paper covering).
Sound-Insulating Material bonded onto a panel element

secured with Double Panel Profile 8 Al.
The sound-insulating effect depends on the
excitation frequency.
Sound-Insulating Material 20mm

PUR-ester special foam, anthracite, coated with
PVC film, perforated, easy to wash down,
anthracite-coloured
Sound absorption as per DIN 52215-63
Temperature resistance: -40°C to +100°C
Thermal conductivity: 0.033 W/mK, DIN 52612
Fire characteristics: self-extinguishing to FMVSS 302,
DIN 75200
Panel dimensions 480x480 mm
m = 253 g/panel
1 pce. 0.0.440.75
Edge Profile Edge Profile as edging for 3 mm thick panel elements

whose cut edges require covering, e.g. Perforated
S3 Al Sheet Al etc.
The Edge Profile can be machined to provide a right-
angled butt joint or a 45° mitre cut.
Edge Profile S3 Al
Al, anodized
A = 0.33 cm2
m = 89 g/m
257
258
6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge
The Special Elements product group contains special

6. Special Elements components for:
> Discharging electrical currents
> Using the profiles as pneumatic lines, and
their connections
> Safeguarding doors, guards and enclosures
of all kinds
> Material flow (conveyor technology)
> Designing work benches
> Lighting
> General accessories for special tasks
6.1 Electrical Discharge Unlike conventionally processed, welded steel frames

and steel racks, the components of an aluminium profile
structure do not fundamentally form a continuous
electrically conductive entity.
The visually attractive and scratchproof anodized surface
covering, which is also resistant to a variety of environ-
mental effects, provides electrical insulation.
For this reason, the majority of connections between
the electrically conductive profile end faces and an
insulating profile side face are not necessarily
electrically conductive.
Earthing Terminals Terminals for earthing profile constructions and for

interconnecting the profiles when the latter are
incorporated into a protective circuit.
Contact is made by partially destroying the anodized
layer in the T-slot and on the groove flanks.
The Earthing Terminal is installed by twisting the grub
screw into the T-slot and screwing in the hexagon nut
with the earthing line in place. The cable lug must lie
between the washer and the special washer.
259
6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge
Earthing Termi-
nals
Earthing Terminal 5
Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M5, brass
Washer DIN 9021-5.3, brass
Special washer DIN 6798-A 5.3, St, bright zinc-plated
m=6g
1 set 0.3.001.80
Earthing Terminal 6
m = 13 g
1 set 0.3.004.62
Earthing Terminal 8
m = 12 g
1 set 0.3.001.81
Potential The Potential Equaliser ensures voltage equalisation

between two profiles by partial destruction of the
Equaliser anodized surface covering. This has the effect of
equalising any electrostatic charges.
Potential Equaliser 8
m = 4.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.77
260
6. Special Elements 6.2 Pneumatic Applications
6.2 Pneumatic Applications In structures made from aluminium profiles, the cavities
and core bores can also act as compressed air lines
(system pressure 10 bar max.):
> Compressed air inlet and outlet lines via the end face
or the side face of the profile, complete with Pneumatic
Connecting or Joining Plates
> Profiles can be tapped at any position by fitting the
Pneumatic Connecting Sets or Pneumatic Connecting or
Joining Plates
> Airtight, right-angled connections between the
compressed air conducting profiles with the Pneumatic
Universal Fastener or the Pneumatic Joining Plates
> Airtight extension of the profiles with a special
Pneumatic Universal-Butt Fastener
> Seals for the various applications; the seals must be
inserted between all the joints of profile end faces,
Pneumatic Connecting Plates and Pneumatic
Joining Plates
> For use as single-chamber or multi-chamber system
Valve group is supplied with compressed air from the profile cavity or as control line through a number of self contained
core bores and profile cavities.
Appropriate fastening elements such as Pneumatic Uni-

versal Fasteners or Pneumatic Joining Plates are needed
in order to use the profile cavities as pneumatic lines.
The Automatic-Fastening Set (Section 1.3 Fasteners)
is also suitable for connecting profiles used as
pneumatic lines.
Practical examples of profiles conducting

compressed air:
> Connection of Profile 8 80x80 with Pneumatic
Joining Plate
> Connection of Profile 8 80x40 with Pneumatic
Universal-Fastening Sets
261
Pneumatic These fastening elements are used when the cavities

of Profiles 8 are used as compressed-air conduits.
Universal- Pneumatic Fastening Sets should always be used
Fastening Sets in pairs.
Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 8 is used for
connecting two profiles at 90°.
Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets 8 are used to

connect the end faces of two profiles, e.g. where profile
segments need to be extended.
Depending on the profile size and load, several pairs of

Fastening Sets may be required. When processing the
profiles, be careful not to damage the cavities.
Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 8

Pneumatic Universal Fastener 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x30, St, bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 14 Nm
Mstainl.= 11 Nm
m = 34 g
Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 8

2 Pneumatic Universal Fasteners 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x50, St, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, bright zinc-plated
Mbzp. = 14 Nm
Mstainl.= 11 Nm
m = 45 g
262
Pneumatic For joining Profiles 8 80x80 or 80x80-45° to Profiles
8 80x40 and larger at 90° as a compressed-air conduit.
Joining Plates The Joining Plate is attached by means of Button-Head
Screws ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm) fitted into the
core bores in the end face of the profile.
The complete unit can therefore be secured to a profile
using Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-
M6x25 (M = 14 Nm) and T-Slot Nuts St M6.
Pneumatic Joining Plate 8 80x80

GD-Zn, black
m = 440 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.26
Pneumatic Joining Plate 8 80x80-45°

GD-Zn, black
m = 410 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.47
263
Seals PE Seals PE must be located at every connection point

between components functioning as pneumatic lines.
The settlement of the Seal PE material can result in an
initial reduction in the screw pretension. The screws
must therefore be tightened after 24 hours.
Self-adhesive versions facilitate assembly and eliminate
pronounced unevenness (saw cuts, butt joints etc.).
Seals PE must be used between all joints.
Seal 8 80x40 PE
PE-LD soft, natural
self-adhesive on one side
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.420.80
Seal 8 80x80 PE
PE-LD soft, natural
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.420.79
Seal 8 80x80-45° PE
PE-LD soft, natural
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.420.95
264
Pneumatic For sealing the cut end faces of profiles. Connection to
compressed-air supply systems or of compressed-air
Connecting consumers to Profiles 8 80x40, 80x80 and 80x80-45°.
Plates The Connecting Plate is attached by means of Button-
Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm) fitted into
the core bores in the end faces of the profile.
Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Sets are employed for
connecting profiles used as compressed-air conduits.
Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x40 R½“

GD-Zn, black
m = 230 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.34
Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x80 R1“

GD-Zn, black
m = 390 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.25
Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x80-45° R½“

GD-Zn, black
m = 410 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.48
265
Pneumatic Connections For connecting core bores and profile cavities which are
to be used as compressed-air conduits.
Suitable for connections M5, G1/8 and G1/4.
Supply of compressed air to the profile cavity by means

of a central bore in the T-slot in conjunction with a
Pneumatic Connecting Set.
Supply of compressed air to a central bore by means
of a Pneumatic Connecting Plate with Pneumatic
Connection fitted to the end face.
Depending on the type of application, the profile may

need to be machined.
When using a Pneumatic Connector outside the core
bores, a standard seal must be used.
When using the Pneumatic Connector (with inner thread

c) in conjunction with the core bore, an appropriate
thread of length (b) or, in the case of connections made
at 90°, bores of diameter (a) must be provided, and
a T-Slot Nut St to retain the fitting.
Innovation
German
utility model
93 03 481
a b c
Pneumatic Connector
5 M5 5 G1/8 ø 3.0 mm M5x10 6 mm
8 M5 8 G1/8 ø 4.9 mm M8x16 6 mm
8 G 1/ 4 ø 4.9 mm M8x16 8 mm
Pneumatic Connecting
Set
8 M5 8 G1/8 8 G1/4 ø 4.9 mm M8x16
266
St, black
Pneumatic Connector 5 M5
M = 3.5 Nm m = 13 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.65
Pneumatic Connector 5 G1/8

M = 3.5 Nm m = 12 g
1 pce. 0.0.391.64
St, black
Pneumatic Connector 8 M5
M = 12 Nm m = 19 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.70

M = 12 Nm m = 15 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.69

M = 12 Nm m = 18 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.68
Pneumatic Connector, St, black

Cap, PA-GF, black
Seal, NBR, black
Pneumatic Connecting Set 5 M5

m = 15 g
1 set 0.0.391.68
Pneumatic Connecting Set 5 G1/8
m = 14 g
1 set 0.0.391.67
Pneumatic Connector, St, black

Cap, PA-GF, black
Seal, NBR, black
Pneumatic Connecting Set 8 M5

m = 23 g
1 set 0.0.411.74
m = 19 g
1 set 0.0.411.73

m = 24 g
1 set 0.0.411.72
267
6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security
6.3 Door Sliding, swing and lifting doors which are integrated in
basic frames or are used as guards and enclosures
Security around machinery (cell guarding) can be monitored and
safeguarded to prevent injury or unauthorised access.
Security Limit Security Limit Switch for electrical monitoring of sliding,

swing and lifting doors. Contact established with latch
Switch pressed in.
The Fastening Set is suitable for securing the Security

Limit Switch to Profiles 8. It is suitable for constructing
both swing and sliding doors.
Security Limit Switch with Fastening Set 8

Casing, PA-GF, black
Actuator, PA-GF/St, corrosion-resistant
positive break
Rated voltage: 24 V DC / 230 V AC
Protection: IP 65, EN 60529
Test certification to BG-GS-ET-15
Complete with Fastening Set
m = 220 g
1 set 0.0.265.12
Fastening Set 8 for Security Limit Switch

Angle bracket, Al, black
bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
2 Washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-plated
2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16, St,
bright zinc-plated
2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M5, bright zinc-plated
m = 110 g
1 set 0.0.265.47
268
Security Lock Security Lock for electrical and mechanical securing
of swing, sliding and lifting doors. The Security Limit
Switch has 3 possible line entries and is equipped with
3 positive break NO contacts and 3 positive break
NC contacts.
The lock ensures that the doors cannot be opened in the
event of a power failure or impermissible operating
states (zero-current principle), thereby preventing injury
to personnel and damage to equipment.
The Fastening Set is suitable for mounting the Security

Lock on Profiles 8. It can be mounted to swing and
sliding doors.
Security Lock 24 V DC / 230 V AC

with Fastening Set 8
Security Limit Switch and mechanical lock:
Actuator, PA-GF/St, corrosion-resistant
Rated control supply voltage: 24 V DC or 230 V AC
Test certification to BG-GS-ET-15 complete with
Fastening Set
m = 1.10 kg
24 V DC, 1 set 0.0.411.75

230 V AC, 1 set 0.0.411.76
Fastening Set 8 for Security Lock

Fastening plate 8, St, black
Angle bracket 8, Al, black
bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
4 Adapter washers DIN 988-5x10x0.3 , St
m = 540 g
1 set 0.0.416.15
269
6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow
6.4 Conveyors and Conveying operations can be incorporated into the

profile structure with the aid of specialised accessories.
Material Flow
> Slide Strips made of PE-UHMW, Slide Strip Wedge
used as a lead-in piece for the Slide Strip
> Roller elements with and without side guide
> Conveyor Rollers made of plastic or anodized
aluminium
> Driven Conveyor Rollers which, in conjunction with
the chain drive (Section 8.2.2 Chain Drives), create a
conveyor unit
> Chain transfer for continuous transport of goods or
workpiece carriers.
Work place with intermediate store for supplying components
Slide Strips The Slide Strips serve as slide elements when

transporting goods or workpiece carriers, for example.
They can be fitted into the profile grooves, are hard-
wearing and have a low coefficient of sliding friction.
Slide Strip 8 antistatic prevents electrostatic buildup of

transported goods due to friction.
They can also be used as rebate strips and guide rails or

can be employed as a support base, e.g. in shelves to
protect sensitive products.
270
Slide Strip 5
PE-UHMW, black
m = 57 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.437.27
Slide Strip 6
PE-UHMW, black
m = 90 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.441.08
Slide Strip 8
PE-UHMW, black
m =140 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.418.39
Slide Strip 8 antistatic
PE-UHMW, black
m = 150 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.457.99
Slide Strip 8 can be held in position by Fixing Pin 8 and

can be combined with Slide Strip Wedge 8 (this
functions as an end and lead-in piece).
Fixing Pin 8
POM, black
m = 0.4 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.42
Slide Strip Wedge 8

PA, black
m = 11 g
1 set 0.0.422.04
271
Roller Elements For constructing roller conveyors with and without side
guide, in any width and length, with a variable number
of Roller Elements.
Can be fastened to Profiles 8 using T-Slot Nuts 8 PA and
Button-Head Screws T4x25.
F = 50 N (per element)
Roller Element 8 80
Lid element, PA-GF, black
Base element, PA-GF, black
3 rollers, POM, black
m = 45 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.58
Roller Element 8 80 with side guide

Lid element with side guide, PA-GF, black
Base element, PA-GF, black
3 rollers, POM, black
m = 50 g
1 pce. 0.0.436.59
272
Conveyor Multi-functional Conveyor Roller for transport tasks
of all kinds.
Rollers The ball-bearing Conveyor Rollers with aluminium or
plastic Tube D50 can be removed from or retrofitted into
existing structures by means of spring-loaded threaded
axle pins.
The axial position of the roller is maintained by two
centring clips.
F Xmin. Xmax.
Tube D50 Al 1000 N 160 mm 800 mm
Tube D50 KU 400 N 160 mm 500 mm
The circumferential groove in the bearing flanges also

prepare the Conveyor Rollers to be driven by a round
belt ø 4 mm.
Bearing Set 8 50
2 bearing flanges, PA-GF, black
Ball-bearing support, sealed
Bolt, St, black
2 centring clips, PA-GF, black
m = 250 g
1 set 0.0.422.63
273
Chain-Driven Conveyor A conveyor with chain-driven rollers is ideal for a whole

range of automated conveyor and transport operations. It
Rollers is constructed using a chain drive (8.2.2 Chain Drives).
The special Conveyor Rollers are driven on one side by
a completely covered chain in the frame profile grooves.
The driven roller conveyor can be any length, as can the
distance between the individual rollers.
A roller can be up to 800 mm wide. Conveyor Rollers are
produced from Tubes D50 Al or D50 KU and the relevant
Bearing Set.
A Bearing Set consists of two complete bearing flanges,
one of which is equipped with a sprocket wheel which
engages with the chain drive. Roller Bearing Sets are
available in driven and non-driven versions. Non-driven
versions can be used, for example, to incorporate
accumulating rollers into a driven roller conveyor.
The Bearing Blocks are bolted onto the frame profile.

The assembled Conveyor Rollers are then simply
pushed down onto the Bearing Blocks where they are
securely retained by a spring finger.
The Bearing Block Set consists of a fixed bearing and a
floating bearing. The fixed bearing must be positioned
on the drive side of the Conveyor Roller.
When fitting the Bearing Blocks onto the frame profile,
this is best done using a screw connection with groove
profile 8 Al M8-40 (Order No. 0.0427.72) since this
provides an easy means of ensuring consistent
axis spacing.
After installation, the Bearing Blocks are closed by
means of the Housing Profile, which is run over the
entire length of the roller conveyor. The Housing Profile
Innovation with Side Guide guides the goods on the conveyor.
German patent A Slide Strip 5 or other guide elements can be fitted into
pending the integrated groove 5 in the Side Guide.
274
F Xmin. Xmax.
Tube D50 Al 1000 N 150 mm 800 mm
Tube D50 KU 400 N 150 mm 500 mm
The housing of the Chain Reverse Unit is prepared for

securing a Bearing Block. This Conveyor Roller is not
driven via the chain. If required, the last Conveyor Roller
can also be driven from the last driven roller by means
of a ø 4 mm round belt.
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Driven Bearing Set

PA, black
Roller bearing, preassembled
1 bearing flange, driven, with sprocket wheel
1 bearing flange, not driven
m = 285 g
1 set 0.0.463.53
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Bearing Set

PA, black
Roller bearing, preassembled
2 bearing flanges, not driven
m = 265 g
1 set 0.0.463.49
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Bearing Block Set

2 Bearing Blocks, PA, black
1 fixed bearing cover, PA, black
1 floating bearing cover, PA, black
2 Button-Head Screws M8x25, St, black
2 washers DIN 433-8,4, St, black
m = 152 g
1 set 0.0.463.54
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing Profile

Al, anodized
A =2.17 cm2
m =0.58 kg/m
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing Profile

with Side Guide
Al, anodized
A =3.36 cm2
m =0.90 kg/m
Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing End Cap Set

PA-GF, black
2 Caps 5 20x10
1 TRA 50 housing cap, left
1 TRA 50 housing cap, right
4 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981 St 4.2x9.5, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 22 g
1 set 0.0.463.48
275
Tubes D50
Tube D50 Al
Al, anodized
l = 8.16 cm4 W = 3.26 cm3
m = 0.76 kg/m
Tube D50 KU
PVC, black
Temperature range 0 - 60°C
l = 10.9 cm4 W = 4.36 cm3
m = 0.62 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.427.63
Groove Profile Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40 is used to secure

Conveyor Rollers at a constant distance (modular
dimension 40 mm).
Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40 is used to secure elements at

a constant distance (modular dimension 40 mm) for e.g.
Conveyor Rollers etc.
Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40

Al, anodized
Threaded bore M8 in modular dimension 40 mm
m = 500 g
276
Chain Transfer The Chain Transfer is a particularly cost-effective
conveyor which uses a chain drive and is easy to install
(see Section 8.2.2 Chain Drives).
The goods or a specially adapted workpiece carrier are
placed directly onto the chains and transported.
The weight of the goods provides the necessary
frictional force. This solution also allows effortless
transfer of accumulated products.
A Chain Transfer Unit consists of at least two chain
drives on parallel frame profiles. The chains are guided
out of the profile groove and over special Chain
Transfer Slide Strips.
The Chain Transfer Slide Strip is also available with
a Side Guide in order to guide the transported
goods securely.
Start of chain transfer: the chain is guided over the End

Ramp onto the Slide Strip.
The maximum permissible load on a Chain Transfer Unit

is calculated from the number of supporting links.
For each chain link, Fmax. = 6 N.
Note the chain‘s operating load!
It is advisable to secure the Slide Strips if under

high load:
Screw-connection using Button-Head Screw T4x18 and
T-Slot Nut 8 PA (a counter bore must be drilled and the
location ribs removed locally for the screw).
Pinning with ø 4.8 mm bore and insertion of a fixing pin.
Calculation of the chain length:

The chain length is calculated in the same way as the
length of a chain drive (see Section 8.2.2. Chain Drives).
However, the chain length in the Reverse Unit (U‘) varies:
Lchain = 2 x L + 490.8 mm
Chain Transfer End Ramp 8

PA, black
Button-Head Screw T4x18, St, black
T-Slot Nut 8 PA, black
m = 38 g
1 set 0.0.472.01
Chain Transfer Slide Strip 8

PE-UHMW, black
antistatic
m = 0.51 kg/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.95
Chain Transfer Slide Strip 8 with Side Guide

PE-UHMW, black
antistatic
m = 0.60 kg/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.98
277
6.5 Work Bench Design The item MB System is a modular system for a whole
range of fixtures and equipment and opens up numerous
possibilities for customised work bench design. The
compatibility and suitability of all products is guaran-
teed by full integration of the “Work Bench” solution into
the MB Building Kit System.
In addition to the use of standard elements for
constructing simple work benches, various special
products are also available to ensure increased
functionality and ergonomic design:
> Moisture-resistant, laminated Beech Multi-Ply panels
for use in workshops and offices, forming a robust,
impact-resistant and vibration-absorbing working
surface
> Wells for the provision or storage of tools, pens, etc.
> Table Adapter Sets for making use of spare space on
the table top reduce the machining costs for the table
top in the vicinity of through table columns
> Special profiles for providing installation conduits on
work benches in order to accommodate cables,
switches, sockets and compressed-air lines. Labels,
working instructions or other documents can be inserted
into the groove on the visible side
> Conduit Caps for covering the installation conduits
> Stackable Parts Containers with variable attachment
methods for customising the work area; rapid
changeover of parts by swapping the complete Parts
Container; dust protection in the form of matching lids;
can be stacked for transport and use; slot-in labelling
cards to identify the contents of Parts Containers;
antistatic versions for sensitive components
The TRIGO 272 Work Bench System is available on

request. It can be equipped with special elements to
form a fully integrated work bench offering excellent
ergonomic features, cost-effectiveness and productivity.
278
Runner Hanger which can be moved along the profile groove
and is used for suspending tools etc. End Stop 8 limits
the stroke of the runner in the groove.
Runner 8
PA-GF, black
Fmax. = 50 N
m= 8 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.13
End Stop 8 for Runner 8

m = 12 g
1 set 0.0.026.49
Parts Containers Stackable Parts Container for holding small parts within
easy reach at work benches.
The Parts Container Covers can be used to seal the
Parts Containers against dust and enable the Parts Con-
tainers to be stacked offset one above the other.
279
Parts Containers Parts Containers can be hooked onto the Parts Container
Fasteners (in 15° increments) which themselves locate
via anti-torsion lugs onto profiles or other components
(drill ø 7 mm for M6). This allows each user to
personalise his work space and means that parts that are
needed can be put in place quickly.
Parts Container a = 15° a = 30° a = 45°

Width x [mm] y [mm] z [mm]
80 130 174 208

120 164 198 222
160 202 233 250
The window can be used for content labelling cards.

It can also be used rotated around 180° (with the black
face to the front).

a = 80 mm b = 40 mm m = 152 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.73
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.76

a = 120 mm b = 40 mm m = 200 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.74
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.77
280
a = 160 mm b = 80 mm m = 400 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.75
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.78
Parts Container Cover 80

a = 80 mm m = 51 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.429.16
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.29

a = 120 mm m = 82 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.429.18
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.26

a = 160 mm m = 109 g
PA-GF, black
1 pce. 0.0.429.20
Antistatic
PA-GF ELS, black
1 pce. 0.0.432.31
Labelling Cards for Parts Containers

Card, 200 gsm, white
100 pce. 0.0.432.48
Parts Container Fastener 40

Parts Container Fastener 40, Al, black anodized
1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x16, St, bright zinc-plated
1 anti-torsion pin, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
m = 42 g
1 set 0.0.432.07
Parts Container Fastener 80

Parts Container Fastener 80, Al, black anodized
2 anti-torsion pins, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated
m = 90 g
1 set 0.0.432.54
281
Parts Containers Suitable for holding small parts within easy reach
at work benches. The attachment on the rear allows the
Parts Container to be secured in the grooves of
Profiles 8.
The screw fastening prevents the Parts Container
inadvertently becoming detached.
Parts Container 8 110x105

PA-GF, black
1 Button-Head Screw ISO-M5x12, St, bright zinc-plated
1 T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M5
a = 110 mm
m = 100 g
1 set 0.0.026.20
Parts Container 8 210x105

PA-GF, black
2 Button-Head Screws ISO-M5x12, St, bright zinc-plated
2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M5
a = 210 mm
m = 170 g
1 set 0.0.026.21
Container Any kind of containers with wall thicknesses of up to

5 mm can be mounted between two profiles.
Mounting
282
Container Mounting 8
PA-GF, black
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.026.87
Arm Rests For ergonomic design of work stations. The Arm Rest
antistatic is ideal for work benches in the field of
electrical engineering. The antistatic surface prevents the
build-up of electrostatic charges.
The Arm Rest is secured by means of Velcro fasteners to

fastening pads bonded onto the table top or screw-
connected to a Profile 8 using T-Slot Nuts 8 PA and But-
ton-Head Screws T4x12.
PUR with Velcro fastening, black

2 fastening pads, self-adhesive, ABS, black
Arm Rest
m = 130 g
1 set 0.0.457.98
Arm Rest antistatic

m = 130 g
1 set 0.0.465.10
283
Lifting Column 8 200x170 The Lifting Column 8 200x170 is designed for

constructing variable height work benches, and is also
suitable for many different applications where height
adjustment is required in the factory or office.
High capacity Roller Guides in conjunction with rack
and pinion drives permit rigid constructions which
employ only a central telescopic column and have the
capacity to withstand considerable bending moments
from any direction.
All parts of the drive including the power supply
are integrated into the column and protected against
dust ingress.
The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions are

controlled by means of a Hand Held Control which can
be stored in a special drawer for easy access. In addition
to the motor-driven columns, a manual version is also
available (with handle).
The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions feature
a soft-start / soft-stop function.
The “synchro/memory” version has an integrated elec-
tronic control for parallel operation of several Lifting
Columns and a memory function. Up to 9 positions can
be stored and retrieved by the user. The Hand Held
Control of this type includes an LED display which
shows the current height of the column.
Profile groove 8 on all side faces of the basic profile

means that the Lifting Column can be integrated into any
attachments constructed from elements of the item MB
Building Kit System.
284
Lifting Column Base h Stroke s Bending
moment
Fxl
1000N 515 mm 200 mm 220 Nm

manual
1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

electronic
2000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

electronic
1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

synchro/memory
Voltage: 230 V AC 50/60 Hz

(120 V AC version on request)
Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°C
Maximum lifting force: 1000N / 2000N
Lifting speed: 50 mm/s / 30 mm/s
Continuous duty: 15% at rated load
Protection: IP 30
Conformity: CE
Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, manual

Column, Al, natural anodized
Cap, PA, black
Cranked Handle, St
m = 14 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.01
Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, electronic

Cap, PA, black
Hand Held Control, ABS, black
Power cord 2m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.07

Cap, PA, black
Power cord 2m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.05
Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, synchro/memory

Cap, PA, black
Power cord 2m; Connecting cable 6m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.04
Hand Held Control synchro/memory

ABS, black
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.06
Drawer for Hand Held Control

ABS, black
m = 100 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.11
285
Support Profile Support Profile for completing an installation conduit

based on Profiles 8 80x80-45° (8 80x80) with Conduit
160 AT Profile 8 W80-T40 (Section 7.1 Conduits).
The Support Profile can be machined appropriately for
holding switches and sockets. A groove is provided on
the visible side for securing labels, working instructions
etc. in A5 format.
Support Profile 160 AT can still be used even if Conduit

Profiles 8 W80-T40 cannot run through because there
are horizontal rails preventing it. Conduit Cap 160 AT
is then screw-connected to the tool rail profile.
The cap must be counter bored and countersunk for
this purpose.
Markings are provided on the inside to indicate the
precise location of the bore. The Support Profile is
secured by means of Countersunk Screw DIN7991-
M5x16 and T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M5.
Support Profile 160 AT

Al, anodized
A = 6.14 cm2
m = 1.66 kg/m
Conduit Cap 160 AT

PA-GF, black
m = 52 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.22
286
Foot Cap Cover, rounded on the end face, for the cut edges of
Profile 8 80x80-45°. Deburring is no longer required.
A hole is provided for the outer core bore in order to
accommodate knuckle feet etc.
Foot Cap 8 80x80-45°

PA-GF, black
m = 15 g
1 pce. 0.0.409.37
Beech Multi-Ply Beech Multi-Ply panels of thickness 30 mm (adhesive

insensitive to moisture) for robust, impact-resistant and
vibration-damping work surfaces in workshops and offices.
The panels have been prepared for use in constructing
standard tables with Profiles 8 80x80-45° and
accessories.
Customised panel dimensions for various table
shapes can be found in Section 5.3 Panels for Work
Bench Design.
287
Beech Multi-Ply
Coating (both sides): Phenolic resin film, transparent,

scratch-resistant, oil-resisting, water-repellent
Edge machining: rounded, sealed
Adhesive: AW to DIN 68705 T2
Wood tone: reddish
m = 22.1 kg/m2
Beech Multi-Ply 30-800x400-45°

1 pce. 0.0.409.33
Beech Multi-Ply 30-1000x400-45°
1 pce. 0.0.409.41
Beech Multi-Ply 30-1600x800
1 pce. 0.0.409.20
Beech Multi-Ply 30-2000x1000
1 pce. 0.0.424.08
Table Adapter The gaps resulting from diagonal saw cuts of the table
top are easily filled with Table Adapter Set 40.
Set Work benches, material trolleys and shelving often
require through columns through the table top
(for tool rails etc.) or shelves.
Two Table Adapter Sets are needed for each
through column.
288
Table Adapter Set 40
1 Table adapter 40, PA-GF, black
1 washer DIN 433-5.3, St
1 T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M5
m = 26.5 g
1 set 0.0.438.03
Wells Well for holding tools, pencils, pens etc. on table tops.
The Wells are secured in position by using Multiblock 8

PA and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x30 in the
outer stepped bores of the Well.
The Well fills out neatly the gap on the table top
resulting from the diagonal saw cut.
The table column can take the form of a Profile 8 80x80-45°
or a combination with Support Profile 160 AT.
Well 80
Mineral casting (quartz sand with polyester resin), black
m = 3.2 kg
1 pce. 0.0.409.31
Well 160
Mineral casting (quartz sand with polyester resin), black
m = 2.4 kg
1 pce. 0.0.409.27
289
6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting
6.6 Lighting For illuminating work areas and areas used by traffic. Both Light Fittings are equipped with electronic Lamp-
Light Fitting 11W is based on the installation elements. Control Units to ensure flicker-free operation and can be
It can therefore be customised at will and is fully rowed together to produce light strips.
compatible.
Light Fitting 55W is a workplace light with integrated
swivel device and parabolic reflector grid to ensure
optimum illumination.
Light Fitting 55W Sturdy Light Fitting for flicker-free illumination of

workplaces and machines. The integrated swivel profile
with Line 8 system groove supports 7 setting angles.
The Light Fitting can be powered from a 230 V AC
source (120 V AC on request) and is VDE-ENEC safety-
approved. When fitted with the impact-resistant
Polycarbonate Protective Panel and sealing cap, the
Light Fitting complies with IP 40-EN 60529.
All electrical connecting elements are approved for a
rated voltage of 250 V AC with a rated current of 16 A.
To allow the Light Fitting to be adjusted to individual

applications, it can be locked in various positions over
a swivel range of ±22.5° from 0°.
Light distribution by the Light Fitting (lateral view)

Distance Beam E
(mm) width (mm) (Lux)
500 1000 3500

900 1800 1250
1300 2600 700
1700 3400 500
Light distribution by the Light Fitting (front view)

Distance Beam E
(mm) width (mm) (Lux)
500 750 3500

900 950 1250
1300 1150 700
1700 1350 500
290
The Connecting Cable is used to connect the power
supply to an earthed plug.
The socket can be used to power the Light Fitting from
any line network which is in place. The wires are held
securely in the socket by means of a spring-force
connection.
If several Light Fittings are connected end-to-end, the
power is fed from one Light Fitting to another by means
of the Adapter. The dowel which is inserted into a
mounting hole in the cap provides a mechanical link
between the Light Fittings.
If several Light Fittings positioned separately are
connected in series and share a common power supply,
the Light Fittings are interconnected using the Extension
Cable which is available prefitted with appropriate
connectors in a standard length of 2 m, or alternatively a
customised version may be made using a plug and socket.
The Light Fitting can be sealed against dust by means of

the Protective Panel. This panel also protects the Light
Fitting against soiling and damage. The open socket
must be sealed with a cap.
Light Fitting 55W

On/off switch
55W compact fluorescent lamp
Electronic Lamp-Control Unit
60° parabolic reflector grid
Socket lock
m = 3.7 kg
1 pce., 230 V 0.0.417.34
1 pce., 120 V 0.0.417.58
Compact Lamp 55W

Twin tube
Tube diameter: 17 mm
Power: 55 Watt
Light colour: natural white, 4800 lm
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.57
Connecting Cable, Socket / Earthed Plug *

black
Cable length 3 m (1.5 mm2),
m = 370 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.42
Socket, Spring-Force Connected

PA, black
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.44
Adapter, Socket / Plug

PA, black
incl. dowel
m = 13 g
1 set 0.0.417.45
* plug suitable for your local market to be fitted by your distributor

291
Light Fitting
55W
Extension Cable, Socket / Plug

black
Cable length 2 m (1.5 mm2),
m = 234 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.52
Socket, Spring-Force Connected

PA, black
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.59
Polycarbonate Protective Panel

PC, transparent
incl. socket sealing cap
m = 195 g
1 set 0.0.417.43
Light Fitting 11W Industrial duty light fitting of variable length and power.
Each segment (360 mm long) of the Light Fitting is
equipped with an electronic Lamp-Control Unit for low
voltage (24 V DC) and a Compact Lamp (power 11 W,
corresponds to a conventional 75 W filament lamp).
The rear of the housing is ready for fastening with

Button-Head Screws M5x14.
Fully compatible with conduit profiles.
292
Fastening of Light Fitting 11W to any mounting surface
or Profile 8 grooves.
Light Fitting 11W, consisting of:

Aluminium housing
Transparent cover, PMMA
Caps, PA-GF, black
Lamp-Control Unit, Compact Lamp,
reflectors, installation material,
fastening screws M5x14
Rated voltage: 24 V DC
Light Fitting 11W 80x40x360

m = 0.75 kg P = 11 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.06
m = 1.45 kg P = 22 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.07
m = 2.15 kg P = 33 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.08
m = 2.85 kg P = 44 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.09
m = 3.5 kg P = 55 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.10

m = 1.05 kg P = 11 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.11
m = 2.0 kg P = 22 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.12
m = 3.0 kg P = 33 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.13
m = 4.0 kg P = 44 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.14
m = 5.0 kg P = 55 W
1 pce. 0.0.417.15
293
Light Fitting Set For mounting a customised industrial Light Fitting for
a 24 V DC connection.
Particularly suitable for use in combination with
conduit elements.
Light Fitting Set 11W

1 Lamp-Control Unit 11, 24 V DC
1 cover for Lamp-Control Unit Al
1 Compact Lamp 11, 11 W at 24 V DC
1 reflector 11 Al, metallized
2 fastening clips PA-GF, black
m = 200 g
1 set 0.0.417.32
Lamp-Control Lamp-Control Unit for flicker-free operation of Compact

Lamps 5 - 11 W. Particularly suitable for use in Light
Unit Fitting 11. Connection is via terminals.
Lamp-Control Unit 11W

Protection class II
With open-circuit and reverse polarity protection,
short-circuit-proof
Voltage: 24 V DC (21.0 - 29.0 Volt)
Ambient temperature: –15°C to +60°C
Power loss: 1.5 W
Input current: 100 mA
Operating frequency: 30 kHz
m = 84 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.16
294
6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories
Compact Lamp Lamp for Light Fitting 11W or Lamp-Control Unit 11W.
The light output corresponds to a conventional 75 W
filament lamp.
Compact Lamp 11W

Twin tube
Tube diameter: 12 mm
Power output: 11 W
m = 70 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.17
6.7 General Many products designed for one purpose are frequently > Buffer strip for elastic sealing of gaps and as a
capable of satisfying different, independent functions: door rabbet.
Accessories > Impact Buffers and Parabolic Buffers, in a range of > Telescope profile for straightforward creation
sizes, are capable of absorbing impacts with different of adjustable fixtures, work benches and conveyor
ultimate loads which are applied to linear axes, sliding equipment.
doors, swing doors and lifting doors or any other > Adapter plate system for mounting any chosen
moving components; certain sizes can also be used as functional elements on profile constructions.
simple, vibration-damping equipment feet.
Impact Buffers For absorbing impacts. Resistant to oil, water, sea water
and road salt solutions. Partially resistant to soap
Parabolic solutions, vegetable fats and animal fats.
Buffers
295
Impact Buffer max. F s

Parabolic Buffer
Impact Buffer M4 90 N 1.4 mm
max. F s
Parabolic buffer with approximately exponential

force profile.
NBR, black
Hardness 55 Sh A
Steel insert, St
Impact Buffer M4 D15x15

a = M4 b = ø 15 mm
c = 15 mm m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.416.33

a = M6 b = ø 20 mm
c = 15 mm m = 12 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.35

a = M8 b = ø 30 mm
c = 30 mm m = 38 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.37
Parabolic Buffer M8 D30x36

a = M8 b = ø 30 mm
c = 36 mm m = 26 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.39

a = M10 b = ø 50 mm
c = 58 mm m = 103 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.41

a = M12 b = ø 75 mm
c = 89 mm m = 319 g
1 pce. 0.0.416.43
296
Buffer Strip Flexible plastic strip with fastening geometry for Profiles
8 and Clamp Profile 8 32x18.
The strip can be used as a stop for swing, sliding and
lifting doors, as a sealing profile or for similar
applications.
In enclosure and guard applications using Hanger 8 /

Door Rabbet 8 (gap width 25/28 mm), Buffer Strip 8
20x18 can be used to reduce the gap width.
Buffer Strip 8 20x18

TPE, black
Hardness 73 Sh A
m = 240 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.01
Telescope Suitable for constructing profiles of variable length for

adjusting the height or inclination of fixtures and
Profile equipment. For this purpose, Telescope Profile 8 40x40
is combined with a Profile 6 30x30 and the Connection
Set or Securing Set.
297
Telescope
Profile
Note: Profile 6 30x30 must be 14 mm shorter than

Telescope Profile 8 40x40 in order that it can be inserted
completely in the assembled telescope.
Max. load in telescope direction: 500 N.
Telescope Profile 8 40x40

Al, bright zinc-plated
A =5.92 cm2 Ix = 10.52 cm4 Iy = 11.46 cm4
It =16.28 cm4
m =1.59 kg/m Wx = 5.26 cm3 Wy = 5.73 cm3
Telescope Securing Set 8 40x40

Washer DIN 9021-6,4, St, bright zinc-plated
Clamp lever, black
m = 86 g
1 set 0.0.444.71
Telescope Connection Set 8 40x40

Telescope cap 8 40x40, PA, black
Telescope sliding cap 8 40x40, PA, black
Telescope connecting plate 8 40x40, GD-Zn, white aluminium
bright zinc-plated
1 square nut DIN 562-M8, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 138 g
1 set 0.0.440.54
298
Adapter Plate Mounting plates for universal attachment of machine
elements and components to profile constructions.
System The Adapter Plates are matched to the connection
geometry of the machine elements by machining.
The plates can be secured by bolts and T-Slot Nuts or
by laterally located clamping elements which allow sub-
sequent adjustment.
To ensure that the position of the Adapter Plate can be
retained if it is assembled / dismantled frequently,
a Locating and Clamping Set can be used which
functions in a similar way to a key to allow movement
only along the groove, while the rotational position
remains fixed. Highly stressed units can also be pinned
in position.
All components are available as semi-finished products
for individualised machining and with preliminary
machining for connection to the profile system.
Adapter Plate For producing adapter plates and mounting plates of

any length.
Profiles
Adapter Plate Profile 80x16 N5

Al, anodized
A = 12.36 cm2
m = 3.34 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 18.76 cm2
m = 5.07 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 25.16 cm2
m = 6.79 kg/m
299
Adapter Plate Adapter Plates 8 are already provided with mounting bores
and fixing bores for connection to the profile system.
Profiles The Adapter Plates are secured to Profiles 8 by means of
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8 or
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6 and the
appropriate sleeve.
The number of locating sleeves should be chosen so as
to permit the free movement of the Adapter Plate along
the groove.
Adapter Plate 8 80x16x40 1e

Al, anodized
m = 128 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.80
Adapter Plate 8 80x16x40 2z

Al, anodized
m = 125 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.81

Al, anodized
m = 257 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.82

Al, anodized
m = 247 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.83

Al, anodized
m = 390 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.84

Al, anodized
m = 381 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.85

Al, anodized
m = 515 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.86
300
Al, anodized
m = 515 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.87

Al, anodized
m = 589 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.88

Al, anodized
m = 791 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.89

Al, anodized
m = 791 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.90

Al, anodized
m = 1067 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.91

Al, anodized
m = 1067 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.440.92
301
Adapter Plate By using two Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping Sets
in selected bores of the Adapter Plates, it is possible to
Locating and prevent the Adapter Plate twisting relative to the profile
Clamping set construction. The Adapter Plate can still be moved along
the profile groove, however.
Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping Set 8

2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, St, bright zinc-plated
2 sleeves, St, bright zinc-plated
2 washers, St, bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
m = 20 g
1 set 0.0.440.93
Adapter Plate The Adapter Plate Clamps can be used for fastening
Adapter Plates or sections of the Adapter Plate Profile
Clamps without any need for machining. By making the
attachment in the lateral groove of the Adapter Plate and
the groove of the profile construction, the plate can be
moved and aligned freely relative to the profile
construction. This ensures that the attached machine
elements can be adapted and adjusted with ease.
The Adapter Plate Clamps should always be used
in pairs.
Hexagon
Socket Head
Cap Screw M
DIN 912
M5 4.5 Nm
M6 10 Nm
M8 25 Nm
302
Adapter Plate Clamp 5 N5
Al, anodized
m = 15 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.444.03

Al, anodized
m = 17 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.444.04

Al, anodized
m = 22 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.444.05
Adapter Plate The Adapter Plate Clamping Profile is used to construct

clamps of any length for Adapter Plates 8 or any
Clamping sections of the Adapter Plate Profiles.
Profile N5
Adapter Plate Clamping Profile N5

Al, anodized
A = 303 cm2
m = 0.82 kg/m
303
304
7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.1 Conduits E
The Installation Elements product group consists of

7. Installation simple conduits, the highly variable modular conduit
systems, profiles with integrated conduits, Electronic
Elements Boxes and fasteners for cables and switches.
A significant portion of the work related to the planning
and construction of fixtures involves the supply of power
and compressed air to actuators, the connection of
sensors and many other operations for which cables,
hoses and pipes need to be laid.
The systematic integration of these solutions into the
MB Building Kit System not only results in a clear,
uncluttered and attractive design, it also offers greater
operating safety by virtue of the clearly laid out
installation and the elimination of shear and abrasion
points.
Pneumatic control with separate installation of cables and hoses
7.1 Conduits Conduits in the modular dimensions of the profile Lines Installation conduits can be constructed from Conduit
for integrating all supply lines in machines and systems. Profiles E with fixed modular dimensions or from Sup-
Their stable construction from extruded aluminium port Profiles and Wall Profiles from the modular conduit
means that the conduits are self-supporting even over system which makes customised construction possible.
long runs.
7.1.1 Conduits E Simple aluminium conduits for installation of cables

and hoses. The conduits are made from U-section
Conduit Profiles and a matching Lid Profile.
They are available in the modular dimensions of
Profiles 6 and 8.
The clear Lid Profiles can be used as covers for the

U-shaped Conduit Profiles and for the modular conduit
system. The transparent design allows the user to see
inside the conduit.
305
Conduit Profiles Conduit Profiles E and the corresponding Lid Profiles

can be used to construct installation conduits of sizes
30x15 to 80x80.
Self-Tapping Screws can also be used to secure the
Lid Profile. An electrically conductive connection is
established at the same time.
For Lid Profiles D30 and D60, a Self-Tapping Screw St

3.5x9.5 and a bore ø 3 mm is required in the marking
guideline on the Lid Profile. Self-Tapping Screw St
4.2x9.5 and a bore ø 3.5 mm is required for Lid Profiles
D40 and D80. The Self-Tapping Screws required can be
found in the section Fastening Elements.
Conduit Profile U 30x15 E

Al, anodized
A = 0.72 cm2
m = 0.19 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 1.12 cm2
m = 0.30 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 1.01 cm2
m = 0.27 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 1.70 cm2
m = 0.45 kg/m
Conduit Profile U 60x30 D30 E

Al, anodized
A = 2.78 cm2
m = 0.75 kg/m
306
Al, anodized
A = 1.51 cm2
m = 0.41 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 3.38 cm2
m = 0.91 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 4.62 cm2
m = 1.25 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 3.06 cm2
m = 0.82 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 5.61 cm2
m = 1.52 kg/m
307
Lid Profiles The Lid Profiles can be used as covers for U-shaped
Conduit Profiles and the modular conduit system. The
Conduit Cap must be fastened with screws into the
aluminium conduit elements.
Lid Profiles transparent allow the user to see inside the
conduit. Used in conjunction with Wall Profiles and
Support Profiles (see Modular Conduit System) they are
suitable for constructing light-fitting housings of any
length.
Self-Tapping Screws can also be used to secure the

Lid Profile. An electrically conductive connection is
established at the same time.
For Lid Profiles D30 and D60, a Self-Tapping Screw St
3.5x9.5 and a bore ø 3 mm is required in the marking
guideline of the Lid Profile. Self-Tapping Screw St 4.2x9.5
and a bore ø 3.5 mm is required for Lid Profiles D40
and D80.
Lid Profile D30 E

Al, anodized
A = 0.85 cm2
m = 0.23 kg/m
Lid Profile D40 E

Al, anodized
A = 1.13 cm2
m = 0.30 kg/m
Lid Profile D40 transparent

PMMA zk 20
A = 1.42 cm2
m = 0.15 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm, clear glass 0.0.404.80
Lid Profile D60 E

Al, anodized
A =1.50 cm2
m =0.41 kg/m
Lid Profile D80 E

Al, anodized
A = 2.12 cm2
m = 0.57 kg/m
Lid Profile D80 transparent

PMMA zk 20
A = 2.66 cm2
m = 0.27 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm, clear glass 0.0.404.73
308
7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.2 Modular Conduit System
7.1.2 Modular Conduit System The modular conduit system can be used to construct
various sizes of conduit to accommodate cables and
hoses. The combination of Wall Profiles, Support Profiles
and Lid Profiles facilitates the construction of complex,
branched conduit structures without time-consuming
processing of the walls at the branch points. The conduit
elements are simply locked into each other. Existing
conduit structures can also be modified subsequently
with ease. Even with branched systems, the cables and
hoses can be installed or replaced at a later stage
without the need for drilling etc.
The possibilities of the modular conduit system comprise:
> Wall Profiles, Support Profiles, with and without
grooves, in modular dimensions, for the construction of
any type of self-supporting conduits from 40x20 mm up
to 160x160 mm
> Variable positioning of the Support Profiles and Wall
Profiles for different conduit configurations; the conduit
can be opened from any side
Installation on a transfer system, using conduit elements
> Partitioning of individual sectors by incorporating
supplementary wall elements within the conduit
> Support Profiles with angular geometry and non-
standard dimensions (19“, 3 HU, 6 HU) for constructing
special installation conduits
> High rigidity, inherent stability, load-bearing and
scratchproof surface and low weight by virtue of the
anodized profiles
> Total compatibility thanks to integration into the MB
Building Kit System
Separate installation of cables and hoses
Manual control box constructed from conduit elements
309
Wall and Support profiles Various conduits for running cables and hoses, ranging
from sizes 40x40 mm through all intermediate sizes to
160x160 mm, can be constructed quickly and flexibly.
The fact that the Support Profiles and Wall Profiles have
identical external dimensions means that different
conduits can be constructed by choosing the position of
the profiles accordingly. The conduit can be opened and
closed from different sides.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 200 927
Straightforward construction of the modular conduits

by moving the Wall Profiles into the Support Profiles.
The Support Profiles can also be used as a lid. Before
installation, it is advisable to clean the locking areas of
the conduit elements with a cloth soaked in oil.
The cable conduit can be opened with a screwdriver.
The conduit and Conduit Caps can be screw-connected

by means of Self-Tapping Screw St 4.2x16 if required.
A bore of ø 3.5 mm must be provided in the marking
groove of the Support Profiles.
By subdividing Wall Profiles and Support Profiles into

segments and machining accordingly (for e.g. cable
glands, plug sockets, pushbuttons, etc.), it is possible to
reduce the load involved in assembling, dismantling and
repairing installations.
310
Support Profiles with or without Line 8 grooves form the
base and lid of the modular conduit system.
Wall Profiles
Wall Profile 40
Al, anodized
A = 0.76 cm2
m = 0.20 kg/m
Wall Profile 80
Al, anodized
A = 2.03 cm2
m = 0.55 kg/m
Wall Profile 120

Al, anodized
A = 3.04 cm2
m = 0.82 kg/m
Wall Profile 160

Al, anodized
A = 4.04 cm2
m = 1.09 kg/m
311
Support Profiles
Support Profile 40
Al, anodized
A = 1.74 cm2
m = 0.47 kg/m
Support Profile 40 with groove 8

Al, anodized
A = 2.06 cm2
m = 0.55 kg/m
Support Profile 80
Al, anodized
A = 2.73 cm2
m = 0.74 kg/m
Support Profile 80 with grooves 8

Al, anodized
A = 4.17 cm2
m = 1.13 kg/m
Support Profile 120

Al, anodized
A = 3.73 cm2
m = 1.01 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 6.21 cm2
m = 1.68 kg/m
Support Profile 160

Al, anodized
A = 4.73 cm2
m = 1.27 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 8.27 cm2
m = 2.23 kg/m
312
Support Profiles Particularly suitable for constructing operating
consoles of any length, manual control boxes or similar
Angled applications.
Geometry The housings can be used to hold and secure printed
circuit boards of various sizes up to width 100 mm
(90 mm in the case of the 80-45°).
Support Profile 80-45° can be used as a bottom

or lid element.
Support Profile 80-45°

Al, anodized
A = 3.53 cm2
m = 0.90 kg/m
313
Support Profiles
Angled
Geometry Support Profile 160-20°
Al, anodized
A = 4.29 cm2
m = 1.16 kg/m
Support Profiles Support Profile 3HU/6HU can be used as a complete or

subdivided front or rear wall for housings 3HU/6HU.
3HU/6HU Used in conjunction with the conduit system elements,
it can also be used as a floor or lid element (3HU/6HU).
Support Profile 3HU with grooves is particularly suitable
as the rear wall of housing 3HU suspended in profile
groove 8. Used in conjunction with the conduit system
elements, suspendable conduits can also be constructed.
Support Profile 3HU

Al, anodized
A = 4.06 cm2 m = 1.10 kg/m
Support Profile 3HU 84HP

Al, anodized
A = 4.06 cm2 m = 0.48 kg
1 pce., length 432.5 mm, natural 0.0.398.59
Support Profile 6HU

Al, anodized
A = 7.30 cm2 m = 1.97 kg/m
Support Profile 6HU 84HP

Al, anodized
A = 7.30 cm2 m = 0.85 kg
Support Profile 3HU with grooves 8

Al, anodized
A = 6.30 cm2 m = 1.70 kg/m
Support Profile 3HU with grooves 8 84HP

Al, anodized
A = 6.30 cm2 m = 0.74 kg
314
Conduit Profile Profile for constructing installation conduits directly
on Profiles 8.
W80-T40 The Conduit Profile snaps into the profile groove.
Support Profiles of various widths and / or Lid Profiles
can be used for closing the conduit. Conduit Profile 8
W80-T40 or the Support Profile can be secured with
Self-Tapping Screw St 4.2x16 (reborable to ø 4.5 mm).
Mounting and removal of Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 on

the Profile 8 groove.
Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 on Profile 8 160x40 with lid

made from Support Profile 80.
Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 on Profile 8 80x80-45°
light with lid from Support Profile 160.
Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40

Al, anodized
A = 4.41 cm2
m = 1.19 kg/m
315
7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits
7.1.3 Accessories The accessories for conduits allow a wider range of

applications and uses.
for Conduits
Conduit installation in processing fixture
Conduit Caps The Caps are for use with the modular conduit system.
Rounded coverings for profile edges and end face
closures for conduits and operating consoles, which
eliminate deburring.
PA-GF, black
Conduit Cap 40x40

m=8g
1 pce. 0.0.196.88
Conduit Cap 80x40

m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.89
316
PA-GF, black
Conduit Cap 80x80

m = 30 g
1 pce. 0.0.196.90
Conduit Cap 120x40

m = 24 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.33
Conduit Cap 120x80

m = 45 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.34
Conduit Cap 120x120

m = 68 g
1 pce. 0.0.418.33
Conduit Cap 160x40

m = 30 g
1 pce. 0.0.364.81
Conduit Cap 160x80

m = 58 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.97
Conduit Cap 160x120

m = 89 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.35
Conduit Cap 160x160

m = 115 g
1 pce. 0.0.411.36
Conduit Cap Set 80x80-45°

Conduit Cap 80x80-45° left
Conduit Cap 80x80-45° right
m = 50 g
1 set 0.0.406.68
Conduit Cap Set 160x80-20°

Conduit Cap 160x80-20° left
Conduit Cap 160x80-20° right
m = 96 g
1 set 0.0.406.67
317
Conduit Edge For covering the edges and openings in wall or lid
elements in order to protect cable insulation.
Profile
Conduit Edge Profile

TPE, black
m = 60 g/m
1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.411.58
Conduit- Used for finishing off the edges of wall elements at

openings in Support Profiles and to protect cables and
Finishing Profile hoses at 90° conduit joints.
318
Conduit-Finishing Profile in conjunction with the
conduit elements and Angle Bracket Zn.
Segments of the Conduit-Finishing Profile are used to
replace sections of the Support Profiles in order to
construct cable protected conduit joints with Angle
Bracket Zn.
Conduit-Finishing Profile
Al, anodized
A = 0.81 cm2
m = 0.22 kg/m
Profile TS 35 For attaching electrical components with

TS 35 mountings.
The relevant regulations must be observed when laying
electrical conductors with basic insulation. In particular,
all conduit elements which may become conductive in
the event of a fault must be included in the protective system.
The profile can be locked into Support Profiles 80, 120

and 160 with grooves and can be screw-connected.
Can also be screwed onto any chosen panel element.
Profile TS 35
Al, anodized
A = 1.19 cm2
m = 0.32 kg/m
319
Flush-Mounted Flush-Mounted Sockets are easily installed in Wall

Profiles, Support Profiles, panel elements, sheets etc.
Sockets When using the supplied insulation box with strain relief
and shock-proof leads, the conduit elements do not
need to be connected to the protective conductor
system. Electrical connection may only be performed
by a fully qualified electrician.
The sockets are VDE-compliant (German standards sockets).
Mounting operations
Socket housing is secured by means of 4 screws DIN
7981 St-4.2x13 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).
Sequence for installing Flush-Mounted Socket with lid:

1. Seal
2. Insulation box
3. Socket
4. Cover frame with swing lid
Flush-Mounted Socket
Socket, PA, black
Cover frame, PA, black
Insulation box, PA, grey
2-pin + earth, 16 A, 250 V
m = 50 g
1 pce. 0.0.465.82
Flush-Mounted Socket with Lid

Socket, PA, black
Cover frame with swing lid and seal, PA, black
Protection IP44
Insulation box, PA, grey
m = 57 g
1 pce. 0.0.465.84
320
7. Installation Elements 7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit
7.2 Profiles with Integrated Lightweight Stand Profiles with integrated conduits on
either one or both sides can be used for lightweight
Conduit applications such as the frame construction for a roller
conveyor or transfer system. A special Lid Profile is
used to seal the conduit.
In the case of profiles with installation conduits on both
sides, the central web separating the conduits is
provided with pre-punched openings for routing cables
and hoses from one side to the other.
A special lightweight Foot Plate is available for the
Stand Profiles (Section 2.1 Adjustable Feet).
Stand Profiles 8 80x40 are used in conjunction with

Cover Profile 60 and Stand Profile Connection Element
8 for constructing transport sections, e.g. roller
conveyors with integrated conduits.
Stand Profile 8 80x40 2xK60 with integrated conduits on
both sides is ideal for low-load structures.
Standard fastening is effected on the end face in

conjunction with Stand Profile Connection Element 8
and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm).
By providing Stand Profile 8 80x40 with a ø 14 mm bore,

the profile can be used for routing cables and hoses.
The openings are located at modular intervals and are

used for running through cables and hoses.
The position of the cable openings in the profile‘s longi-
tudinal direction is arbitrary. The minimum profile length
is therefore 160 mm.
The joint on the groove side is effected with a Pneumatic

Universal-Fastening Set 8 or Automatic-Fastening Set 8
or a Standard Fastener 8.
321
7. Installation Elements 7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit
Stand Profiles
Stand Profile 8 80x40 K60

Al, anodized
A =10.20 cm2 Ix = 69.02 cm4 Iy = 11.74 cm4
It = 2.72 cm
m = 2.75 kg/m Wx = 17.26 cm3 Wy = 5.13 cm3
Stand Profile 8 80x40 2xK60

Al, anodized
A = 7.84 cm2 Ix = 64.19 cm4 Iy = 7.75 cm4
It = 0.84 cm4
m = 2.05 kg/m Wx = 16.05 cm3 Wy = 3.67 cm3
Stand Profile Connection Element 8

Al, anodized
m = 11 g
1 pce., natural 3.0.005.03
Cover Profile 60
Al, anodized
m = 0.36 kg/m
322
7. Installation Elements 7.3 Electronic Boxes
7.3 Electronic
Boxes
Sealed Electronic Boxes (IP 65, EN 60529) can be

constructed, in any length, using Electronic-Box Profiles
and the corresponding lids:
> Stable, anodized aluminium profiles with cooling ribs
for heat dissipation, special grooves (in 5.08 mm grid)
to accommodate printed circuit boards in European
Standard format (100x160 mm) and Profile 5 and 8
grooves for integration into the MB Building Kit System
Cooling ribs Grooves for securing boxes > Electronic-Box Lid, smooth finish and knockouts for
cable glands, together with bore grid for installing a
backplane; sealing provided by matching, peripheral
seals
Seal in box lid
Electronic-Box
Profiles
Electronic-Box Profile 8 120x80

Al, anodized
Protection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection with
Electronic-Box Lid 8 120x80
A = 20.50 cm2
m = 5.55 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 36.51 cm2
m = 9.85 kg/m
323
7. Installation Elements 7.3 Electronic Boxes
Electronic-Box Electronic-Box Lids 120x80 are provided with an all-

round silicon seal and have a bore grid on the inside.
Lids Knockouts are provided for cable glands.
8 120x80

PA-GF, black
Seal
4 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981-4.2x13,
m = 64 g
1 pce. 0.0.259.60
Electronic-Box Lid 8 120x80, plain

PA-GF, black
Seal
m = 59 g
1 pce. 0.0.259.61
324
8 200x120

PA-GF, black
Seal
m = 170 g
1 pce. 0.0.259.37
Electronic-Box Lid 8 200x120, plain

PA-GF, black
Seal
m = 140 g
1 pce. 0.0.259.44
325
7. Installation Elements 7.4 Cable and Hose Fasteners
7.4 Cable and In addition to routing cables, hoses and leads in fully
enclosed insulation conduits, these can also be run
Hose Fasteners along the profile or other elements.
Universal Holder For holding cable ties and similar components.

The Universal Holder can be assembled at any angle.
Fastening is performed in the profile groove of the
panel element using a Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5
and corresponding T-Slot Nut or in conjunction with
a hexagon nut DIN 936-M5.
Universal Holder
PA-GF, black
1 washer DIN 9021-5.3, St, bright zinc-plated
m=3g
1 set 0.0.418.24
Cable Ties The Cable Ties are used for bundling and securing
cables, lines, pipes and hoses. They can be closed and
released without tools.
326
Cable Tie releasable 4.8x145
PA, black
m = 79 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.418.27
Cable Tie releasable 4.8x281
PA, black
m = 120g/100
100 pce. 0.0.418.29
Cable Tie releasable 9x140
PA, black
m = 190 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.418.89
Cable Tie releasable 9x249
PA, black
m = 330 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.418.92
Holder for Fastening element with two separate pockets for open
routing of cables or hoses up to max. ø 12 mm on
Cables and profiles using Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN
Hoses 912-M4 and T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn or on panel elements etc.
The cable is held in place by the O-ring.
Holder for Cables and Hoses 8

PA, black
O-ring
m = 10 g
1 set 0.0.196.65
327
7. Installation Elements 7.4 Cable and Hose Fasteners
Limit-Switch For fastening Limit Switches to profiles or other

components.
Holders
Without anti-torsion blocks for attachment at any angle.

Limit-Switch Holders D6.5, D8 and D12 can be attached
with anti-torsion blocks either parallel or at right-angles
to the Profile 5 or Profile 8 groove.
With anti-torsion blocks, Limit-Switch Holders D18 and
20 can be attached in 10° increments relative to the
Profile 8 groove.
Fastening Limit-Switch Holders D6.5, D8 and D12 with

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4, spring
washer and T-Slot Nut of the corresponding Line.
Limit-Switch Holder D6.5

Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, black
Spring washer, St, black
m=8g
1 set 0.0.406.40
Limit-Switch Holder D8
m=7g
1 set 0.0.406.41

m=6g
1 set 0.0.406.42
328
For fastening Limit-Switch Holders D18 and D20 with
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6 and T-
Slot Nut of the corresponding Line.

m = 23 g
1 set 0.0.411.30

m = 22 g
1 set 0.0.411.31
329
330
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.1 Roller Guides
The Dynamic Elements product group of the MB > Linear drives

8. Dynamic Elements Building Kit System contains components which enable
precise linear movement. The dynamic elements make
- Timing-belt drives in various Lines, for driving all
linear units
full use of the modular concept of the Building Kit - Ball-Screw Units for precise positioning
System - the components can be combined quickly and - Chain drives where compactness and robustness
inexpensively without need for additional machining. are paramount
The profiles of the basic frame are both construction
elements and guide rails. As a result, laborious > Mechanical drive elements such as couplings, Bevel
alignment work can be avoided in the majority of cases. Gear Boxes, Multi-Spline Shafts, adaption elements and
The dynamic elements are subdivided into: fastening elements
> Linear slides
- Roller Guides on shafts secured to the profile groove > Accessories for linear movement such as Proximity
- Ball-bearing guide bushes on free-standing guiding Switches, length measuring system and Slide Clamps
shafts
- Linear guide systems on guide rails on the
profile groove
8.1 Linear Slides

8.1.1 Roller Guides The modular Roller Guides feature ease of assembly,
high load-bearing capacity, a choice of stroke length and
high travelling speed.
The low resistance and generous dimensions contribute
to the long service life. Roller Guides consist of Bearing
Units with ball-bearing mounted, prismatic rollers made
from roller bearing steel, the Roller Profiles (bearing
shell) and the End Cap and Lubricating Systems.
Roller Guide 5 D6 as a compound slide Roller Guide 8 D14 The Roller Guides are mounted on Profiles 5 and 8, with
the Shaft-Clamp Profiles being secured by clipping or
screwing them (Roller Guide 8 D25) into the grooves.
The hardened and polished steel shafts are then pressed
into the Shaft-Clamp Profiles along the entire length of
the Guide. By selecting appropriate lengths and offset
section joints for the supporting profile, the Shaft-Clamp
Profile and the shaft, it is possible to construct virtually
any length of Roller Guide.
The Shaft-Clamp Profiles Universal also allow the
Roller Guide 8 D6 Roller Guide 8 D25 guiding shafts to be secured to any chosen support
structures.
The various available diameters of the guiding shafts
together with suitable dimensioning of the supporting
profile mean that a wide variety of permissible loads can
be accommodated.
In addition, any number of Bearing Units can be used
and, if necessary, they can be adjusted free from play by
means of eccentric bolts.
Two Roller Guides 8 D14 on one Profile 8 80x40 The Bearing Units offer a range of fastening options
using the grooves of Profiles 5 or 8; assembly and
alignment on profiles or clamping plates are greatly
simplified.
In conjunction with the End Cap and Lubricating
Systems, the Roller Profile acts as a bearing shell and
safety cover, as well as providing protection against
soiling. This ensures uninterrupted operation, even
under adverse operating conditions.
Roller conveyor with adjustable longitudinal limit stop
331
Guide Alternatives
5 D6 Basic construction of Profiles 5 with Roller Guide 5 on

Shaft D6.

Shaft D6.
332
Shaft D10.

Shaft D14.
333

Shaft D25.
334
Calculation of The service life of Roller Guides can be assessed using
the calculation method for roller bearings:
Service Life
L = Service life in km
(__CP )
3
L = . 100 in km Lh = Service life in h
C = Dynamic
load factor in N
C 3 1666
____ P = Load in N
Lh = ( )
__
P
.
v in h –
v = Mean slide
speed in m/min
Co So = Static
S0 = __ load safety factor >3
P Co = Static load factor in N
Load Simplified method for determining the maximum

permissible load for Roller Guides:
Specifications
Roller Guide 5 D6 and 8 D6 Roller Guide 8 D10 Roller Guide 8 D14 Roller Guide 8 D25
F1 = 125 N F1 = 350 N F1 = 750 N F1 = 3000 N
F2 = 500 N F2 = 1500 N F2 = 3000 N F2 = 12000 N
F3 = 250 N F3 = 750 N F3 = 1500 N F3 = 6000 N
l l l l
F4 = 250 . —1 (N) F4 = 750. —1 (N) F4 = 1500 . —1 (N) F4 = 6000 . —1 (N)
l2 l2 l2 l2
l l (N) l l
F5 = 250 . — (N) F5 = 750. — F5 = 1500 . — (N) F5 = 6000 . — (N)
l2 l2 l2 l2
.
M = 250 l (Nm) M = 750 . l (Nm) M = 1500 . l (Nm) M = 6000 . l (Nm)
Performance at max. load: 10,000 km

Max. speed: 10 m/s
335
Frictional Forces Frictional losses must be taken into consideration when

designing drive units. The quoted values refer to slides,
each with 4 Rollers and 4 End Cap and Lubrication
Systems.
Roller Guides 5 D6 and 8 D6 Roller Guide 8 D10 Roller Guide 8 D14 Roller Guide 8 D25
FR = 5N FR = 10 N FR = 15 N FR = 25 N
Assembly of Guiding Shafts Proceed as follows when mounting the guiding shafts:
1. In order to prepare Shafts D10, D14 or D25 for
pinning, drill blind holes into the Shaft and Shaft-Clamp
Profile (for further details, refer to Shaft-Clamp Profiles
below).
2. Clean the Shaft-Clamp Profiles and the groove in the
supporting profile.
3. Grease the contact faces of the Shaft-Clamp Profiles,
supporting profile and guiding shafts with roller
bearing grease.
4. Press in the Shaft-Clamp Profiles as far as they will go.
5. Press in the guiding shafts using the mounting aid.
Where Roller Guides are longer than 3 m, the Shafts, the

Shaft-Clamp Profile and the supporting profile should
be assembled with joints offset to each other.
Minimum Stroke Lengths Possible arrangement of the End Cap and Lubricating
Systems which are required in every instance.
The spring-loaded end cap and lubricating felt can be
re-lubricated via the hole provided. Recommended
re-lubricating cycle: every six months.
In order to ensure adequate lubrication, the minimum
stroke lengths required for the slides must be observed.
5 D6 8 D6 8 D10 8 D14 8 D25

Bearing Unit 28 mm 60 mm 60 mm 60 mm 120 mm
Double-Bearing Unit 68 mm 80 mm 140 mm 140 mm 300 mm
Special Bearing Unit s + 50 mm s + 50 mm s + 85 mm s + 120 mm s + 235 mm
s = distance between centre of Roller and felt in mm
336
Assembly Tips The appropriate Pin Spanners are available (Section 9
Auxiliary Elements) for fastening Bolts 5 D6 e, 8 D10 e, 8
D14 e, 8 D25 c and 8 D25 e with locking rings.
Pinning Alternatives The Bearing Units and Double-Bearing Units 5 D6,

8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25 are provided with bores which
can be used as fastening and fixing bores when making
connections.
If the Bearing Units are to be mounted offset 90°, the
fastening and fixing bores must be located in
accordance with the specified dimensions or in the
dark-grey areas.
5 D6
8 D6
8 D10
337
8 D14
8 D25
Shaft-Clamp Profiles For connecting Shafts D6, D10, D14 and D25 with the
grooves of the corresponding Profile Lines.
After pressing the Shaft-Clamp Profile into the profile
groove, the Shaft is then pressed in.
Shafts D10, D14 and D25 must be fixed in position at
the chosen location using a dowel DIN 6325, one per
length of shaft.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 258 714
338
Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D25 is also screw-connected to
the profile groove using Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-
M8x16 and T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8 at intervals of 200 mm.
The appropriate Shafts can be found in Section 8.1.6 Shafts.
Shaft-Clamp Profile 5 D6
Al, anodized
A = 0.38 cm2
m = 0.10 kg/m
Al, anodized
A = 0.46 cm2
m = 0.12 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 0.81 cm2
m = 0.22 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 1.36 cm2
m = 0.36 kg/m

Al, anodized
A = 3.74 cm2
m = 1.01 kg/m
Fastening Set 8 for Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D25

Recommended tightening torque M = 25 Nm
m = 17 g
1 set 0.0.350.17
339
Shaft-Clamp Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14 Universal can be used to

construct a Roller Guide 8 D14 for any chosen base
Profiles D14 construction (machine beds, steel girders, work benches
Universal etc.). Appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that
the Shaft-Clamp Profiles are installed in parallel.
Bearing Units 8 D14 must always be employed in pairs
in both centric and eccentric constructions in order that
play can be eliminated.
Example of Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14H as an

internal guide.
Example of Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14V on a T-shaped

profile or similar as an external guide.
The Shaft-Clamp Profiles are designed to compensate
angular deviations around the longitudinal axis of
a = 1.5° between the mounting surface and Bearing
Units 8 D14.
The Shaft-Clamp Profiles can be secured to the base

construction using pins. The Shafts should also be
pinned into the Shaft-Clamp Profiles (once per length
of shaft). The Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D14
(Section 9.2 Jigs and Tools) can be used for this purpose.
The Shaft-Clamp Profiles are secured by means of

Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6. The through bores
should be no more than 100 mm apart.
Shaft-Clamp Profile D14V

Al, anodized
A = 2.98 cm2
m = 0.81 kg/m
340
Cap for Shaft-Clamp Profile D14V
PA, black
m = 9.00 g
1 set 0.0.294.65
Shaft-Clamp Profile D14H

Al, anodized
A = 4.81 cm2
m = 1.30 kg/m
Cap for Shaft-Clamp Profile D14H

PA, black
m = 10.00 g
1 set 0.0.294.64
Bearing Units For easy-running, covered Roller Guides with variable

aspect ratios and fastening options.
Bearing Units e (eccentric) and c (centric) differ in the
geometry of the bolts. The eccentric bolts can be
adjusted subsequently so as to ensure that the guide
unit is free from play. Bearing Units should therefore
always be used in pairs in both centric and eccentric
versions.
The Bearing Units must always be equipped with
End Cap and Lubricating Systems in order to prevent
premature wear.
Innovation
German patent
36 29 368
341
Bearing Units
Bearing Unit 5 D6 c
Al, anodized
Bolt 5 D6 c
Roller D6
Mbolt = 3 Nm
C = 1620 N
Co = 780 N
2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 47 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.390.15
Bearing Unit 5 D6 e
Al, anodized
Bolt 5 D6 e
Roller D6
Mlocknut = 3 Nm
C = 1620 N
Co = 780 N
m = 47 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.390.16
Bearing Unit 8 D6 c
Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D6 c
Roller D6
Mgrubscrew = 3 Nm
C = 1620 N
Co = 780 N
m = 146 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.356.30
Bearing Unit 8 D6 e
Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D6 e
Roller D6
Mgrubscrew = 3 Nm
C = 1620 N
Co = 780 N
m = 146 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.356.31
Bearing Unit 8 D10 c

Al, anodized
Roller D10
Bolt 8 D10 c
Mbolt = 6 Nm
C = 4400 N
Co = 2470 N
m = 210 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.442.10
342
Bearing Unit 8 D10 e
Al, anodized
Roller D10
Bolt 8 D10 e
Mlocknut = 6 Nm
C = 4,400 N
Co = 2,470 N
m = 210 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.442.09

Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D14 c
Roller D14
Mbolt = 20 Nm
C = 7,800 N
Co = 4,400 N
m = 400 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.294.14

Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D14 e
Roller D14
Mlocknut = 20 Nm
C = 7,800 N
Co = 4,400 N
m = 400 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.294.15

Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D25 c
Roller D25
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
Mlocking screw = 10 Nm
C. = 25,000 N
Co = 15,300 N
m = 2.0 kg
1 pce., natural 0.0.350.12

Al, anodized
Bolt 8 D25 e
Roller D25
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
C = 25,000 N
Co = 15,300 N
m = 2.0 kg
1 pce., natural 0.0.350.11
343
Double-Bearing
Units
Double-Bearing Unit 5 D6 c
Al, anodized
2 Bolts 5 D6 c
2 Rollers D6
Mbolt = 3 Nm
C = 3,240 N
Co = 1,560 N
m = 110 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.390.17
Double-Bearing Unit 5 D6 e
Al, anodized
2 Bolts 5 D6 e
2 Rollers D6
Mlocknut = 3 Nm
C = 3,240 N
Co = 1,560 N
m = 110 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.390.18
Al, anodized
2 Bolts 8 D6 c
2 Rollers D6
Mgrubscrew = 3 Nm
C = 3,240 N
Co = 1,560 N
m = 200 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.356.32
Al, anodized
2 Bolts 8 D6 e
2 Rollers D6
Mgrubscrew = 3 Nm
C = 3,240 N
Co = 1,560 N
m = 200 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.356.33

Al, anodized
2 Rollers D10
2 Bolts 8 D10 c
Mbolt = 6 Nm
C = 8,800 N
Co = 4,940 N
m = 450 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.442.15
344
Al, anodized
2 Rollers D10
2 Bolts 8 D10 e
Mlocknut = 6 Nm
C = 8,800 N
Co = 4,940 N
m = 450 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.442.14

Al, anodized
2 Rollers D14
2 Bolts 8 D14 c
Mbolt = 20 Nm
C = 15,600 N
Co = 8,800 N
m = 880 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.294.26

Al, anodized
2 Rollers D14
2 Bolts 8 D14 e
Mbolt = 20 Nm
C = 15,600 N
C0 = 8,800 N
m = 880 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.294.28

Al, anodized
2 Bolts 8 D25 c
2 Rollers D25
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
C = 50,000 N
Co = 30,600 N
m = 5.2 kg
1 pce., natural 0.0.350.19

Al, anodized
2 Bolts 8 D25 e
2 Rollers D25
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
C = 50,000 N
Co = 30,600 N
m = 5.2 kg
1 pce., natural 0.0.350.18
345
End Cap and The end cap and lubricating felt is saturated with oil
when it leaves the factory. Recommended re-oiling
Lubricating interval: every six months.
Systems The End Cap and Lubricating Systems are essential in
order to protect and lubricate the Bearing Units.
End Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6

PA-GF, black
End Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6, right
End Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6, left
m = 12 g
1 set 0.0.390.12

PA-GF, black
St, bright zincplated
m = 20 g
1 set 0.0.356.24

PA-GF, black
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.442.23

PA-GF, black
m = 60 g
1 set 0.0.294.46

PA-GF, black
m = 170 g
1 set 0.0.350.13
346
Rollers For constructing customised Bearing Units for easy-
running Roller Guides adjustable free from play, in
conjunction with the Shafts.
Roller D6
St, 100 Cr 6, hardened, polished
Double ball bearing with two washers,
maintenance-free
C = 1,620 N
Co = 780 N
RPMmax. = 10,000 min-1
m=8g
1 pce. 0.0.356.03
Roller D10
maintenance-free
1 washer, St, bright zinc-plated
C = 4,400 N
Co = 2,470 N
m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.442.02
Roller D14
maintenance-free
C = 7,800 N
Co = 4,400 N
m = 100 g
1 pce. 0.0.294.03
Roller D14K
Also corrosion-resistant and coated
1 pce., black 0.0.294.52
Roller D25
maintenance-free
C = 25,000 N
Co = 15,300 N
m = 590 g
1 pce. 0.0.350.03
347
Bolts For securing Rollers in the Roller Profile or other

elements.
Bolt 5 D6 c
St, black, corrosion-resistant
M = 3 Nm
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.390.03
Bolt 5 D6 e
Bolt and locknut, St, black,
corrosion-resistant
Mlocknut = 3 Nm
m=5g
1 set 0.0.390.19
Bolt 8 D6 c
Bolt and locking ring, St, black, corrosion-resistant
Grub screw DIN 914-M6x10, St
M = 3 Nm
m=6g
1 set 0.0.356.04
Bolt 8 D6 e
Bolt and locking ring, St, black, corrosion-resistant
Grub screw DIN 914-M6x10, St
M = 3 Nm
m=6g
1 set 0.0.356.05
Bolt 8 D10 c
M = 6 Nm
m = 12 g
1 pce. 0.0.442.06
Bolt 8 D10 e
Bolt and lock nut
Mlocknut = 6 Nm
m = 10 g
1 set 0.0.442.07
Bolt 8 D14 c
M = 20 Nm
m = 48 g
1 pce. 0.0.294.10
Bolt 8 D14 e
Bolt and lock nut, St, black,
corrosion-resistant
Mlocknut = 20 Nm
m = 46 g
1 set 0.0.294.12
348
Bolt 8 D25 c
corrosion-resistant
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
m = 285 g
1 set 0.0.350.04
Bolt 8 D25 e
corrosion-resistant
Mlocknut = 100 Nm
m = 285 g
1 set 0.0.350.05
Roller Profiles Profiles for constructing Bearing Units of any length,

using the appropriate Rollers, Bolts and End Cap and
Lubricating Systems.
349
Roller Profiles
Roller Profile 5 D6
Al, anodized
A = 4.30 cm2 Ix = 2.98 cm4 Iy = 3.05 cm4
It = 0.81 cm4
m = 1.16 kg/m Wx = 1.98 cm3 Wy = 2.05 cm3
Roller Profile 8 D6
Al, anodized
A = 7.55 cm2 Ix = 4.53 cm4 Iy =24.15 cm4
It = 1.66 cm4
m = 2.03 kg/m Wx = 2.12 cm3 Wy = 8.05 cm3
Roller Profile 8 D10

Al, anodized
A = 9.35 cm2 Ix =12.64 cm4 Iy =18.89 cm4
It = 5.18 cm4
m = 2.52 kg/m Wx = 6.52 cm3 Wy = 6.54 cm3

Al, anodized
A =15.72 cm2 Ix =48.08 cm4 Iy =47.96 cm4
It = 11.14 cm4
m = 4.24 kg/m Wx = 15.74 cm3 Wy =14.23 cm3

Al, anodized
A =44.19 cm2 Ix =508.41 cm4 Iy =331.49 cm4
It = 30.51 cm4
m =11.93 kg/m Wx = 79.98 cm3 Wy = 82.87 cm3
350
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.2 C-Rail Systems
8.1.2 C-Rail Systems C-Rail Systems are specialized Roller Guides and are
ideal for constructing compact guides, lifting doors,
sliding doors, movable guards and enclosures etc.
The C-Rail Systems for Profiles 5, 6 and 8 are each

available in 3 versions:
> C-Rail System 1R with slides on prismatic steel rollers
mounted on ball bearings and a polished guiding shaft.
This version can accommodate high loads in the vertical
downward plane as shown in the illustration on the left
and features particularly low-friction running. A second
guiding shaft can also be fitted in order to prevent the
sliding door from tilting when moved.
> C-Rail System 3R with guide slides that can be
adjusted via eccentrics. The 3 steel rollers mounted on
ball bearings run free from play on 2 polished shafts and
are ideal for very high loads and cases where particular
requirements are placed on the precision of the guides.
> C-Rail System K with slide consisting of plastic rollers

running directly on the aluminium rail profile.
This variant can accommodate low hanging loads as
shown in the illustration opposite and is adequate for
simple guide operations.
351
System Variations Line C-Rail System 3R C-Rail System 1R C-Rail System K
Load Specifications
C-Rail System 5 D6 3R C-Rail System 5 D6 1R C-Rail System 5 K

F1 = 250 N, F2 = 125 N F3 = 125 N F4 = 50 N
F1 = 750 N, F2 = 350 N F3 = 350 N F4 = 125 N
F1 = 1500 N, F2 = 750 N F3 = 750 N F4 = 250 N
352
Guide Alternatives Examples of possible guide alternatives using the
C-Rail System.
The guides shown opposite are suitable for parallel
guides (e.g. independent, overlapping sliding doors) or
for telescope guides (e.g. doors and pullouts which have
long strokes relative to the guide length). The C-Rails
must be interconnected at appropriate points.
The profiles are designed so that the grooves are
positioned to accommodate other components.
The slide profile is located offset with respect to the rail
profile in order to prevent collisions between moving
and stationary parts. The risk of other components
colliding with rail or slide profiles must be countered by
appropriate design measures (installation at a distance
from the frame, spacers, etc.).
Installation of the Guiding The following points must be taken into account when
installing the guiding shafts:
Shafts > Preparation for pinning Shafts D10 or D14 by drilling
base bores into the Shafts at any point using a carbide-
tipped drill. Shaft D6 does not need to be pinned.
The Shaft is best drilled using the Combination Drilling
Jig for Shafts.
> Drill the through bores into the C-Rail Profile at the
same point.
System variant 6 System variant 8 > Press a dowel pin DIN 1481-4x10 into Shaft D10 or
dowel pin DIN 1481-5x14 into Shaft D14.
> Shaft D6 in C-Rail Profile 5 is not pinned.
> Using the Mounting Aid for Shafts (Section 9 Auxiliary

Elements), an appropriate round steel bar for a lever, and
a profile for locating the Mounting Aid, the pre-greased
guiding shafts are pressed into the C-Rail Profiles.
353
Minimum Stroke Lengths The shaft-mounted versions with steel rollers must not
be run without lubrication.
To ensure adequate lubrication, minimum stroke lengths
must be complied with for the Bearing Units:
Bearing Unit Minimum stroke length
5 D6 1R 60 mm
5 D6 3R 100 mm
6 D10 1R 90 mm
6 D10 3R 150 mm
8 D14 1R 120 mm
8 D14 3R 200 mm
The lubricating systems are charged with oil at the

factory. They should be topped up with machine oil
every six months.
C-Rail, Bearing Units Complete Bearing Units for simple construction of

C-Rail Systems 5, 6 and 8.
354
C-Rail, Bearing Unit 5 D6 1R
C-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodized
C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5
C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 D6 1R
m = 64 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.460.31

m = 117 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.460.30
C-Rail, Bearing Unit 5 K

C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 1R K
m = 60 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.460.33

m = 231 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.461.31

m = 425 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.461.30

C-Rail, Bearing Set 6 1R K
m = 209 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.461.33
355
C-Rail, Bearing
Units
m = 576 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.462.31

m = 1.1 kg
1 pce., natural 0.0.462.30

C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 K
m = 492 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.462.33
C-Rail, Bearing For constructing C-Rail slides using C-Rail, Slide

Profiles 5, 6 or 8.
Sets
356
1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with
1 Roller D6, centric
2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 5 D6
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.460.35

2 Rollers D6, centric
1 Roller D6, eccentric
m = 51 g
1 set 0.0.460.34

1 C-Rail, Roller 5 K
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.460.37

m = 103 g
1 set, natural 0.0.461.35

m = 214 g
1 set 0.0.461.34

m = 79 g
1 set 0.0.461.37

m = 257 g
1 set 0.0.462.35
357
C-Rail, Bearing
Sets
1 C-Rail, lock nut 8, St, black
m = 576 g
1 set 0.0.462.34

m = 158 g
1 set 0.0.462.37
C-Rail, For constructing C-Rail Systems, suitable for guides

both with and without guiding shafts D6, D10 or D14.
Rail Profiles
C-Rail, Rail Profile 5

Al, anodized
A = 2.62 cm2 Ix = 0.91 cm4 Iy = 4.67 cm4
m = 0.71 kg/m Wx = 0.76 cm3 Wy = 1.78 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 6.23 cm2 Ix = 4.84 cm4 Iy =26.26 cm4
m = 1.68 kg/m Wx = 2.74 cm3 Wy = 6.22 cm3
358
Al, anodized
A =11.41 cm2 Ix =17.35 cm4 Iy =84.78 cm4
m = 3.10 kg/m Wx = 7.39 cm3 Wy = 14.35 cm3
C-Rail, For constructing slides for C-Rail System 5, 6, or 8

using Bearing Sets.
Slide Profiles The positions of the holes are identified by marking
grooves in the profiles.
The relevant holes (a) for the lock nuts and countersinks
DIN 74 (b) for the Countersunk Screws must be provided
for securing the Bearing Sets.
Slide Profile
5 6 8
a ø 14.5 mm ø 16.5 mm ø 22.5 mm
b DIN 74-Bf5 DIN 74-Bf6 DIN 74-Bm8
c 30 mm/42 mm 46 mm/66 mm 64 mm/90 mm
d 32.4 mm 47.9 mm 63.3 mm
359
C-Rail,
Slide Profiles
C-Rail, Slide Profile 5
Al, anodized
A = 2.46 cm2 Ix = 0.92 cm4 Iy = 2.86 cm4
m = 0.67 kg/m Wx = 0.81 cm3 Wy = 1.11 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 5.44 cm2 Ix = 4.00 cm4 Iy =13.08 cm4
m = 1.47 kg/m Wx = 2.79 cm3 Wy = 3.24 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 9.81 cm2 Ix =16.08 cm4 Iy =41.91 cm4
m = 2.65 kg/m Wx = 6.71 cm3 Wy = 7.63 cm3
C-Rail, Slide
Profile Caps
PA-GF, black
C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap right
C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap left
m=2g
1 set 0.0.460.38

PA-GF, black
m=5g
1 set 0.0.461.38
360
PA-GF, black
m = 13 g
1 set 0.0.462.38
C-Rail,
Slide Profile
Caps C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5
PA-GF, black
m= 2 g
1 set 0.0.460.39

PA-GF, black
m= 4 g
1 set 0.0.461.39

PA-GF, black
m = 11 g
1 set 0.0.462.39
361
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems
8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems Four-row linear guide systems (with full complement)
on profiled rails. The individual linear guide system
carriages can be loaded from all directions and can
absorb moments around all axes. The key features of
linear guide systems PS are high carrying capacity,
rigidity and compact design. Each linear guide system
carriage can be freely combined with every Linear Guide
Rail within a given Line, so that one, two or more
carriages are possible per rail and carriages can be
exchanged.
In a number of application cases, particularly involving
high forces and moments that need to be absorbed by
greater support distances, the carriages should not be
used individually, but rather in combination. Solutions
involving several carriages on a single rail and several
carriages on parallel rails are also possible.
Guide systems with parallel rails on a single supporting

profile can be constructed on the profile groove without
elaborate alignment measures due to the special
fastening geometry employed by the rail. The use of
parallel rails on independent profiles or different support
constructions will require the amount of alignment and
fastening which is typical for profile rail guides
(machining of location surfaces, use of parallel
segments etc.).
Rail Attachment Guide rail PS 4-15 is attached to the Profile 8 groove.

The rail has been shaped for this purpose and centres
automatically when screwed against Groove
Profile 8 Al M4-60.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 921 899
Linear guide system PS 4-15
A guide PS 4-25 with one or more guide carriages, one
guide rail and one rail clamp on a Support Profile.
The self-centring rail clamp also serves as a support for
the guide rail and secures this to any Support Profile 8
Innovation with a minimum width of 80 mm. Profile 8 lightweight
and 8E should not be used for the support profiles.
German
utility model
pending
Linear guide system PS 4-25
362
Load Specifications The permissible load for a linear guide system also
depends on the strength of the screw connections and
the construction of the profile frame.
The minimum stroke length (h) is required if the rolling-
ball contact is to be adequately lubricated. The carriage
is charged at the factory with lithium-based grease.
Lithium-based greases with a mineral-oil base can be
used for re-lubrication.
Given the contact pressure of the wipers, a displacement
force of 10 N must be taken into account irrespective of load.
Linear guide system

PS 4-15 PS 4-25
C0 = Static load factor 14,500 N 37,000N
C= Dynamic load factor 7,200 N 17,900 N
M0x = Static moment 150 Nm 510 Nm
M0y=M0z= Static moment 100Nm 395 Nm
vmax. = Speed 5 m/s 5 m/s
t= Temperature range -40 to +100 °C -40 to +100 °C
h= Min. stroke length 40 mm 60 mm
Calculation of Service Life The static and dynamic load factors and static moment
characterise the rolling-ball contact between the carriage
and rail and are used for calculating the service life
based on the rules for the roller bearing calculation:
L = Service life in km
(__CP )
3
L = . 100 in km Lh = Service life in h
C = Dynamic
load factor in N
C 3 1666
____ P = Load in N
Lh = ( )
__
P
.
v in h –
v = Mean slide
speed in m/min
Co So = Recommended
S0 = __ load safety factor 4...10
P Co = Static load factor in N
363
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems
Bearing The Bearing Carriages can be used either individually or

in various combinations on one or more rails.
Carriages The Bearing Carriage has four polished tracks on which
the bearings are in linear rolling-ball contact (similar to
an O-arrangement) with the profiled rail. The bearings
are recirculated through the end-face reverse units and
closed return conduits. The carriages are fitted with end-
face wiper systems and additional longitudinal wipers in
order to minimise sensitivity to external influences.
Proiles 8 can be secured to the Bearing Carriage by
means of Button-Head Screws ISO 7380 and Locating
Washers 8 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).
Bearing Carriage PS 4-15

Housing, St, hardened
Wiper system, PA, black
2 lubricating nipples
m = 140 g
1 pce. 0.0.443.06
Bearing Carriage PS 4-25

Housing, St, hardened
Wiper system, PA, black
2 lubricating nipples DIN 3405 A M6-120°
m = 545 g
1 pce. 0.0.443.16
Bearing Wiper The elastic wiper and seal element is used to retain
lubricant and to clean the guide tracks. The correct
Set functioning of the guide tracks is a critical factor for the
service life of the linear guide system. The wipers can
also be exchanged when the carriage is still fitted, as
part of the maintenance process.
364
Bearing Wiper Set PS 4-15
2 wiper units, TPE, black
m=2g
1 set 0.0.443.09
Bearing Wiper Set PS 4-25

2 wiper units, TPE, black
m=4g
1 set 0.0.443.28
Linear Guide Profiled Linear Guide Rail with special fastening

geometry for grooves of Profile 8 at the base of the rail.
Rail The rails are provided with fastening bores and
PS 4-15 countersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN
912-M4. Following installation, the countersinks must
be covered flush using the caps provided in order to
increase the service life of the end-face wiper systems.
The rails are best fastened to the Profile 8 using Groove

Profile 8 Al M4/60 and Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screws DIN 912-M4x16 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).
Linear Guide Rail PS 4-15

St, Cf53, hardened, polished
Caps, PA
m = 1.3 kg/m
Cut-off max. 2000 mm 0.0.443.05

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.443.04

Al, anodized
m = 590 g/m
365
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide System
Linear Guide Rail Profiled Linear Guide Rail with special rail base
geometry for use of Linear Guide Rail clamp PS 4-25.
PS 4-25
Fastening profiles for clamping the Linear Guide Rail PS

4-25, complete with drill holes and threads.
A Guide Rail Mounting Profile, Guide Rail Clamping
Profile and an appropriate number of Hexagon Socket
Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M6x40 (Section 3.2 Screws
and Nuts) are required for securing each guide rail.
Recommended tightening torque MA = 10 Nm.
Linear Guide Rail PS 4-25

St, Cf53, hardened, polished
m = 2.5 kg/m
Cut-off max. 2000 mm 0.0.443.15

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.443.14
Guide Rail Mounting Profile PS 4-25

Al, anodized
m = 940 g/m
Guide Rail Clamping Profile PS 4-25

Al, anodized
m = 529 g/m
366
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.4 Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes
8.1.4 Ball-Bearing Guide Ball-bearing guide bushes can be integrated as compact

linear slides in profile constructions.
Bushes The length of the guide is determined solely by the
length of the guiding shaft.
The Ball Bushes themselves do not restrict the stroke
length; they offer low friction and are characterised by
high linearity of motion.
The heart of a ball-bearing guide bush is the
recirculating ball bearing which runs on a hardened
steel guiding shaft. Ball Bushes and guiding shafts are
integrated into the profile cavities with the minimum of
ancillary components.
An important requirement for satisfactory functioning is
that the guide housing and clamp blocks for securing
the guiding shafts should be made from immediately
adjacent sections of the profile.
Under no circumstances should they be assembled with
the incorrect rotational alignment. For this reason, the
Ball-bearing guide bushes in an indexing transport system profile sections should be marked, in the groove for
example, before they are cut to length.
Two sizes, based on shaft diameters 14 and 25, are
designed to withstand slide loads of 500 and 1500 N.
The maximum travelling speed is 2 m/s.
The double-sided seal of the Ball Bush, together with a
high-quality grease filling, guarantee a long service life
for the guide units, even under unfavourable operating
conditions.
Slide and Shaft-Clamp Block

It is recommended that an evaluation should be made of
the load-bearing capacity and service life, together with
an allowance for deflection of the guiding shafts in the
case of longer strokes.
Slide with Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit Clamp Block with Shaft-Clampng Bush
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set
367
Guide Alternatives The Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Sets can be used for a
variety of applications:
Arrangement of the shafts with fixed shaft distance
(2 shafts in one profile).
Any selected shaft distance (1 shaft per profile).
Vertical guide with fixed shafts.

Vertical guide with fixed guide slide and moving shafts.
Calculation of Service Life L = Service Life in km

(__CP )
3
L = . 100 in km Lh = Service Life in h
C = Dynamic load
factor in N
C 3 1666
____ P = Load in N
Lh = ( )
__
P
.
v in h –
v = Mean slide
speed in m/min
Co
__ So = Static
S0 = load safety factor >3
P
Co = Static load factor in N
368
Ball-Bearing Complete guide systems based on Shafts D14 or D25
with variable slide (S) and stroke lengths (H) (please
Guide Bush indicate when ordering). Shaft length W = 80 + H + S.
Sets The slightly shorter shaft length allows adjustments
during installation.
The maximum length of guide is 2000 mm.
The load factors of the slides are governed by the type and
number of Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units used.
Innovation
German
utility model
90 11 851
Recommended arrangement for a fixing or mounting hole.
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set 8 80x40 D14

Fully machined and pre-assembled
2 slides 8 80x40 D14, Al, natural anodized
4 Clamp Blocks 8 80x40 D14
4 Caps 8 80x40
4 Clamp-Block Caps 8 80x40 D14
4 Slide Caps 8 80x40 D14
4 Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 8 D14
4 Shaft-Clamping Bushes 8 D14
2 Shafts D14
1 set 0.0.386.11

2 slides 8 80x80 D25, Al, natural anodized
4 Caps 8 80x80
2 Shafts D25
1 set 0.0.387.11

1 slide 8 160x40 D14, Al, natural anodized
2 Caps 8 160x40
2 Shafts D14
1 set 0.0.386.10
369
Ball-Bearing
Guide Bush Sets
1 slide 8 160x80 D25, Al, natural anodized
2 Caps 8 160x80
2 Shafts D25
1 set 0.0.387.10
Shaft-Clamping For clamping Shafts D14 and D25.

The Shaft-Clamping Bushes are fixed in the cavities of
Bushes Profiles 8 using grub screw DIN 913-M8.
Shaft-Clamping Bush 8 D14

St, black
m = 22 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.03
Shaft-Clamping Bush 8 D25

St, black
m = 85 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.03
370
Ball-Bearing Complete unit consisting of steel sleeve with press-fitted
Ball Bush. For high loads, re-greasing of the bearings is
Guide Bush recommended.
Units
The Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units are secured in the

cavities of Profiles 8 by means of grub screw DIN 914-M8.
The load on the slide must be applied from the direction
opposite the grub screw.
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit 8 D14

Steel sleeve, St, black
Ball Bush D14, sealed both ends, maintenance-free
C = 620 N
Co = 520 N
Max. speed = 2 m/s
m = 62 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.12
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit 8 D25

Steel sleeve, St, black
C = 1,990 N
Co = 1,670 N
Max. speed = 2 m/s
m = 300 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.12
371
Caps Rounded face covering for cut profile end of the slides
or Clamp Blocks with appropriate bore.
Slide Caps
Slide Cap 8 80x40 D14

PA-GF, black
m = 13 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.08

PA-GF, black
m = 24 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.08

PA-GF, black
m = 26 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.06

PA-GF, black
m = 53 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.06
Clamp-Block
Caps
Clamp-Block Cap 8 80x40 D14
PA-GF, black
m = 14 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.09

PA-GF, black
m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.09

PA-GF, black
m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.386.07
372
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.5 Ball-Bush Block Guides

PA-GF, black
m = 56 g
1 pce. 0.0.387.07
8.1.5 Ball-Bush In terms of application and characteristics, the modular

ball-bush block guides are similar to those of the ball-
Block Guides bearing guide bushes. By separating the shafts, the
distance between the points of support can be selected
in accordance with the applied loads.
Two special profiles, in sizes 40x40 and 60x60,
enable the easy manufacture of Shaft-Clamp Blocks for
shaft diameters 10, 14, 20, 25 and 30 mm.
Matching Ball-Bush Blocks are produced from the same
profiles by machining holes and press-fitting
recirculating Ball Bushes.
The range of sizes and the different shaft diameters are
designed to withstand applied loads ranging from 400 to
2250 N at a maximum travelling speed of 2 m/s.
The double-sided seal of the Ball Bush, together with a
high-quality grease filling, guarantees a long service
life, even under unfavourable operating conditions.
It is recommended that an evaluation should be made of
the load-bearing capacity and service life, together with
Ball-bush block guide, size 40x40, Shaft D14 an allowance for deflection of the guiding shafts in the
case of longer strokes.
Ball-bush block guides, size 40x40, Shafts D10 and D14
Ball-bush block guides, size 60x60, Shafts D20, D25 and D30
373
Ball-Bush Block Guides

Guide Alternatives
The ball-bush block guides allow versatile design.

Dimension s can be adjusted for different support
widths.
Mounting Levels The asymmetric structure

of the Bearing Blocks and
8 40x40 the use of various screw-
attachment areas offer a
selection of construction
heights.
374
8 60x60
Load Specifications The various sizes permit slide loads of between 400 and
2250 N. The maximum travelling speed is 2 m/s.
Calculation of Service Life 3 L = Service life in km

L = (__CP ) . 100 in km Lh
C
=
=
Service life
Dynamic load factor
in h
in N
P = Load in N
3
–
v = Mean slide
1666
Lh = (__CP ) . ____
v
in h speed in m/min
Co
__ So = Static load safety factor >3
S0 = Co = Static load factor in N
P
Assembly Tips Connection of Bearing Blocks with Profiles 8 or other

components is possible from the outside with the help
of T-Slot Nuts 8 St.
375
Ball-Bush Block Guides The Bearing Blocks can be secured to other profiles
using Direct Fastener 8 without any machining.
Assembly Tips Access to the fastener is from the profile end face.
Where it is desired to attach to other components they
must be drilled and tapped M6.
An individual Ball Bush is unable to absorb any moment.

It is therefore always necessary to use two shafts for a
guide system, with at least two Ball Bushes being
X located one after the other on a single shaft.

The distances must be appropriate for the moment loads.
The blocks can be pinned in the areas marked

(depending on requirements).
Bearing Blocks Individual components for constructing a ball-bush

block guide.
The Shaft-Clamp Blocks hold and clamp the shafts.

The shafts are clamped by means of appropriate grub
screws.
The Ball-Bush Blocks serve as the guide elements with

integral press-fitted recirculating Ball Bushes.
376
Shaft-Clamp Block 8 D10
Shaft-Clamp Block Al, anodized
m = 100 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.401.01

m = 98 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.401.03

m = 245 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.402.01

Shaft-Clamp Block, Al, anodized
m = 240 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.402.03

Shaft-Clamp Block, Al, anodized
m = 220 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.402.05
377
Bearing Blocks
Ball-Bush Block 8 D10

Ball-Bush Block, Al, anodized
C = 500 N
Co = 370 N
m = 105 g
1 pce. 0.0.401.02

C = 620 N
Co = 520 N
m = 100 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.401.04

C = 950 N
Co = 790 N
m = 260 g
1 pce. 0.0.402.02

C = 1990 N
Co = 1670 N
m = 260 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.402.04

C = 2800 N
Co = 2700 N
m = 300 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.402.06
378
Block Caps 1 Block-End Cap Set and 3 Block-Cap Sets of the
appropriate shaft diameter are required for each ball-
bush block guide.
Block-End Cap Set 8 40x40

PA-GF, black
Block-end cap 8 40x40 right
Block-end cap 8 40x40 left
m = 14 g
1 set 0.0.401.11
Block-End Cap Set 8 60x60

PA-GF, black
Block-end cap 8 60x60 right
Block-end cap 8 60x60 left
m = 30 g
1 set 0.0.402.17
Block-Cap Set 8 D10

PA-GF, black
Block cap 8 D10 right
Block cap 8 D10 left
m = 12 g
1 set 0.0.401.12
Block-Cap Set 8 D14

PA-GF, black
m = 12 g
1 set 0.0.401.13
Block-Cap Set 8 D20

PA-GF, black
m = 28 g
1 set 0.0.402.18
Block-Cap Set 8 D25

PA-GF, black
m = 27 g
1 set 0.0.402.19
Block-Cap Set 8 D30

PA-GF, black
m = 25 g
1 set 0.0.402.20
379
Ball-Bush Block For use in constructing ball-bush block guides, in

particular with the item Ball Bushes. Also suitable for
Profiles self-construction of pedestal bearings.
Ball-Bush Block Profile 8 40x40

Al, anodized
A = 9.58 cm2 Ix =14.22 cm4 Iy =14.38 cm4
It = 9.95 cm4
m = 2.58 kg/m Wx = 6.77 cm3 Wy = 6.94 cm3
Ball-Bush Block Profile 8 60x60

Al, anodized
A =23.05 cm2 Ix =76.03 cm4 Iy =75.65 cm4
It =77.49 cm4
m = 6.18 kg/m Wx =26.77 cm3 Wy =26.27 cm3
Ball Bushes Ball Bushes for the construction of ball-bush

block guides.
Sealed both ends, maintenance-free
Ball Bush D10

d = 17 mm l = 26 mm
m = 14.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.401.19
Ball Bush D14

d = 21 mm l = 28 mm
m = 20.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.401.20
Ball Bush D20

d = 28 mm l = 30 mm
m = 32.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.402.28
Ball Bush D25

d = 35 mm l = 40 mm
m = 66.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.402.29
Ball Bush D30

d = 40 mm l = 50 mm
m = 95.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.402.30
380
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.6 Shafts
8.1.6 Shafts Can be used as guiding shafts for Roller Guides, C-Rail
Guides, ball-bearing guide bushes and ball-bush block
guides.
Shaft D14 K is intended for special applications and is
corrosion-resistant black coating.
St, Cf 53, hardened, polished

Hardness HRc 60 ± 2
Roughness Ra = 0.3 μm, Rz = 1.6 μm
Shaft D6
Hardening depth min. 0.4 mm
Roundness 4 μm
Parallelism 5 μm/1000 mm
m = 0.22 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm, bright 0.0.356.01
Shaft D10
Roundness 4 μm
m = 0.62 kg/m
Shaft D14
Roundness 5 μm
m = 1.21 kg/m
Shaft D14 K
Also corrosion-resistant coating
Shaft D20
Roundness 6 μm
m = 2.45 kg/m
Shaft D25
Roundness 6 μm
m = 3.85 kg/m
Shaft D30
Roundness 6 μm
m = 5.51 kg/m
381
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides
8.1.7 Accessories Components for expanding the range of applications of

item linear slides:
for Linear Slides > Slide Clamps for hand-operated linear slides
> Limit stop for limiting mechanical movement
> Magnetic Strip Cover Profile for integrating distance
measuring systems into linear slides
Slide Clamp 8 Slide Clamp 8 heavy-duty is used for securing guide

slides on a supporting profile. It can be screw-
heavy-duty connected under any carriage of item‘s linear slides
where there is a clearance of 20 mm between the top of
the supporting profile and the underside of the carriage.
It is advisable to additionally pin Slide Clamp 8 heavy-
duty to the sliding profile (dowel DIN 6325-5m6 x 30).
The special design of Slide Clamp 8 heavy-duty

prevents undue force being applied to the bearings as a
result of the clamping action.
Holding force for maximum

Clamping elements tightening torque of 15 Nm
dry Approx. 1500 N
oily Approx. 1000 N
Slide Clamp 8 heavy-duty

Complete
m = 385 g
1 pce. 0.0.463.65
382
Slide Clamps Slide Clamp 8 S16 (S16 = thickness of the sliding
profile) is suitable for Roller Guides with a profile
8 80x16 as the sliding profile.
Slide Clamps 8 S28 and 8 S40 can be used in
combination with Roller Guide 8 D14 and a Profile
8 160x28 or Profile 8 160x40 as the sliding profile.
Innovation
German
utility model
93 12 999
Typical arrangement of Slide Clamps over a groove in

the guide profile
Holding force for maximum

Clamping elements tightening torque of 5.5 Nm
dry Approx. 500 N
oily Approx. 200 N
Slide Clamp 8 S16

Clamping jaw GS, bright zinc-plated
Clamping wedge GS, stainless, slide coating
Clamp lever, black
m = 93 g
1 pce. 0.0.356.35
Slide Clamp 8 S28
Clamp lever, black
m = 94 g
1 pce. 0.0.294.48
Slide Clamp 8 S40
Clamp lever, black
m = 95 g
1 pce. 0.0.294.51
383
8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides
Limit Stop A Limit Stop is required for each terminal position.

The Limit Stop can also be located in the area of the
groove covered by a Timing Belt. Arrangement of the
plastic buffer in the groove of the supporting profile.
Grub screw M8x44 is secured in the opposing groove of
the guide slide.
Limit Stop 8
T-Slot Nut St M8, bright zinc-plated
T-Slot Nut M6x8 with thrust piece, St, bright zinc-plated
Nut DIN 508-M6x8, St, bright zinc-plated
Plastic buffer ø 10x40 mm, PUR yellow, 90 Shore A
Grub screw M8x44, St, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon nut DIN 6331-M8, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 65 g
1 set 0.0.337.11
384
Magnetic Strip To attach and protect distance measuring systems.
The Magnetic Strip Cover Profile can be used as
Cover Profile attachment and complete protection for commercially
available magnetic strips (nominal width 5 mm (max.
5.5 mm), nominal thickness 1.5 mm (max. 1.7 mm)
in the groove of Profiles 8.
Customised linear instrumentation and control systems
can be constructed by combining the Magnetic Strip
Cover Profile with appropriate magnetic sensors and
evaluation electronics.
The magnetic strip is inserted into the Magnetic Strip

Cover Profile and is clamped along its length by
pressing in the Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord. The
preassembled unit can now be pressed into the groove
of Profiles 8. Compared with the technique for securing
the magnetic strip by means of adhesive bonding, the
above fastening technique is less susceptible to soiling,
temperature changes etc.
As a result of the low shielding effect of the aluminium

profile between the magnetic strip and the sensor, the
profile thickness (1 mm) can be included in the
permissible gap recommended by the manufacturer
(dimension a).
Magnetic Strip Cover Profile 8 Al

Al, anodized
A = 0.17 cm2
m = 45 g/m
Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord 8 D6

NBR, black
m = 34 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.3.004.60
385
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives
8.2 Mechanical Drive Within the MB Building Kit System, power can be
supplied to the slides of the Roller Guides, ball-bearing
Elements guide bushes and linear guide systems or any other
linear-guided structural elements, such as doors etc.,
using timing-belt drives, ball screws or chain drives.
The drive elements allow flexible design of any
number of axes of movement when combined with item
linear slides.
8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives Timing-belt drives are particularly suitable for high
speeds and extended stroke lengths. A range of sizes,
with flexible and heavy duty Timing Belts of different
widths and different pulley diameters, are designed to
satisfy virtually any load and speed requirements.
Linear units driven by a Timing Belt mainly consist of a

supporting profile with the corresponding linear slide,
the sliding carriage and the components of the timing-
belt drive mechanism.
The Timing Belt is secured to the slide by means of a
Timing-Belt Tensioner, turned through 180° by a
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit at the end of the supporting
profile, routed back inside or outside the profile, turned
through 180° once again by a second Timing-Belt
Reverse Unit, and is then linked or clamped with the
other end of the Timing Belt on the sliding carriage.
386
Possibilities for combining linear guides and
mechanical drive elements:
Timing-Belt Reverse Units In addition to acting as a guide for the belt, the Timing-
Belt Reverse Unit can also be used as a coupling for any
type of shaft-driven mechanism. For this purpose, the
pulley is in the form of a multi-spline hub or it can be
individually processed for a shaft-hub joint.
The choice of suitable Timing-Belt Reverse Unit depends
on the required forces and speeds or on the combination
of drive mechanism and gearbox.
387
Timing-Belt Reverse Units The special apertures in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit
can also be used to turn the belt through 90°, with the
return path being located at any distance from the
sliding carriage. If necessary, an additional slide can
also be powered, offset at 90° from the first, using the
same drive mechanism.
Reversal of the Timing Belt around 180°. The Timing

Belt can be returned either inside or outside the profile.
The timing pulley is provided with multi-spline toothing
for attaching drive units or Multi-Spline / Adapter
Shafts, or with a bore which can be machined for other
shaft / hub connections. The housings of the Timing-
Belt Reverse Units feature grooves for connecting to
profiles of the relevant Lines.
Connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Units either

with Multi-Spline Shafts or, for distances in excess of
500 mm, with Adapter Shafts, hollow shafts or
Synchroniser Shafts.
Possible parallel arrangement for double timing-belt

drive with double loading capacity.
General function of bore and belt covers (exception:

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II)
> Top belt cover (a) can be detached when used as belt drive
> Timing pulley (b) with multi-spline hub or bore
> Bores in basic shell (c) for mounting Coupling
Housings, Adapter Flange, Bevel Gear Box and Ball Screw
Unit or for interconnecting Timing-Belt Reverse Units
> Bottom belt cover (d) can be detached where space is
restricted
388
Timing-Belt Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 can be used to
reverse and drive Timing Belt R10 T5 in conjunction
Reverse Units 5 with Profiles 5.
The housing of the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit has been
prepared for attaching Adapter Plates and Coupling
Housings D30 and for accommodating Centring Piece
D50-D22.
The profiles must be rounded at the joint to the Timing-

Belt Reverse Unit.
Mounting at a height of 40 mm in the groove of Profile 5

with Universal-Fastening Set 5.
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 VK 14

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Al, black
Ball-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,
hub geometry VK14 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14
DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, hub length 18 mm
One revolution corresponds to 140 mm
Timing Belt width 10 mm
Frictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning
of the Timing Belt: MR = 0.05 Nm
Max. load: MD = 4 Nm
Timing Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for
90° reversal : 110 mm
180° reversal (outer dimension 64) : 150 mm
2 Universal-Fastening Sets 5, bright zinc-plated
Pitch p = 5 mm Number of teeth z = 28
m = 262 g
1 pce. 0.0.410.01
389
Timing-Belt
Reverse Unit 5
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 with Bore
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Al, black
Ball-bearing timing pulley with bore ø 8H7,
reborable up to max. ø 15 mm
Hub length 18 mm
2 Universal-Fastening Sets 5, bright zinc-plated
m = 277 g
1 pce. 0.0.410.06
Timing-Belt Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 is suitable for

reversing and driving Timing Belt R25 T10 for linear
Reverse Units 8 units of Profiles 8. The emergence dimension of the
40 R25 Timing Belt is 40 mm.
Housings D55 and for accommodating Centring Piece
D55-D22.
The profile edge must be rounded at the joint to the

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit.
390
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 mounted at a height
of 40 mm in the groove of the Profile 8 using Universal
Fastener 8 and special T-Slot Nut or in the core bore
using Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8 and washer
DIN 125-8.4.
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 VK14

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, black
180° reversal (emerg. on 100 mm side) : 160 mm
180° reversal (emerg. on 80 mm side) : 200 mm
2 Universal Fasteners 8
1 special T-Slot Nut G-St M8
1 washer DIN 125-8,4 St, bright zinc-plated
m = 1.3 kg
1 pce. 0.0.337.26

Hub length 30 mm
2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20, St, bright
zinc-plated
1 special T-Slot Nut G-St M8
1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x20, St, bright
zinc-plated
1 washer DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 1.3 kg
1 pce. 0.0.337.34
391
Timing Belt Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 is suitable for

reversing and driving Timing Belt R25 T10 for linear
Reverse Units 8 units of Profile 8. The emergence dimension of the
80 R25 Timing Belt is 80 m or 40 mm.
To protect the Timing Belt against damage, the profiles
must be rounded at the joint to the Timing-Belt
Reverse Unit.
Housings D80 and for accommodating Centring Piece D60.
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 mounted at a profile

height of 40 mm in the groove of Profile 8 using Univer-
sal Fastener 8 and special T-Slot Nut or at a profile
height of 80 mm by splitting the special T-Slot Nut at the
specified break point.
The variation in the emergence dimensions from 80 mm

to 40 mm is achieved by internal rerouting of the Timing
Belt.
The Timing Belt is routed with its smooth reverse side
over the reversing pulleys.

Frictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of the
Timing Belt:
(Emergence dim. 40) MR = 1.05 Nm
180° reversal (emergence dim. 40) : 360 mm
zinc-plated
2 special T-Slot Nuts GS M8
m = 3.3 kg
1 pce. 0.0.366.02
392
Hub geometry VK32 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK32
Timing Belt:
zinc-plated
m = 3.2 kg
1 pce. 0.0.366.11

Hub length 29 mm
Timing Belt:
(Emergence dim. 40) MR = 1,05 Nm
(Emergence dim. 80) MR = 0,55 Nm
zinc-plated
m = 3.3 kg
1 pce. 0.0.366.07
393
Timing-Belt Reverse Units Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II is a particularly

compact Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for driving Timing
8 80 R50 II Belt R50 T10. It is fastened to the core bores of Profiles
8 (cross-sections of 80x80 and above).
The timing pulley of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50
II VK32 features a multi-spline hub for accommodating
Multi-Spline Shaft VK32.
The housing allows connection of coupling D80 VK32.
The hub of the version with the bore can be machined to
a maximum diameter of ø 36 mm or diameter ø 30 mm
with key.
Connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II

based on a profile height of 120 mm (return of the Ti-
ming Belt in the profile cavity) or a profile height of 80
mm with Standard-Fastening Sets 8. To do this, the Ti-
ming-Belt Reverse Unit is partially dismantled, secured
to the profile and then refitted.
The emergence dimension of the Timing Belt is 80 mm.
90° reversal of Timing Belt R50 T10.

The opening for the Timing Belt is marked out on the
inside and must be removed from the cap.
If for design reasons the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit is
fitted without a cap, the length of the Timing Belt in the
Reverse Unit reduces by 10 mm.
The profiles must be rounded where they join the

Reverse Unit in order to protect the Timing Belt.
394
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II VK32
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, Al, black
Hub geometry VK32 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK32
Timing Belt: MR = 1.05 Nm
Max. load: MD = 100.00 Nm
Pitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z= 28
m = 3.9 kg
1 pce. 0.0.426.19
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II with Bore

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, Al, black
Hub length 75 mm
Timing Belt: MR = 1.05 Nm
Max. load: MD = 100.00 Nm
m = 4.2 kg
1 pce. 0.0.426.21
395
Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25 is a

supplementary drive element for Timing-Belt Reverse
Unit 8 R25 Units 8 40 R25 and 8 80 R25. It is used to reverse
Timing Belt R25 T10 with an emergence dimension of
40 mm around 2x90°. The Counter-Reverse Unit
relocates the axis drive from the end of the axis to the
carriage. The carriage and drive assembly is then
integrated into the profile construction, while the axis
itself becomes the moving element. This arrangement,
often in the form of a vertical axis, can often partly
increase the travelling speed and useful load.
The unit is already provided with bores for fitting
Proximity Switch 8.
If the Counter-Reverse Unit is used, the Timing-Belt

Tensioner is employed to attach and tension the Timing
Belt on the supporting profile.
Possible connection to Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40

R25 / 80 R25.
Moving support profile with stationary carriage unit

and drive.
Carriages arranged at right angles with central drive.
396
Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25
Counter-Reverse Unit, Al, black
Ball-bearings, for Timing Belt width 25 mm
Timing Belt:
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 MR = 0.30 Nm
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 MR = 0.60 Nm
Timing Belt length in Counter-Reverse Unit: 2x105 mm
m = 770 g
1 pce. 0.0.362.00
Timing-Belt Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 guides

Timing Belt R50 T10 with an emergence dimension of 80
Counter-Reverse mm towards Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II.
Unit 8 80 R50
Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 80 R50

Housing Al, black
2 caps, PA, black
2 ball-bearing reverse rollers, for Timing Belt width 50 mm
Timing Belt:
MR = 0.75 Nm
Timing Belt length in the Counter-Reverse Unit: 2x202 mm
m = 4.7 kg
1 pce. 0.0.362.07
397
Timing Belts Timing Belts are positive driving elements which are
used to perform precise linear movements. Their
features include low noise, low maintenance and low
play. The fact that they are made of polyurethane-
moulded steel wires mean they are also sufficiently
elastic to absorb and dampen impacts.
item Timing Belts are finely stranded, giving them high
flexural strength. They are therefore ideal for use in
Timing-Belt Reverse and Counter-Reverse Units and are
not compatible with standard (commercially available)
Timing Belts.
The overall length of the Timing Belt is calculated from
the length of the supporting profile and the Timing Belt
segments located in the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.
The pre-tensioning should be larger than or equal to the
expected load.
The pre-tensioning and operating load together should
not exceed the maximum permissible load. To set the
calculated pre-tensioning, it is advisable to measure the
elongation during the tensioning process.
Timing Belt No. of teeth h1 h2

p
R10 T5 5 1 mm 2.2 mm
R25 T10 10 2 mm 4.5 mm
R50 T10 10 2 mm 4.5 mm
Timing Belt R10 T5

PUR, black with integrated steel wires
Max. load 300 N
1‰ expansion (1 mm over 1000 mm length)
corresponds to a pre-tensioning of 75 N
m = 23 g/m
Cut-off max. 50 m 0.0.400.04
Timing Belt R25 T10

PUR , black with integrated steel wires
Max. load 2400 N
m = 125 g/m
Cut-off max. 50 m 0.0.337.10
Timing Belt R50 T10

PUR , black with integrated steel wires
Max. load 4200 N
m = 250 g/m
Cut-off max. 50 m 0.0.426.03
398
Timing-Belt Tensioner For fastening and tensioning the Timing Belt on a
sliding carriage or support profile (Line 8 only) using
Counter-Reverse Unit 8.
A Tensioning Block is required for each end of the
Timing Belt.
The number of Fixing Blocks is determined
by the application.
Fastening and tensioning the Timing Belt on a sliding

carriage using Tensioning Blocks and Fixing Block and
the appropriate bolts.
Where high loads are involved, Tensioning Block 8 and
Fixing Block 8 will need to be pinned (dowel ISO 2338-
ø 6 mm). The position of the dowels is indicated by the
prepared bores ø 5.5 mm.
5 R10 8 R25 8 R50

a = hexagon nut DIN985 M3 M6 M6
b = Hexagon Socket Head M3x50 M6x80 M6x100
Cap Screw DIN912
c = Hexagon Socket Head M3x60 M6x100 M6x140
Cap Screw DIN912
5 R10
8 R25
399
Timing-Belt
Tensioners
8 R50
Timing-Belt Tensioner, Tensioning Block 5 R10

Tensioning Block, GD-Al, black
Interlocking fixing piece, GD-Al, black
m = 8.5 g
1 set 0.0.400.07
Timing-Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 5 R10

Fixing Block, GD-Al, black
bright zinc-plated
2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M3, self-locking,
bright zinc-plated
m = 13 g
1 set 0.0.400.06

Tensioning Block, GD-Zn, black
Interlocking fixing piece, GD-Zn, black
m = 136 g
1 set 0.0.337.07
Timing Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 8 R25

Fixing Block, GD-Zn, black
bright zinc-plated
bright zinc-plated
m = 128 g
1 set 0.0.337.09

Tensioning Block, Al, black anodized
Interlocking fixing piece, Al, black anodized
m = 205 g
1 set 0.0.426.04
Timing-Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 8 R50

Fixing Block Al, black anodized
bright zinc-plated
m = 119 g
1 set 0.0.426.05
400
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.2 Chain Drives
8.2.2 Chain Drives The chain drive is ideal for a whole range of
mechanical drives. The compact design of the drive
elements is a particular feature. The fact that the chain
runs in the groove of the Profile 8 throughout means
that the drive force can be transmitted with complete
protection and reliability.
Possible applications for chain drives in the MB

Building Kit System include:
> as a traction device for linear axis slides (chain drive)
> as a roller conveyor drive (chain-driven conveyor
rollers, see also section 6.4, Chain Driven Conveyor
Rollers)
> as a transfer medium for workpiece carriers and
products located directly on the chain (chain transfer)
An item chain drive essentially consists of the following

components:
> Chain ½“
> Chain Link (removable)
> 2 Chain Reverse Units
> Chain Guide Profile 8
> Chain Counter-Reverse Unit, an optional device which
allows the motor to be mounted at any desired position
(if drive is not possible directly at the Chain Reverse Unit)
Profiles 8 in either light or standard grade with a section
dimension of 80 mm provide ideal frames for chain
drives, particularly Stand Profile 8 80x40 K60 with
integrated cable conduit.
Chain Guidance in the The chain is guided in the profile groove. It can be
accessed through the groove and can be used to transfer
Profile Groove drive forces.
No connection elements can be fitted in the profile
grooves where the chain is run.
Innovation
German patent
pending
401
Chain Guidance Chain Guide Profile 8 encloses the Chain. The profile is
inserted into the profile groove.
in the Profile
Groove
The Chain Reverse Units are screw-connected into the

core bores in the end faces of the frame profiles.
The Chain Guide Profile must be cut 50 mm longer than
the aluminium profile, since it must project 25 mm into
the Reverse Unit at each end.
Calculating the chain length:

1. Chain drive with two Chain Reverse Units 8 80:
2. Chain drive with two Chain Reverse Units 8 80 and
one Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 8:
The exact length and precise number of chain links is
arrived at by dividing the calculated chain length by 12.7
mm (= ½“) and rounding up to an even number. One
chain link is then subtracted, such that the cut chain
always has an odd number of links. Overall length of the
chain = cut chain plus removable link.
Note: In view of the fact that the chain stretches under
load during operation, it may be necessary, depending
on the length involved, to use a chain which is shorter
than calculated. This adjustment can be performed at the
installation stage.
Chain ½“
St, nickel-plated
Pitch p = 12.7 mm corresponding to ½“
Operating load = max. 1.400 N
Elongation at 1,400 N = 2.5 - 3 ‰
m = 215 g
Cut-off max. 100 m in 1“ intervals 0.0.465.17
Chain Link ½“ (removable)

St, nickel-plated
m=2g
1 set 0.0.465.39
Chain Guide Profile 8

PA, black
m = 22 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.50
402
Chain Reverse Chain Reverse Units 8 80 are used for reversing and
driving Chain ½“.
Units 8 80 They are screwed into the end faces of Profiles 8 at a
height of 80 mm.
The Chain Reverse Unit incorporates integrated chain

tensioning block and clamp.
It is possible to fit motors and couplings directly to the

Chain Reverse Unit.
The Chain can be driven directly using the Chain
Reverse Units or the Chain Counter-Reverse Unit. The
sprocket wheels on the Chain Reverse Units are
available with multi-spline hub VK14 or with a bore for
individual machining.
Chain Reverse Unit 8 80 VK14

Chain Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembled
Ball-bearing sprocket wheel, z = 16 (z = number of teeth)
One revolution corresponds to 203.2 mm
Hub with multi-spline DIN ISO 14-6x11x14, hub length 30 mm
Tensioning Block, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembled
Fastening screws, St, black
2 caps, PA, black
Chain length in Reverse Unit 236.3 mm
m = 1.1 kg
1 pce. 0.0.463.37
Chain Reverse Unit 8 80 with Bore

Chain Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembled
Ball-bearing sprocket wheel, z = 16 (z = number of teeth)
One revolution corresponds to 203.2 mm
Hub with bore D8, reborable up to max. ø 15 mm,
Hub length 30 mm
Tensioning Block, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembled
2 caps, PA, black
Chain length in Reverse Unit 236.3 mm
m = 1.1 kg
1 pce. 0.0.463.75
403
Chain Counter- The Chain Counter-Reverse Unit provides a means of

moving the drive to any position on the chain guide.
Reverse Unit 8
The Chain can be tensioned by moving the motor and

sliding Adapter Plate Assembly within the Chain
Counter-Reverse Unit.
The Chain Counter-Reverse Unit is screwed directly to

the Support Profile. The Chain Guide Profile must be
interrupted at this point in order to remove the chain
from the profile groove.
Drive motors can be fitted using the Adapter Plate.
The sprocket wheel hub and the Adapter Plate of the
Chain Counter-Reverse Unit must be machined
individually. The sprocket wheel is fitted directly onto
the motor gearbox output shaft which also provides the
necessary bearing arrangement.
Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 8

Housing GK-Al, black, pre-assembled
2 reversing wheels, St, with ball bearings
Drive wheel with centric bore, St, c =16
reborable up to ø 24 mm or ø 20 mm with parallel keyway
to DIN 6885
Adapter Plate with clamping elements, Al, natural
T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-50, St, bright zinc-plated
4 caps, PA, black
Chain length in Counter-Reverse Unit 306.8 mm
m = 3.0 kg
1 pce. 0.0.463.91
404
Chain Drives for A chain guided in the profile groove is a highly compact
design for driving a linear slide. The supporting profile
Linear Slides accommodates both the drive chain and the Shaft-Clamp
Profiles. The carriage is connected to the drive chain in
the groove by means of the Chain Carrier.
Chain Carrier 8 Chain Carrier 8 connects the drive chain and the
carriage of the linear slide.
The connecting block is fastened to the carriage and
the chain pick-up is inserted into the chain. After the
carriage has been mounted onto the slide, the
components are screwed together.
Options for fastening the Chain Carrier.

The connecting block must also be pinned (dowel ISO
2338-ø 6 mm) under high loads. The position of the
dowels is determined by the ø 5.5 mm holes which have
been prepared.
Chain Carrier 8
Connecting block, St, black
Chain pick-up, St, black
2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M6, St, black
m = 300 g
1 set 0.0.463.46
405
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.3 Ball Screw Units
8.2.3 Ball Screw Units Ball Screw Units KGT are suitable for use as a drive
mechanism for linear slides, particularly for low speeds
and short strokes. They feature high precision, high
efficiency, high rigidity of the drive system and low
mechanical wear:
> For use in linear units, conveyors, handling devices,
work bench design and any other fixtures
> Powered by crank handle, hand wheel, AC/DC motors,
stepping motors and hydraulic or pneumatic drive
mechanisms
> Choice of power input end
> Can be combined with any type of guide
> Individual components are replaceable
> Full compatibility with MB Building Kit System products
Suitable for combination with all item linear slides.

The necessary guidance for the yoke must be provided
by the external linear slide.
The driving nut is suspended on gimbals to prevent
strains and allow for slight errors in alignment with the load.
The Ball Screw Unit KGT can be driven from the fixed or
floating bearing end.
The Ball Screw Unit should be so positioned as to
ensure that the main load is a tensile load from the fixed
bearing end (i.e. fixed bearing at the top in a vertical unit).
The maximum stroke velocities of the Ball Screw Unit
depend on the spindle length (see diagram opposite).
Under axial compression, the buckling behaviour of the
spindle must be taken into consideration.
406
The yoke adapter can be matched to the height of the
slide by means of grub screws DIN 913-M5x5.
The position of the connecting thread M8 for securing
the slide can be either central or offset relative to the
slide depending on the position the yoke adapter is used in.
It is important to ensure that the yoke adapter is aligned
to the spindle and profile. The maximum permissible
angular deviation must not be exceeded.
Connection dimensions of the Bearing Blocks at the

floating (L) and fixed (F) bearing ends. Depending on
the drive type selected, the Bearing Blocks and drive
holders may need to be machined.
The hub is reborable up to max. ø 17 mm or
ø 14 mm and insertion of a parallel keyway as per
DIN 6885 T1.
Direct drive connection with Adapter Plate 120x80.

Various drives adaptable using the Adapter Shaft and
Adapter Flange Universal (far left).
Direct connection of Bevel Gear Box WG with Adapter
Plate 80x80. Drives can then be connected with the
Coupling Housings (Section 8.3 Accessories for
Mechanical Drive Elements) to Bevel Gear Box WG
(immediate left).
Direct connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Units 8 40

R25 or 8 80 R25 in connection with Fastening Sets
U40-WG and U80-WG (far left).
Parallel arrangement of Ball Screw Units in connection
with Bevel Gear Boxes (immediate left).
Calculation of Service Life
The service life of the spindle / drive nut combination

can be calculated as a function of the axial load and
drive speed.
407
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.3 Ball Screw Units
Ball Screw Units

KGT
Supporting profile with integrated lip seals, fixed and

floating bearing blocks, specially designed ball-bearing
collet mechanism for holding the spindle, end of stroke
damping, secure yoke, playminimized drive nut suspended
on gimbals, rolled spindle
Greasing: GLEITMO 810,
Lubrication interval: every 400-500 service hours with
lithium-basedball-bearing grease (not general purpose grease)
2
Accelerationmax .= 5 m/s
Stroke lengthmax. = 2762 mm
Thrust loadmax. = 1000 N
Ball Screw Unit KGT 20x5

Pitch p = 5 mm
Stroke velocitymax. = 0.25 m/s
Efficiency of overall unit = 80 %
Backlashmax.(spindle/drivenut) = 0.04 mm
m = 5 kg + H · 0.011 kg/mm
1 set, hub for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 0.0.414.33
1 set, bored and keyed to cust. specif. 0.0.414.51
Ball Screw Unit KGT 20x20
Pitch p = 20 mm
Stroke velocitymax. = 1.00 m/s
Efficiency of overall unit = 85 %
Backlashmax.(spindle/drivenut) = 0.08 mm
m = 5 kg + H · 0.011 kg/mm
1 set, hub for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 0.0.414.32
1 set, bored and keyed to cust. specif. 0.0.414.50
408
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes
8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes Bevel Gear Boxes can be used between a particular drive
mechanism and a linear axis, consisting of a guide and
either a timing-belt drive or a Ball Screw Unit. In this
arrangement, the induced torque is turned through 90°.
In addition to this reversing action, alternative versions
with different kinematics also permit distribution of the
input torque with the choice of direction of rotation of
the output shafts.
Subsequent changeover to other kinematics is also possible.
Bevel Gear Boxes feature high efficiency, have low
backlash gears and low mechanical wear.
> For use in conjunction with linear and rotary units,
conveyors, handling devices, lifting systems and
other fixtures
> Powered by crank handle, hand wheel, AC/DC
motors, stepping motors and hydraulic or pneumatic
drive mechanisms
> Can be combined with timing-belt drives and
Bevel Gear Box between a drive mechanism and a linear axis Ball Screw Units
> Can be connected to any external drive mechanism
> Individual components are replaceable
> Facility for subsequent conversion to other kinematics
> Compact external dimensions
> Full compatibility with MB Building Kit System products
Modular design of Bevel Gear Box with aluminium housing and Bearing Blocks
The diagram opposite is used for calculating the
permissible torques M and speeds n of the Bevel Gear
Boxes. For loads in the continuous rated zone,
continuous operation is permissible.
In the intermittent rated zone, operating times must be
reduced accordingly.
The Bevel Gear Boxes with special kinematics and the

ability to combine several Bevel Gear Boxes allows flexi-
ble positioning of drives and linear units.
The geometry for connecting multi-spline hub to Multi-

Spline Shaft or solid shaft ø 30 mm can be changed by
using Connecting Shaft U-WG or the Adapter Shaft.
409
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes
Bevel Gear
Boxes WG
Box, box lid and Bearing Blocks,

Al, black anodized
Straight-toothed ball-bearing bevel gear pairs, made of
high strength steel with minimal backlash and
wear-resistant surface
Prelubricated, maintenance-free
Gear ratio i = 1:1
Nominal torque Mnom = 10 Nm
Nominal speed nnom = 400 min-1
Nominal power Pnom = 0.419 kW
Torque Mmax. = 28 Nm
Speed nmax. = 1000 min-1
Power Pmax. = 1.173 kW
Service life L = 10,000 h
Play angle amax. = 20 ’
Bevel Gear Box WG 90°

Efficiency = 93 %
m = 2.0 kg
1 pce. 0.0.408.10

Efficiency = 90 %
m = 2.65 kg
1 pce. 0.0.408.20
Bevel Gear Box WG 180° D

Efficiency = 91 %
m = 2.77 kg
1 pce. 0.0.408.25

Efficiency = 87 %
m = 3.40 kg
1 pce. 0.0.408.26
Bevel Gear Box WG 360° D

Efficiency = 88 %
m = 3.41 kg
1 pce. 0.0.408.27
410
8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.5 Accessories for Bevel Gear Boxes
8.2.5 Accessories for Bevel These system elements simplify the use of Bevel Gear
Boxes. They enable changes to be made to the
Gear Boxes kinematics and allow modular combination of Bevel
Gear Boxes with other dynamic elements.
Bearing Blocks WG Bearing Blocks for changing or extending the Bevel Gear
Box to other kinematics.
The Bearing Block can be pinned to the gear housing
(dowel DIN 7-4m6x20).
Bearing Block H-WG used as bearing and connection

point when relocating the drive / output point.
Extending the Bevel Gear Box WG 90° by Bearing Block

K-WG to produce a WG 180°.
Bearing Block K-WG gives an output by meshing with
the internal bevel gear.
Conversion of a WG 90° into a WG 180° by means of

Bearing Block H-WG and Synchroniser Shaft WG.
Bearing Block H-WG in combination with Synchroniser
Shaft WG provides a continuous connection with the
opposing bevel gear.
411
Bearing Blocks
WG
Bearing Block K-WG
Al, black
Ball-bearing bevel gear
2 connecting pins
Seal and Sealing Plug
Tightening torque Mmax. = 14 Nm
m = 700 g
1 set 0.0.408.00
Bearing Block H-WG

Al, black
Ball-bearing hollow shaft
2 connecting pins
Seal and Sealing Plug
Tightening torque Mmax. = 14 Nm
m = 630 g
1 set 0.0.408.13
Synchroniser For torque transmission between two Bearing Blocks

(1xK-WG, 1xH-WG).
Shaft WG Sealing Plugs for sealing the Bevel Gear Box.
Grease the Multi-Spline Shaft.
Synchroniser Shaft WG
Multi-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 k
2 Snap Rings W
2 Sealing Plugs NW
m = 85 g
1 pce. 0.0.408.22
412
Fastening Sets Direct attachment of drives and Timing-Belt Reverse
Units 8 40 R25, 8 80 R25 and 8 80 R50 in
for Bevel Gear conjunction with Fastening Sets U40-WG and U80-WG
Boxes or Adapter Plates 120x80 and 80x80. Various drives
adaptable using the Adapter Shaft or the couplings.
Fastening Set U40-WG

Locating profile 80x80x9, Al, black
Centring piece D50-D22
Connecting Shaft U-WG
Circlip N
m = 185 g
set 0.0.408.23
Fastening Set U80-WG

Adapter Plate 120x80
Centring Piece D60-D60
Circlip N
2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x50, St, black
m = 320 g
1 set 0.0.408.24
413
Sealing Plugs Sealing Plug for sealing the Bevel Gear Box to prevent
lubricant emerging.
Axial movement of Sealing Plug NW is prevented by
Snap Ring W14. (Section 8.3 Accessories for
Mechanical Drive Elements)
Sealing Plug N with sealing effect in the bevel gear hub.

Sealing Plug NW with sealing effect in the bevel gear
hub and on the Multi-Spline Shaft.
Sealing Plug N
NBR, black
Hardness 70 Sh A
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.408.17
Sealing Plug NW
NBR, black
Hardness 70 Sh A
m=3g
1 pce. 0.0.408.18
Connecting Connecting Shaft U-WG allows the torque to be

transferred between two multi-spline hubs. Particularly
Shaft suitable for connecting Bevel Gear Boxes and Timing-
Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25. Grease the
Multi-Spline Shaft.
Axial movement is prevented by a Snap Ring W14 fitted

to the Bevel Gear Box and by a Circlip N14 fitted in the
pulley of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25.

Snap Ring W
m = 39 g
1 pce. 0.0.408.21
414
8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.1 Couplings
8.3 Accessories for The accessories for the mechanical drive elements include:
> Couplings, Shafts and Adapter Plates for connecting
Mechanical Drive Elements motors and drive elements
> Limit Switches for integrating the mechanical drive
elements in controllers
8.3.1 Couplings Between the mechanical drive elements (Timing-Belt

Reverse Units, Ball Screw Units, Bevel Gear Boxes) and
the drive, it is possible to use couplings for suppressing
and compensating angular errors and radial or axial offset.
The use of coupling means that a plug-type connection
is possible between the drive and mechanical drive
elements, thereby facilitating assembly and maintenance.
The various output shafts of the gears and / or drives
are easily matched by machining the Coupling Half on
the drive side.
Proven, plug-type Multi-Spline Shafts are used between
the second Coupling Half and the mechanical drive
elements in order to provide a shaft-hub connection.
There is no need to machine the relevant Coupling Half
or the mechanical drive elements.
In addition to the connection of the rotating elements
described above, the casings of the mechanical drive
elements must have a static connection to the drives.
This is achieved by various Coupling Housings which
are adapted in length and diameter to the various
couplings. Universal Coupling Adapter Plates, which
have to be provided with fastening bores and centring
diameters for the relevant drives, enable the drive to be
secured to the Coupling Housing.
The connection dimensions and the permissible torque

range (MD < 8 Nm) make Coupling D30 ideally suited for
use with Ball Screw Units (Ball Screw Units KGT; Cent-
ring Piece D50-D50), Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40
R10 with multi-spline VK 14 (Centring Piece D50-D22)
and (optionally) Bevel Gear Boxes WG (Centring Piece
D50-D50).
The connection dimensions and the permissible torque

range (MD < 50 Nm) make Coupling D55 ideally suited
for use with Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 with
multi-spline VK 14 (Centring Piece D50-D22) and
(optionally) Bevel Gear Boxes WG (Centring Piece D50-
D50; note torque limit 28 Nm!).
Coupling D80 is used with an appropriately sized

Coupling Housing for the purpose of transferring the
high torque (MD = 100 Nm) of Timing-Belt Reverse Units
8 80 R25 and 8 80 R50 II with multi-spline VK 32.
The Coupling Housing has a corresponding Centring
Piece (ø 60 mm) for the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.
415
Possible Combinations The table of options shown below shows the required
components for combining couplings and mechanical
drive elements.
Coupling D30 Coupling D55 Coupling D80
MD < 8 Nm MD < 50 Nm MD = 100 Nm
Ball Screw Units KGT Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGT

Coupling Half D30 VK14
Coupling Insert D30
20x5: MD < 1 Nm Coupling Half D30 D6
20x20: MD < 4 Nm (Machining required)
Coupling Housing 8 D30
Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Uni-
versal 80x80 or 120x120
(Machining required)
2 x Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x16
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGT

5 40 R10 with VK14 Coupling Insert D30
Coupling Half D30 D6
MD < 4 Nm (Machining required)
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WG

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit Connecting Shaft VK32 R25

Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal
120x120 or 160x160
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit Connecting Shaft VK32 R50

8 80 R50 II with VK32 Coupling Insert D80
Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal
120x120 or 160x160
Bevel Gear Box WG Only for MD < 8 Nm (in conjunction Only for MD < 28 Nm:
with Ball Screw Units KGT or Timing-
Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10):
MD < 28 Nm
Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGT Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WG
Coupling Half D30 VK14 Coupling Half D55 VK14
Coupling Insert D30 Coupling Insert D55
Coupling Half D30 D6 Coupling Half D55 D8
(Machining required) (Machining required)
Centring Piece D50-D50 Centring Piece D50-D50
Coupling Housing 8 D30 Coupling Housing 8 D55
Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Uni- Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Uni-
versal 80x80 or 120x120 versal 80x80 or 120x120
(Machining required) (Machining required)
4 x Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x16 4 x Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x16
416
Coupling Halves The Coupling Halves with multi-spline hubs VK14 and
VK32 can be connected with the corresponding
Connecting Shafts or mechanical drive elements without
need for machining.
In the case of Coupling Halves with bores, simple
machining (reboring, parallel keyway, etc.) is required
for matching to the drive output shaft of gearboxes/
motor drives.
Before machining the plain bore and keyway, the slot
must be bridged by means of suitable spacers (washers
etc.) and the tension screw tightened. In principle,
parallel keyways should lie at an angle of 90° relative to
the slot, preferably on the side of the thread for the
tensioning screw.

Al
St, black
Reborable up to max. ø 16 mm
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.69

Al
St, black
m = 22 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.67

Al
m = 132 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.68

Al
m = 130 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.66

Al
St,bright zinc-plated
m = 455 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.86

Al
m = 420 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.65
417
Coupling Inserts The flexible Coupling Inserts designed specifically for

the driven linear slides based on the MB Building Kit
System are used to connect two Coupling Halves in each
case. This takes the form of a plug-type connection and
is used to compensate for angular errors and radial and
axial offset.
In conjunction with Ball Screw Units which are driven
with stepping motors, the flexible couplings make it
possible to decouple the moving masses from spindle
and drive.
The process of inserting the Coupling Insert into the
Coupling Halves can be facilitated by using spray oil.
Coupling Insert D30

PU, hardness 80 Sh A, blue
Torque range: MD < 8 Nm
Elasticitydyn. = 0.952 °/ Nm
Elasticitystat. = 3.0 °/ Nm
Perm. offsetaxial = 1.00 mm
Perm. offsetradial = 0.21 mm
Perm. offsetangle = 1.1 °
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.463.20
Coupling Insert D55

PU, hardness 98 Sh A, red
m = 18 g
1 pce. 0.0.463.19
Coupling Insert D80

PU, hardness 98 Sh A, red
m = 49 g
1 pce. 0.0.463.18
418
Coupling The Coupling Housings provide static connections
between the mechanical drive elements and any selected
Housings drives / motors. On the side of the mechanical drive
elements of the MB Building Kit System, the housings
are provided with appropriate connection geometries
(Coupling Housings 8 D30 and 8 D55: Centring Piece
D50-D22 or D50-D50 required). The Coupling Halves
Universal which need to be machined with the
drive connection geometries can be used for securing
drives / motors.
The coupling housings consist of profiles with Line 8 grooves.
These grooves may be used to give additional support to
the motor/gearbox/coupling assembly (especially with
heavy-duty drives) by using components of the MB
Building Kit System (e.g. profile MW 80x80x8 E etc.).

Profile 8 80x80-45° D60, Al, anodized
Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 ZU40/WG/KGT,
Al, anodized
Coupling end plate D30/D55, Al, anodized
St, black
2 hexagon screws DIN 933-M8x22, St, black
m = 300 g
1 set, black 0.0.463.23

Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 ZU40/WG/KGT,
Al, anodized
Coupling end Plate D30/D55, Al, anodized
St, black
St, black
m = 590 g
1 set, black 0.0.463.22

Coupling Adapter Plate D80 ZU80, Al, anodized
Coupling end Plate D80, Al, anodized
St, black
m = 1480 g
1 set, black 0.0.463.21
419
Coupling Coupling Adapter Plates Universal are designed for

mounting onto the Coupling Housings. Additional
Adapter Plates machining operations, e.g. fastening bores and centring
diameters are required to suit the customer‘s drive /
motor. Two sizes for two different Coupling Housings
allow different drives with different flange geometries
to be joined.
The fastening screws for connecting the Coupling
Adapter Plates Universal to the corresponding Coupling
Housings are included in the scope of delivery of the
Coupling Housings.
Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Universal 80x80

Al, anodized
m = 160 g
1 pce., black 0.0.463.10
Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Universal 120x120

Al, anodized
m = 420 g
1 pce., black 0.0.463.11
Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal 120x120

Al, anodized
m = 480 g
1 pce., black 0.0.463.07
Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal 160x160

Al, anodized
m = 960 g
1 pce., black 0.0.463.08
420
Connecting The Connecting Shafts are used to provide a torsionally
rigid connection between the mechanical drive elements
Shafts and the corresponding Coupling Half. The Connecting
Shafts are inserted into the drive elements until they
come up against the Snap Ring. The clampable
Coupling Half is slipped onto the free end of the shaft
and clamped in axial direction so that the length of the
coupling agrees with the length of the Coupling Housing
and the Coupling Inserts are not under any axial load.
The part of the spline which locates in other MB drive
elements should be greased prior to assembly.
Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGT

Snap ring W14
m = 44 g
1 pce. 0.0.463.17
Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WG

Snap Ring W14
m = 73 g
1 pce. 0.0.463.15
Connecting Shaft VK32 R25

Snap Ring W32
m = 470 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.93
Connecting Shaft VK32 R50

Snap Ring W32
m = 680 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.92
421
8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.2 Miscellaneous
8.3.2
Miscellaneous
Multi-Spline The Multi-Spline Shaft is used to provide a torsionally

rigid connection between drive elements and multi-spline
Shaft hubs. The plug-type connection must be lubricated with
multi-purpose grease or similar suitable lubricant.
Suitable for use in combination with Timing-Belt

Reverse Units for generating synchronous movements
up to a distance "a".
Multi-Spline Shaft VK14

Multi-Spline Shaft similar to DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 k
Polar resistance moment: Wt = 261 mm3
a = 500 mm
m = 916 g/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.337.05
Multi-Spline Shaft VK32

Multi-Spline Shaft similar to DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, St, C 45 k
Polar resistance moment: Wt = 3450 mm3
a = 1000 mm
m = 5 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.337.63
422
Snap Rings Snap Ring for axially securing sections of Multi-Spline
a b Shafts which can be used e.g. as Connecting or
[mm] [mm] Synchroniser Shafts between mechanical drive elements
and couplings etc.
W14 1,3 +0.1 13,5 -0.1
W32 1,6 +0.1 30,8 -0.2
Snap Ring W14

Spring steel, phosphatised
m = 5 g/10
10 pce. 0.0.408.31
Snap Ring W32

Spring steel, phosphatised
m = 34 g/10
10 pce. 0.0.463.13
Circlip For limiting the axial movement of Multi-Spline Shafts

in the multi-spline hub DIN ISO14-6x11x14.
Axial fixing of Multi-Spline Shafts or Connecting Shaft
U-WG by means of Circlip N in the groove of the pulley
of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25.
Circlip N14
Circlip DIN 472-11x1, spring steel, phosphatised
m = 3 g/10
10 pce. 8.0.000.46
423
Adapter Plates Adapter Plates for universal connection between drives,

Bevel Gear Boxes, Reverse Units and profiles.
Functions of the mounting holes and threads:
> 2 x holes for M8 (a) for securing Timing-Belt Reverse
d Unit 8 80 R25 or 2 Adapter Plates
> 4 x holes for Countersunk Screw M8 (b) for the central
profile bores
> 4 x countersinks ø 11. 6 deep (c) for Button-Head
Screws ISO 7380-M6x16 for connecting Timing-Belt
Reverse Unit 8 40 R25, bearing profile 8 80x80 or
Bevel Gear Boxes
> Holder (d) for Centring Pieces
> 4 x holes for M6 or 4 x thread M6 (e) for connecting
the Adapter Plates to each other or for connection to
profiles (Automatic Fastener)
Attachment of drives (possibly with Adapter Flange Uni-

versal) and Timing-Belt Reverse Units to the Bevel Gear
Boxes with Adapter Plates.
Where space is restricted, hexagon screws DIN 931-M8
can be used.
Possibilities for butt fastenings with Adapter Plates and

Automatic Fasteners.
Adapter Plate 80x80

Al, anodized
m = 91 g
1 pce., black 0.0.408.16
Adapter Plate 120x80

Al, anodized
m = 164 g
1 pce., black 0.0.408.06
424
Centring Pieces Centring Pieces for locating mechanical drive
elements in the corresponding centring bores of the
Adapter Plates, Coupling Adapter Plates etc.
Example:
> Centring Piece D50-D50
Adapter Plate 80x80 -> Bevel Gear Box or Ball Screw Unit
Adapter Plate 120x80 -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80
R25 or Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II
Bevel Gear Box -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25
or Coupling Housing 8 D55 -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit
8 40 R25
Adapter Plate 120x80 -> Bevel Gear Box or Ball Screw Unit

St, black
m = 21 g
1 pce. 0.0.408.12

St, black
m = 48 g
1 pce. 0.0.408.11

St, black
m = 26.9 g
1 pce. 0.0.379.17

St, black
m = 46.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.379.18
425
Adapter Flange For adapting any desired drives to the Timing-Belt

Reverse Units, Bevel Gear Boxes and Ball Screw Units
without use of couplings. The Adapter Flange Universal
can be machined to suit the connection geometry (hole
pattern, centring) of the drive.
The part of the Adapter Flange extending beyond the
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit may require an appropriate
shortening of the Shaft or Shaft-Clamp Profile.
For connecting any drives to the Ball Screw Units, the

Bevel Gear Box or to profiles using the Adapter Shaft,
the Adapter Plate 120x80 and the Adapter Flange Universal.
Adapter Flange Universal

Al, anodized
m = 635 g
1 pce., black 0.0.337.32
426
Adapter Shaft For a torsionally rigid connection of any desired drive
shafts to the Timing-Belt Reverse Units, Bevel Gear
Boxes and Ball Screw Units. Suitable in combination
with Timing-Belt Reverse Units and an appropriate shaft
/ hollow shaft (or other shaft-hub connections such as
locking rings etc.) for generating synchronous
movement over a distance of more than 500 mm.
The splined connection must be lubricated with a multi-
purpose grease or similar suitable lubricant.
The Adapter Shaft only uses half the hub width of

timing pulleys R25 for transferring the torque.
With alternating loads, it is necessary to reduce the
torque values of the Timing-Belt Reverse Units with
Adapter Shafts.
Adapter Shaft VK14

St, black, surface-hardened
m = 275 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.25
427
Synchronising The Synchronising Shaft Profiles are used to construct

synchronising shafts using Multi-Spline Shaft sections
Shaft Profiles VK14 or VK32.
The synchronising shafts can be used to connect and
thus to synchronise dynamic elements such as Timing-
Belt Reverse Units, Ball Screw Units and couplings etc.
By using Multi-Spline Shaft sections which are
correspondingly longer, it is possible to transfer the
permissible torque of the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.
The mounting holes for the tensioning screws are drilled

perpendicular to the profile's centre axis along the
marking grooves.
The tensioning screws are tightened through the
mounting holes drilled earlier.
The clamping set contains all parts required for

fastening the Multi-Spline Shaft sections to both ends of
a Synchronising Shaft Profile.
Use of a synchronising shaft for connecting two Timing-

Belt Reverse Units.
The length of a Multi-Spline Shaft section depends on
the minimum penetration depth (d), the construction
sizes of the connected dynamic elements and the gap
between the rotating and fixed parts.
Synchronising Shaft Profile

VK14 VK32
a ø 8 mm ø 10 mm
b 10 mm 15 mm
c 20 mm 30 mm
d min. 40 mm min. 60 mm
Synchronising Shaft Profile VK14

Al, anodized
A = 4.77 cm2 Ix = 7.17 cm4 Iy = 6.68 cm4
m = 1.29 kg/m IT =10.63 cm3
428
Clamping Set for Synchronising Shaft Profile VK14
8 standard connecting plates 5, St, bright zinc-plated
4 T-Slot Nuts 6 St 2xM5-40, bright zinc-plated
8 screws M5x20, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 88 g
1 set 0.0.463.72
Synchronising Shaft Profile VK32

Al, anodized
A =11.62 cm2 Ix = 47.42 cm4 Iy = 45.09 cm4
m = 3.13 kg/m It = 69.95 cm3
Clamping Set for Synchronising Shaft Profile VK32

8 standard connecting plates 6, St, bright zinc-plated
4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St 2xM6-60, bright zinc-plated
8 screws M6x25, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 196 g
1 set 0.0.463.30
Proximity Proximity Switch for integration in the grooves of Profi-

les 8 for limiting the terminal position or as reference on
Switches linear units.
The Proximity Switch can be retrofitted at any point in
the groove and can be secured in position from above.
Proximity Switch 8
Inductive Proximity Switch, positive switching
Casing Al, natural anodized
Fixing mechanism, fixing screws
Voltage = 10…30 V DC
Switching currentmax = 150 mA
Sensing range = 2 mm
Cable, black l=3m d = 3 mm
m = 51 g
1 pce. 0.3.001.30
429
Proximity Switches Proximity Switch M8 is a versatile device for limiting

the terminal position or for reference on linear units with
timing-belt drives. It is available with a permanent or
plug-in connecting cable.
The cam reaching the Proximity Switch signals the
electrical terminal position and/or the reference point of
the unit on the Timing Belt.
The Proximity-Switch Fastening Set is used to

position and attach inductive Proximity Switches M8 on
the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.
Possible arrangement of Proximity Switches 8 and

Proximity-Switch Cams 8:
The Proximity-Switch Cams do not run through the
Timing-Belt Reverse Units.
Possible arrangement of Proximity Switches 8 and

Proximity-Switch Cams 8:
The Proximity-Switch Cams run through the Timing-Belt
Reverse Units.
Particularly suitable when used with the drive end Ti-
ming Belt Reverse Unit for simplifying cable routing
between the drive unit, Proximity Switch and motor
control unit.
When using Proximity-Switch Cams 8 with reversing on

the flat side (Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25/
Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 with emergence 40
mm), these must not pass through the Timing-Belt
Reverse Units. In this case, Proximity Switches 8 and
Proximity-Switch Cams 8 must be positioned to prevent
this from happening.
Proximity-Switch Cam 8 is pressed into the Timing Belt

at the required positions from the flat side.
Options for fastening Proximity Switches 8 in
conjunction with the Proximity-Switch Fastening Set.
Depending on the application, the Proximity-Switch
Fastening Set must be shortened accordingly.
Proximity Switch 8 is particularly suitable in conjunction
with Timing-Belt Reverse Units 8 or Timing-Belt
Counter-Reverse Unit 8, Proximity-Switch Fastening Set
8 and Proximity-Switch Cams 8. Timing-Belt Reverse
Units 8 are provided with openings for the Proximity
Switch at appropriate points in order to ensure compact
installation.
Proximity-Switch Connecting Cable 8 in plug-in design
with integrated LEDs for displaying the switch function
and operating voltage.
430
Proximity Switch M8
St, stainless
Inductive Proximity Switch, positive switching,
suitable for installation in thread M8x1
Voltage = 10...30 V DC
Max. switching current = 200 mA
Sensing range = 1.5 mm
LED control display
Connecting cable, black l=3m d = 3.5 mm
m = 54 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.14
Proximity Switch M8, Plug Connection

St, stainless
Inductive Proximity Switch, positive switching,
suitable for installation in thread M8x1
Voltage = 10...30 V DC
Max. switching current = 200 mA
Sensing range = 1.5 mm
LED control display
Connecting cable, black l=3m d = 3.5 mm
m = 16 g
1 pce. 0.3.001.24
Proximity-Switch Connecting Cable

Outer sheath PUR, black
Connecting cable l=5m d = 4.0 mm
Structure LifY11Y, 3x0.25 mm2
Plug: integrated 3-pole plug
with metal collar M8x1
Cable inlet angled by 90°
LED control display:
Green = Operating display
Yellow/orange = Switch function display
m = 144 g
1 pce. 0.3.001.25
Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 8

1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380, M8x10,
m = 37 g
1 set 0.0.337.31
Proximity-Switch Cam 8
St, black
m = 0.2 g
1 pce. 0.0.337.15
431
432
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.1 Design and Ordering Software
The Auxiliary Elements product group comprises

9. Auxiliary Elements > Special software for facilitating the design process and
working with the MB Building Kit System
> Jigs and tools for cost-effective installation of
components
> A broad spectrum of services to support the user in
his work - from profile processing to complete solutions
9.1 Design and Ordering The MB Quick&Easy modular software package is

designed to assist users of the MB Building Kit System
Software with everything from project planning and the design
phase to project implementation.
MB for AutoCAD®, the core module of the MB Quick&Easy
software package, is a 2D and 3D design environment
for using the MB Building Kit System in the context of
AutoCAD® with parts list generator.
The program enables the user to create design drawings
on the screen, based on components from the
MB Building Kit System, and to compile the associated
parts lists.
All 3D components can be automatically incorporated
into the parts list; they can be either transferred
onto the drawing or included in the parts lists and
ordering program. By integrating the package into the
AutoCAD® CAD software, simply pressing a key allows
a user to access the program from the standard menu
and then to close it again.
MB for AutoCAD® CAD software
The self-explanatory graphical user interface, windows
technology and pop-up menus ensure maximum ease of
handling and rapid familiarisation. The package can be
installed in networks. Customisation is possible.
Other modules in the MB Quick&Easy software package:
> The PARTviewer provides a rapid overview of the item
product range. All parts can be displayed in 2D and
exported in DXF format. A search engine facilitates
location of parts using keywords or catalogue numbers.
> MB 2D and 3D Parts Library in DWG, DXF and IGES
format for the most frequently used CAD systems
> The parts list and ordering program for generating the
associated tables on the basis of the item Product Ma-
ster Guide; Product Master Guide files in ASCII, EBCDIC
and TXT formats are supplied and can be transferred to
other programs.
433
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.1 Design and Ordering Software
MB Quick&Easy
MB Quick&Easy CD international
1. MB for AutoCAD®
> 2D and 3D Parts Library
> Automatic Parts List Generator
Installation requirements:
AutoCAD® Version 13 or later
WINDOWS ´95 / ´98 / NT / 2000
Hard disk with approx. 145 MB free space
2. Parts List and Ordering Program
> Program for generating parts lists and order lists
> Product Master Guide files in the following formats: ASCII,
EBCDIC, TXT on CD
WINDOWS ’95 / ’98 / NT/ 2000 or system with
DOS emulation
3. PARTviewer
> 2D preview of products
> DXF export
> Search engine (keywords / catalogue numbers)
CAD system with appropriate interface
WINDOWS ’95 / ’98 / NT / 2000
4. MB Parts Catalogue
> 2D and 3D Parts Library for CAD systems in the
following formats: DWG, DXF, IGES
CAD system with appropriate interface
WINDOWS ´95 / ´98 / NT / 2000 or system with
DOS emulation
1 pce. 0.5.000.67
434
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Fasteners for Basic Elements
9.2 Jigs and Tools Special jigs and tools for processing elements of the Special tools are available for installing Shaft-Clamp
MB Building Kit System. Profiles and Bearing Units.
The necessary holes and threads for the fasteners used General tools (keys) make working with fasteners easier.
for basic, fastening and dynamic elements can be made
particularly easily and cost-effectively using drilling jigs
and other tools.
9.2.1 Fasteners Drilling Jigs for precisely positioned machining of

profiles with the required through holes for Standard
for Basic Ele- Connection, or stepped bores for Universal Connection,
ments with either hand-held or pillar drills.
Drilling Jig 8 ensures easy machining on a pillar drill.
Drilling Jigs and
Step Drills
Drilling Jig 5
St, black
Drill bushes, St, hardened and polished
Slewable longitudinal limit stop
Clamp attachment on the profile
Depth limit stop for the Step Drill
m = 390 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.19
Step Drill, Universal Connection 5

High-performance, high-speed steel, nitrided
Shaft: ø 12 mm
m = 80 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.35
Drilling Jig 6
St, black
m = 832 g
1 pce. 0.0.434.25
435
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Fastenings for Basic Elements
Drilling Jigs and

Step Drills
Shaft: ø 13 mm
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.19
Drilling Jig 8, small, Standard Connection 8

St, black
m = 420 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.09
Drilling Jig 8, large, Standard Connection 8

St, black
m = 810 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.19
Drilling Jig 8
Base plate, plastic, green
Profile, Al, natural anodized
Drill bush, St, hardened and polished
Slewable stop
Profile-guide elements
m = 2.35 kg
1 pce. 0.0.026.91

Shaft: MK 2
m = 260 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.90
Step Drill, Universal Connection 8 D13

Shaft: ø 13
m = 240 g
1 pce. 0.0.465.90
436
Drilling Unit The Drilling Unit is a profile machining jig. It is secured
directly to the profile being machined and is therefore
particularly easy to use on existing profile constructions.
The profile Drilling Unit can be used to drill through
holes for Standard Connections, tap the profile ends for
Standard Connections and produce stepped bores for
Universal Connections in Profiles 5, 6 and 8.
A special adapter set is required for each Line. In
addition, the profiles can also be drilled for various
other applications.
The Drilling Unit can be operated with a commercially
available drilling machine with European mount (ø
43mm). A machine with electronic speed control, R/L
operation and 2-speed gearing is recommended.
The Drilling Stand is attached with ease to the profile
grooves by means of a clamp attachment with eccentric
clamping lever.
The drill is advanced by means of a hand wheel.
A compression spring is fitted to facilitate the return
stroke. The drilling depth can be limited by means of an
adjustable depth limit stop.
To tap into the profile core bores, an Angle Bracket is
secured to the Adapter Plate which is used to arrange
the Drilling Unit on the profile‘s end face.
Drilling Unit, Drilling Stand

St, black
m = 3.0 kg
1 pce. 0.0.465.88
Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Set 5

Adapter Plate, St, black
Angle Bracket, St, black
Step Drill, Universal Connection 5, high-performance, high-speed
steel, nitrided
Drill ø 4.3 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speed steel
m = 1.2 kg
1 set 0.0.464.30
437
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.2 Connections for Fastening Elements
Drilling Unit

Step Drill, Universal Connection 6, high-performance,
high-speed steel, nitrided
Drill ø 5.5 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speed steel
m = 1.3 kg
1 set 0.0.459.33

Step Drill, Universal Connection 8, high-performance,
high-speed steel, nitrided
Drill ø 7 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speed
m = 1.3 kg
1 set 0.0.465.89
9.2.2 Drilling Jigs for precisely positioned machining

(stepped bores) for 90° connection of Clamp Profiles 6
Connections for 30x30 and 8 40x40.
Fastening Ele-
ments
Drilling Jigs and
Step Drills
438
Drilling Jig 6, Clamp Profile 6 30x30
St, black
m = 388 g
1 set 0.0.434.23
Step Drill, Clamp Profile 6 30x30

Shaft: ø 11 mm
m = 63 g
1 pce. 0.0.431.20
Drilling Jig 8, Clamp Profile 8 40x40

St, black
m = 880 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.22
Step Drill, Clamp Profile 8 40x40

Shaft: ø 15 mm
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.21
439
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.3 Connections for Dynamic Elements
9.2.3 For precisely positioned drilling of fixing bores in

shafts, Shaft-Clamp Profiles and Support Profiles for
Connections for Roller Guides 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.
Dynamic A carbide-tipped drill must be used for drilling in
Elements hardened shafts.
Combination
Drilling Jigs
Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D10

St, black
Clamp lever
m = 715 g
1 pce. 0.0.444.68

St, black
Clamp attachment
m = 780 g
1 pce. 0.0.373.55

St, black
Clamping lever
m = 1.43 kg
1 pce. 0.0.373.15
440
Mounting Aid For press-fitting guiding shafts into Shaft-Clamp Profi-
les 5 D6, 8 D6, 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25 using a suitable
round steel bar as a lever.
Mounting Aid for Shaft D6/D14/D25

St, black
m = 270 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.38
Pin Spanners For tightening lock nuts in the Bearing Units of Roller
Guides 5 D6, 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.
Pin Spanner 5 D6, 8 D10

St, black
m = 40 g
1 pce. 0.0.390.13
441
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.4 General Tools
Pin Spanners
Pin Spanner 8 D14

St, black
m = 90 g
1 pce. 0.0.294.41
Pin Spanner 8 D25

St, black
m = 430 g
1 pce. 0.0.350.30
9.2.4 General Ball-Headed Keys are particularly suitable for initial

tightening and for screws which are difficult to reach
Tools (tightening angles up to 25°).
Keys Keys with T-Handle and L-Keys are suitable for the
maximum tightening torques of the various screws.
L-Keys are particularly suitable for tightening the
screws of Universal Connections.
Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, nickel-plated

Handle, PA-GF, black
Ball-Headed Key 3 A/F

a = 190 mm b = 100 mm c = 3 A/F
m = 20 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.58

a = 195 mm b = 100 mm c = 4 A/F
m = 30 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.60

a = 200 mm b = 100 mm c = 5 A/F
m = 50 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.54
442
a = 230 mm b = 125 mm c = 6 A/F
m = 80 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.61

Key with T-Handle 3 A/F

a = 168 mm b = 150 mm c = 3 A/F
m = 15 g
1 pce. 0.0.370.59

a = 175 mm b = 150 mm c = 4 A/F
m = 50 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.39

a = 232 mm b = 200 mm c = 5 A/F
m = 70 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.29

a = 232 mm b = 200 mm c = 6 A/F
m = 85 g
1 pce. 0.0.406.38
L-Key 3 A/F
a = 93 mm b = 66 mm c = 3 A/F
m=9g
1 pce. 0.0.440.73
L-Key 4 A/F
a = 109 mm b = 74 mm c = 4 A/F
m = 19 g
1 pce. 0.0.440.74
L-Key 5 A/F
a = 125 mm b = 85 mm c = 5 A/F
m = 34 g
1 pce. 0.0.026.89
443
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.4 General Tools
Multi-Purpose Pliers for cutting Cover Profiles or similar elements

made from rubber, leather, plastic, wood or aluminium.
Pliers
Multi-Purpose Pliers
Scissor body, sheet steel, bright nickel-plated
Blade, special steel
Anvil, light steel
Handle, plastic-coated, non-slip design
m = 300 g
1 pce. 0.0.265.63
444
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services
9.3 Services Local customer service centres provide support to > Tools, jigs and machines
the user in the form of a wide range of services: > Customer application software
> Faster delivery of all system elements > User support in resolving special problems
> Ready-for-assembly processing on the most modern > Internal or external training in planning, design
automatic machinery and production
> Provision of building kits > CAD-assisted project planning, preparation of
> Turnkey solutions using system elements quotations and tenders and design of plant
> Complete assembly and initial operation and fixtures
Design Example
Parts List Qty. Designation Order No. Qty. Designation Order No.
14 Cap 8 160x28 0.0.026.80 14 Proximity-Switch Cams 0.0.337.15

14 Cap 8 40x40 0.0.026.01 7 Timing-Belt Tensioner
14 Cap 8 80x16 0.0.265.98 Fixing Block 8 R25 0.0.337.09
6 Cap 8 80x80 0.0.026.37 28 T-Slot Nut 8 St M8 0.0.026.18
14 End Cap & Lubric. System 8 D14 0.0.294.46 28 Washer DIN 125-A8 8.0.000.51
8 Adapter Shaft VK 14 0.0.337.25 14 Timing-Belt Tensioner
2 Profile 8 160x28 200 mm 0.0.026.85 Tensioning Block 8 R25 0.0.337.07
2 Profile 8 160x28 270 mm 0.0.026.85 6 Knuckle Foot D80, M16x100 0.0.265.29
1 Profile 8 160x28 500 mm 0.0.026.85 6 Base Plate/Transp. Plate 8 80x80,M16 0.0.406.23
2 Profile 8 160x28 562 mm 0.0.026.85 52 Button-Head Screw M8x18 0.0.196.72
1 Profile 8 40x40 80 mm 0.0.026.03 26 Universal-Fastening Set 8 0.0.026.92
2 Profile 8 80x40 516 mm 0.0.026.04 132 Standard-Fastening Set 8 0.0.026.07
4 Profile 8 80x80 516 mm 0.0.026.27 1 Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 1300 mm 0.0.337.05
6 Profile 8 80x80 944 mm 0.0.026.27 4 Shaft D14 944 mm 0.0.294.01
6 Profile 8 80x80 1440 mm 0.0.026.27 4 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D14944 mm 0.0.294.34
6 Profile 8 80x80 1525 mm 0.0.026.27 4 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141220 mm 0.0.294.34
7 Double-Bearing Unit 8 14e 0.0.294.28 2 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141280 mm 0.0.294.34
7 Double-Bearing Unit 8 14z 0.0.294.26 2 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141292 mm 0.0.294.34
14 Limit Stop 8 0.0.337.11 15 Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25
7 Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 8 0.0.337.31 with multi-spline 0.0.337.26
445
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.1 Saw Cuts / 9.3.2 Connection Processing
9.3.1 Saw Cuts Square and burr-minimised saw cuts, bores and
threads (tolerances to DIN ISO 2768 - mK).
The saw cut required for the cut-off is specified
individually for each profile in the price list.
Saw Cut for Small Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.026.30
Saw Cut for Medium Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.026.66
Saw Cut for Large Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.265.55
9.3.2 Profile processing for Standard or Universal

Connections. The position of the bores and threads must
Connection be specified when ordering.
Processing
Connection
Processing, End
Face
Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M5x12

(Thread for Standard Connection 5)
1 pce. 0.0.370.45

1 pce. 0.0.419.15

1 pce. 0.0.026.95
446
Connection
Processing,
Drilled Hole
Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D4.3

(Access hole for tool when processing a
Standard Connection 5)
1 pce. 0.0.370.51

1 pce. 0.0.419.16
Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D7

1 pce. 0.0.026.96
Connection
Processing,
Stepped Bore
Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D12x8.5

(Stepped bore for Universal Fastener 5)
1 pce. 0.0.370.55
Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D16x12.7

1 pce. 0.0.419.75
447
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.2 Connection Processing
Connection
Processing,
Stepped Bore Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D20x16
1 pce. 0.0.026.97
Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D20x5

(Stepped bore for Pneumatic-Universal Fastener 8)
1 pce. 0.0.373.17
Connection Profile processing for interconnecting Clamp

Profiles. The position of the holes must be specified
Processing for when ordering.
Clamp Profiles

(Thread for the bolt of the Line 8 Clamp-Profile Connection,
Clamp Profile 8 32x18)
1 pce. 0.0.404.13

(Stepped bore for the bolt of the Line 6 Clamp-Profile Connection,
1 pce. 0.0.431.17

(Stepped bore for the bolt of the Line 8 Clamp-Profile Connection,
1 pce. 0.0.196.67
448
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.3 Counter Boring and Tapping
9.3.3 Counter Machining a larger core bore in profiles, e.g. for Knuckle
Feet. Specify the depth and position of the core bore for
Boring and the thread when ordering.
Tapping

1 pce. 0.0.391.18

1 pce. 0.2.000.93

1 pce. 0.0.026.98
Connection Processing, End Face, Counter Boring

and Tapping M10x45
1 pce. 0.0.026.99
449
9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.4 Processing Shafts
9.3.4 Square, burr-minimised saw cut for all Shafts and

Multi-Spline Shafts and the guide rails of linear guide
Processing systems.
Shafts
Saw Cuts for
Shafts and Rails
Saw Cut for Shafts

1 pce. 0.0.294.06
Saw Cut for Guide Rails

1 pce. 0.2.000.96
Fixing Bore for Square and precisely positioned fixing bore for the
shafts of Roller Guides 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.
Shafts Specify the position of the bore when ordering.
Fixing Bore for Shafts D10/D14/D25

1 pce. 0.0.294.32
450
451
General Information Alphabetical Register
Alphabetical Register
A Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded 140 Adapter, Socket / Plug (for Light Fitting 55W) 291
Accessories for Bevel Gear Boxes 411 Adjustable Ball Foot 145
Accessories for Conduits 316 Adjustable Feet 143
Accessories for Floor Elements 153 Aluminium profiles -> Profiles 49
Accessories for Linear Slides 382 Angle Bracket Caps (for Angle Bracket Zn) 112
Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 415 Angle Bracket Zn 112
Accessories for Panel Elements 257 Angle Brackets 177
Accessories for Profiles 89 Angle Clamp Brackets 127
Acrylic Glass 248 Angle Elements 122
Adapter Flange (for motors and drives) 426 Angle Hinge Bracket 127
Adapter Plate Clamping Profile 303 Angled connections 103, 122
Adapter Plate Clamps 302 Angled profiles 86
Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping set 302 Anti-Vibration Insert (for Knuckle Foot) 141
Adapter Plate Profiles 299 Arm Rests 283
Adapter Plates 424 Automatic-Butt-Fastening Sets 130
Adapter Plates (for motors and drives) 299 Automatic-Fastening Sets 110
Adapter Shaft 427 Auxiliary Elements 433
B Ball Bushes 380 Bearing Units (for Roller Guides) 341

Ball Latches 239 Bearing Wiper Set 364
Ball Screw Units 406 Bed Plate Profiles 80
Ball Screw Units KGT 408 Beech Multi-Ply (customised panel dimensions) 256
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Sets 369 Beech Multi-Ply (fixed panel dimensions) 287
Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 371 Belt -> Timing Belts 398
Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes 367 Bevel Gear Boxes 409
Ball-Bush Block Guides 373 Block-End Caps (Ball-Bush Block Guide) 379
Ball-Bush Block Profiles 380 Bolts (for Roller Guides) 348
Ball-Bush Blocks (for Ball-Bush Block Guides) 378 Bores -> Connection Processing 446
Ball-Headed Keys 442 Box -> Electronic Boxes 323
Base Plates 149 Bracket flat 177
Base Plates -> Base Plates / Transport Plates 154 Buffer -> Parabolic Buffers 295
Basic Elements 49 Buffer Strip 297
Bearing Blocks (for Ball-Bush Block Guide) 376 Butt Connections 104, 129
Bearing Blocks WG (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 411 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380 171
Bearing Carriages 364 Button-Head Screws T4 (for plastics) 168
Bearing Set (for Conveyor Rollers) 273
C Cable Conduits -> Conduits 305 Captive Nuts 132, 194

Cable Ties 326 Castor PA 224
CAD Software -> MB Quick&Easy 434 Castor Unit 8 PA 225
Calculations (profiles) 52 Castors 150
Caps PA (for Bores/Holes) 101 Castors POM 224
Caps PA (for Cover Profiles Al) 99 Castors, Fixed 150
Caps PA (for Profile End Face) 89, 197 Castors, Swivel 150
Caps Zn (for Profile End Face) 95 Catch -> Security Lock 269
452
C Centring Pieces 425 Connecting Shafts 414, 421
Chain ½“ 402 Connection Processing 446
Chain Carrier 405 Connection Processing for Clamp Profiles 448
Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 404 Connection Processing, Drilled Holes 447
Chain Drives for Linear Slides 405 Connection Processing, End Face 446
Chain Drives 401 Connection Processing, Stepped Bores 447
Chain Guidance in the Profile Groove 401 Connection Profile Braces 133
Chain Guide Profile 402 Connection Profiles 132
Chain Link ½“ (removable) 402 Construction profiles -> Profiles 49
Chain Reverse Units 403 Container Mounting 282
Chain Transfer End Ramp 277 Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven) 275
Chain Transfer Slide Strips 277 Conveyor Rollers 273
Chain Transfer Unit 277 Conveyors 270
Chain-Driven Conveyor Rollers 274 Corrugated Mesh Al 253
Chequer Sheet 251 Corrugated Mesh St 254
Counter Boring and Tapping 449
Circlip 423
Counter-Reverse Unit -> Chain Reverse Unit 403
Clamp Multiblocks 187
Counter-Reverse Unit -> Timing-Belt Counter-
Clamp Profiles (for Panel Elements) 196, 202
Reverse Unit 396
Clamp-Block Caps (for Ball-Bush Block Guides) 372
Countersunk Screw SF 95
Clamping Sets (for Synchronising Shaft Profiles) 429
Countersunk Screws DIN 7991 175
Clamping Springs (for Clamp Profile) 197
Counter-Weight Bottom Plates for cable conduits
Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 204 (for Lifting Doors Guide Set) 223
Clamp-Profile Fastener 199 Coupling Adapter Plates 420
Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 197 Coupling Halves 417
Clamp-Profile Hangers E 200
Coupling Housings 419
Clamp-Profile Hinge E 201
Coupling Inserts 418
Clamp-Profile Strips 199
Couplings 415
Clamp-Profile System E 198
Cover Profile 32 (for Connection Profile 8) 132
Clip 8 St 227
Cover Profile 60 (for Stand Profile) 322
Clip PA (for Double Panel Profile) 191
Cover Profiles Al (for Profile Groove) 96
Combination Drilling Jigs 440
Cover Profiles Al (for profile side face) 98
Compact Lamps 291, 295
Cover Profiles NBR (for profile side face) 100
Compound Material 249
Cover Profiles PP 97, 180
Conduit Edge Profile 318
C-Rail Systems 351
Conduit Profile W80-T40 315
C-Rail, Bearing Sets 356
Conduit Profiles U 306
C-Rail, Bearing Units 354
Conduit-Finishing Profile (for installation conduits) 318
C-Rail, Rail Profile Caps 360
Conduit-Finishing Profiles (for profile groove) ->
C-Rail, Rail Profiles 358
Cover Profiles 96
C-Rail, Slide Profile Caps 361
Conduits 305
C-Rail, Slide Profiles 359
Conduits Caps 286, 316
Cross-Profile Connnections 103, 126
Conduits, fixed sizes 305
Connecting Cable, Socket / Earthed Plug
(for Light Fitting 55W) 291
453
D Design Software 433 Dowels -> Floor-Fastening Sets 153
Direct-Fastening Sets 121, 126 Drawer for Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 285
Door catches 238 Drill -> Step Drill 435
Door locking -> Security Lock 269 Drilling Jig 436
Door Locks 241 Drilling Jigs 435
Door Rabbet 208 Drilling Unit 437
Double Hinges 210 Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Sets 437
Double Panel Profiles 189 Drilling Unit, Drilling Stand 437
Double-Bearing Units 344 Dynamic Elements 331
E Earthing Terminals 259 Enclosure and Guard Systems (examples) 35

Edge Profile 257 Enclosure and Guard Systems (General Information) 16
Electrical Discharge 259 End cap -> Caps 89
Electronic Boxes 323 End Cap and Lubricating Systems 346
Electronic-Box Lids 324 Extension Cable, Socket / Plug (for Light
Electronic-Box Profiles 323 Fitting 55W) 292
F Fastener Caps (for corner connections) 116 Fixed Castors 150

Fasteners 102 Fixing Bore for Shafts 450
Fasteners (for corner connections) 116 Fixing Pin (for Slide Strip) 271
Fasteners for Lines and Switches 326 Flange -> Adapter Flange 426
Fasteners for Panels in Special Profiles 196 Flat profiles 86
Fasteners for Panels in the Groove 182 Floor Elements 137
Fasteners for Panels on the Groove 180 Floor-Fastening Sets 153
Fastening Elements 157 Floor-Fixing Plate 148
Fastening Frame Elements 205 Flush-Mounted Sockets 320
Fastening Screw (for Caps PA) 94 Foot Cap 287
Fastening Sets (for corner connections) 115 Foot Clamps (for Adjustable Feet) 142
Fastening Sets WG (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 413 Foot Plate 144, 147
Fences -> Enclosure and Guard Systems 16
G Gear Boxes -> Bevel Gear Boxes 409 Grip Rail Caps 236
General Accessories 295 Grip Rail Profile 236
General Tools 442 Grip Systems 234
Glass -> Acrylic Glass 248 Grips -> Handles 231
Grab Trays -> Parts Containers 279 Groove cover -> Cover Profiles PP 97
Grip Cover Profiles 237 Groove Profiles 165, 276, 365
Grip End Caps 237
454
H Hand-Grip Elements (for Handles) 235 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws 170
Hand Held Control (for Lifting Columns) 285 Hinge St 212
Handle, light duty 234 Hinges 209
Handles 231 Hinges PA 209
Handles Al 232 Hinges Zn 213
Handles and Locks 231 Hinges, heavy-duty 124
Handles PA 231 Holder for Cables and Hoses 327
Hangers (for Frame Elements) 205 HPL panels -> Plastics 250
Hexagon Nut DIN 934 175
I Impact Buffer 295 Installation Elements 305
J Jigs (for profile processing) 435 Joining Plates 119

Joining Plate Caps 120
K Key with T-Handle 443 Knuckle Feet 137

Keys 442
L Labelling Cards (for Parts Containers) 281 Linear ball bearings -> Ball Bushes 380
Lamp-Control Unit (for Light Fitting 11W) 294 Linear Guide Rails 365
Lamps -> Light Fittings 290 Linear Guide Systems 362
L-Based Feet 145 Linear Slides 331
Lid Profiles (for Installation Conduits) 308 L-Keys 443
Lifting Columns 8 200x170 284 Locating Washers 176
Lifting-Door Guide Set 222 Lock System 6-8 243
Light Fitting Set (for Light Fitting 11W) 294 Locking Systems 240
Light Fittings 290, 292 Locks -> Door Lock / Locking Systems / Locks and
Lighting 290 Catches 238
Limit Stop (for Linear Slides) 384 Locks and Catches 238
Limit-Switch Holder 328 Lubricating Systems -> End Cap and Lubricating
Systems 346
M Magnetic Catches 238 Miscellaneous 422

Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord 385 Modular Conduit System 309
Magnetic Strip Cover Profile 385 Modular Panels 251
Material flow 270 Mounting Aid (for Shafts) 441
MB Quick&Easy 434 Movable Panel Fasteners 209
Mechanical Drive Elements 386 Movable Fasteners 216
Mechanical Engineering (examples) 29 Multiblocks PA 182
Mechanical Engineering Applications (General Multiblocks Zn 184
Information) 14 Multi-Purpose Pliers 444
Mesh Panels 253 Multi-Spline Shafts 422
455
N Nuts 168
O Operating consoles -> Conduits 305 Ordering Software 433
P Panel Clamp (for Panel Elements) 195 Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 262
Panel Elements 247 Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 262
Panel Fasteners 179 Polycarbonate 248
Panel Segments 251 Polycarbonate Protective Panel (for Light
Panel-fixing profiles -> Cover Profiles PP 97 Fitting 55W) 292
Panel-Fixing Strip (for Double Panel Profile) 192 Potential Equaliser 260
Panels 247 Processing -> Connection Processing 446
Panels -> Panel Elements 247 Profile Bars 165
Panels for Work Bench Design 256 Profile Cylinder with Knob 243
Parabolic Buffers 295 Profile Cylinders 245
Parallel-Profile Connnections 104, 132 Profile Edging 86
Parts Container Covers 281 Profile fastening -> Fasteners 102
Parts Container Fasteners 281 Profile TS 35 319
Parts Containers 279 Profiles 49
Perforated Sheet Al 255 Profiles 5 51, 68
Pin Element 135 Profiles 6 56, 72
Pin Spanner 441 Profiles 8 62, 75
Plastics 250 Profiles M (unfinished elements, flat material,
angular profiles) 87
Plexiglass -> Acrylic Glass 248
Profiles with Integrated Conduit 321
Pliers -> Multi-Purpose Pliers 444
Proximity Switches 429
Pneumatic Applications 261
Proximity-Switch Cam 431
Pneumatic Connecting Plates 265
Proximity-Switch Connecting Cable 431
Pneumatic Connectors 266
Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 431
Pneumatic Joining Plates 263
R Rebate Profiles 193 Rollers -> Conveyor Rollers 273

Reverse Unit -> Chain Reverse Unit 403 RS Curved Guide Set 45° 227
Reverse Unit -> Timing-Belt Reverse Units 387 RS End Strip 229
Right-Angled Connections 102, 106 RS Flat Profiles 228
Rigid Panel Fasteners 179 RS Guide Profile 8 227
Roller Conveyor -> Chain-Driven Conveyor Rollers 274 RS Locking System 8 229
Roller Elements (for conveyor applications) 272 RS Slide Strip 227
Roller Guides 331 Rubber buffer -> Impact Buffer 295
Roller Profiles 349 Rubber Inserts (for Knuckle Feet) 140
Roller Shutter System 226 Runner 279
Rollers (for Roller Guides) 347
456
S Saw Cut for Guide Rails 450 Sliding-Door Lock 245
Saw Cut for Shafts 450 Snap Rings 423
Saw Cuts 446 Socket, Spring-Force Connected (for Light
Screw Strips Al 167 Fitting 55W) 291
Screws 168 Sockets -> Flush-Mounted Sockets 320
Sealing Plugs (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 414 Software -> MB Quick&Easy 433
Sealing Profiles 181 Solid panels 249
Sealing Strip 191 Sound-Insulating Material 257
Seals PE (for pneumatic applications) 264 Special Adjustable Feet 143
Secure Connections 104, 135 Special Elements 259
Security Limit Switches 268 Special Fastening Elements 176
Security Lock 269 Socket, Spring-Force Connected (for Light
Fitting 55W) 292
Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981 169
Stand Profile Connection Element 322
Services 445
Stand Profiles 322
Shaft-Clamp Blocks (Ball-Bush Block Guide) 377
Standard-Fastening Sets 106
Shaft-Clamp Profiles 338
Steel bracket -> Angle Bracket 177
Shaft-Clamping Bushes 370
Steel Mesh 254
Shafts 381
Step Drill 435
Sheet Material Al 249
Support Profiles (for installation conduits) 286, 310, 312
Slide Caps (for Ball-Bearing Guide Bush) 372
Swing-Door Lock 245
Slide Clamps 382
Switches -> Proximity Switches 429
Slide Guide Strips 220
Switches -> Security Limit Switches 268
Slide Strip Wedges 271
Swivel, Castors 150
Slide Strips 270
Synchronising Shaft Profiles 428
Slides -> Linear Slides 331
Synchroniser Shaft WG (Bevel Gear Box) 412
Sliding-Door Guide Sets 216
T Table Adapter Set 288 Tools 435

Table top -> Panel Elements 247 Transparent Panels 248
Table top -> Special elements 287 Transport Plates -> Base Plates / Transport Plates 154
Tapping threads 446, 449 T-Slot Nut Profiles 165
Telescope Connection Set 298 T-Slot Nuts 157
Telescope Profile 297 T-Slot Nuts PA 159
Telescope Securing Set 298 T-Slot Nuts St 161
Timing Belts 398 T-Slot Nuts St/PA 161
Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Units 396 T-Slot Nuts Zn 159
Timing-Belt Drives 386 T-Slot Roller 219
Timing-Belt Reverse Units 387 T-Slot Slider 218
Timing-Belt Tensioner 399 Tubes D50 276
U Universal Holder (cables, hoses) 326 Universal-Fastening Sets 108

Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets 129
457
V Vibration Absorber -> Anti-Vibration Insert 141
W Wall Profiles (for installation conduits) 310 Work Bench Systems (Examples) 41
Wells 289 Work Bench Systems (General Information) 18
Work Bench Design 278
458
New Products 04/2001
item Industrietechnik April 2001 Edition
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310
www.item-international.com

Technical modifications and errors reserved. All rights
reserved. Use of texts and illustrations all reprints of any
kind only permitted with our prior written consent. This
also applies for reproduction, translation or use in
electronic systems.
is a registered trademark of
item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH.
New Products 04/2001 Contents Index
Index 4
Contents
1. Basic elements
1.1 Profiles 1.1.2 Profiles 6
Profiles 6 R 5
1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces
Caps 6 6
1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove
Cover Profiles Al 6
1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections
Hinges 5, heavy-duty 7
4. Handles and Locks
4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.2 Locking Systems
Locking Systems 5 and 6 8
6. Special Elements
6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow 6.4.3 Conveyor Rollers
Conveyor Roller TR32 10
6.5 Work Bench Design Lifting Columns 8 200x170 11
Lifting Column Connection Profiles 13
Alphabetic Register 15
4
New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles
Profiles 6 R Profiles 6 R are ideal for constructing angled protective

hoods, racks, tables or other fixtures from Line 6
Closed, Profiles.
Radiused
Outside Surface
Profiles 6 R also offer a simple means of fitting bracing

struts in profile constructions. The length of the strut is
calculated as follows based on the 6 R Profiles used:
Connection at 45°
Profile 2 Profile 6 R30/60-45°

b (a - 45). 2
Connection at 30°

c 2(a - 45)/ 3
d 2(a - 45)/ 3 + 45
A = 3.27 cm2 Ix = 1.95 cm4 Iy = 2.77 cm4
m = 0.88 kg/m Wx = 1.16 cm3 Wy = 1.57 cm3
A = 4.52 cm2 Ix = 5.81 cm4 Iy = 4.15 cm4
m = 1.22 kg/m Wx = 2.42 cm3 Wy = 2.31 cm3
A = 5.28 cm2 Ix = 10.01 cm4 Iy = 6.34 cm4
m = 1.43 kg/m Wx = 3.48 cm3 Wy = 2.86 cm3
A = 8.06 cm2 I = 22.94 cm4
m = 2.17 kg/m W = 7.57 cm3

5
New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles
Caps 6
Radiused
Cap 6 R30/60-30°
a = 30° m = 2.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.39
Cap 6 R30/60-45°
a = 45° m = 3.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.40
Cap 6 R30/60-60°
a = 60° m = 4.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.41
Cap 6 R30/60-90°
a = 90° m = 6.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.459.42
Cover Profile Al Aluminium Cover Profiles cover the profile groove to

ensure easy cleaning and prevent dust entering.
Cover Profile 5 Al
Al, anodized
m = 20 g/m

Cover Profile 6 Al
Al, anodized
m = 30 g/m
6
New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners
Hinges 5, For connecting profiles at various angles up to 180° and

for use as heavy-duty hinges (adjustment range ± 90°).
heavy-duty When used in conjunction with the spacer rings, they
can be used as freely movable hinges. If the spacer rings
are removed, they can be used as rigid angle elements,
e.g. bracing, and can also be pinned.
The Hinges with Clamp Lever can be locked in position

or released. Particularly suitable for adjustable holders,
swivel-type booms for Parts Containers and other
similar equipment.
Calculation of the strut length L:

L= x2 + y2 - 2z
Hinge function
rigid connection movable connection
F1 F2 F1 F2
500 N 200 N 200 N 100 N
Dowel Hex. Socket Nut

Head Cap Screw
a b c d e
2m6x20 7.0 mm M5 M5 3.3 mm

DIN 6325 DIN 912 DIN 557
7
New Products 04/2001 4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches
Hinges 5,
heavy-duty
2 fixing elements, PA-GF, black
2 thread bushes M4, St, bright zinc-plated, black
2 hexagon screws, St, black
m = 39 g
1 pce. 0.0.464.39

2 fixing elements, PA-GF, black
1 thread bush M4, St, bright zinc-plated, black
Bush liner, St, bright zinc-plated, black
m = 81 g
1 pce. 0.0.464.43
Locking As well as the latching function, Locking Systems also

Systems 5 and 6 sliding doors constructed from inherently stable panel
elements.
The Locking Systems 5 and 6 are available for right-
hand and left-hand application (the figure shows right-
handed application).
8
The panel elements will need to be machined (ø 22 mm)
for Locking Systems 5 and 6.
Nab, with two different mounting positions for sliding
and swing doors.

m = 91 g
1 set, right-hand application 0.0.391.16

1 set, left-hand application 0.0.464.50

Double-beard insert
m = 120 g

m = 89 g


Double-beard insert
m = 118 g
9
New Products 04/2001 6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow
Conveyor Roller Multifunctional Conveyor Roller ideal for interlinking

manual working stations where slim diameter rollers are
TR32 an advantage. The ball bearing Conveyor Rollers TR32
are simply pushed on and engage in the Bearing Blocks
which are screw fitted in the groove of Profiles 8. The
distance between the rollers can be selected as a function
of the load. A Conveyor Roller TR32 of any required
length can be customized using a Bearing Set and a Tube
D32. (Please note load specifications in the table below).
F Xmin. Xmax.
Tube D32 Al 100 N 50 mm 600 mm
Tube D32 KU 50 N 50 mm 400 mm
Conveyor Roller TR32, Bearing Set

PA, black
ball-bearing support, sealed
2 bearing flanges
m = 16 g
1 set 0.0.472.08
Conveyor Roller TR32, Bearing Block Set 8

2 bearing blocks, PA, black
2 bearing clamps, PA, black
2 Button-Head Screws T4x18, black
2 T-Slot Nut 8 PA, black
2 washers DIN 433-4.3, St
m = 18 g
1 set 0.0.472.04
Tube D32 Al
Al, anodized
l = 1.50 cm4
W = 0.94 cm3
m = 0.34 kg/m
Tube D32 KU
PVC, black
Temperature range 0 - 60°C
l = 2.00 cm4
W = 1.22 cm3
m = 0.27 kg/m
Cut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.472.25
10
New Products 04/2001 6. Special Elements 6.5 Work Bench Design
Lifting Columns 8 200x170 The Lifting Columns 8 200x170 are designed for
constructing variable height workbenches, and is also
suitable for many different applications where height
adjustment is required in the factory or office. High
capacity roller guides in conjunction with rack and
pinion drive permit rigid constructions using only a
central telescopic column, which have the capacity to
withstand considerable bending moments from any
direction.
All parts of the drive including the power supply are
integrated into the column and protected against dust
ingress.
The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions are

controlled by means of a Hand Held Control, which can
be stored in a special drawer for easy access.
In addition to the motor-driven columns, there is a
manual version available (with cranked handle).
The “electronic”- and “synchro/memory”-columns

feature a soft-start /-stop function.
The “synchro/memory” version has an integrated
electronic control for parallel operation of several Lifting
Columns and a memory function. Up to 9 positions can
be stored and retrieved by the user. The Hand Held
Control of this type includes an LED-display which
shows the current height of the column.
Line 8 profiles grooves on all sides of the outer profile

enable easy integration of the Lifting Column into any
project using elements of the item MB System.
11
Lifting Columns Lifting column basis h stroke s bending

8 200x170 moment
F xL
1000N 515 mm 200 mm 220 Nm

manual
1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

electronic
2000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

electronic
1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nm

synchro/memory
Voltage: 230V~ 50/60 Hz

(Version 120V~ on request)
Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°C
Maximum lifting force: 1000N / 2000N
Lifting speed: 50 mm/s / 30 mm/s
Continuous duty: 15% at rated load
Protection: IP 30
Conformity: CE
Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, manual

Cap, PA, black
Handle, St
m = 14 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.01

Cap, PA, black
Power cord, 2 m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.07

Cap, PA, black
Power cord, 2 m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.05
Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, synchro/memory

Cap, PA, black
Power cord, 2 m
Link cable, 6 m
m = 21 kg
1 pce. 0.0.471.04
Hand Held Control synchro/memory

ABS, black
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.06
Drawer for Hand Held Control

ABS, black
m = 100 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.11
12
Lifting Column Lifting Column Connection Profiles 240x32 and 100x32
are designed for ensuring stable connections to Lifting
Connection Profiles Column 8 270x170. They can be used to create both
base constructions and table top support structures. The
Lifting Column Connection Profiles prevent access to
the functional elements located inside the Lifting
Columns and support the applied lifting forces.
The screw channels already prepared in the lifting

column profiles are used to secure these elements to the
Lifting Column. Each Lifting Column Connection Profile
240x32 is screwed into the end face of the Lifting
Column using four M10 screws (inner profile) or four
M8 screws (outer profile)
a: Lifting Column
Connection Profile 100x32
b: Lifting Column
Connection Profile 240x32
c: Lifting Column
8 200x170
The marking grooves on the underside of Lifting Column

Connection Profile 240x32 ensure easy location of the
through hole for screw connection with Lifting Column
8 200x170.
To screw fit Connection Profiles 100x32, M8 threads
must be drilled into the end faces of the ø 6.8 mm screw
channels of Connection Profiles 240x32.
Lifting Column Connection Profiles 100x32 (a) are used

with Lifting Column Connection Profiles 240x32 (b) to
form a rigid stable base.
Connection Profiles 100x32 require two holes machined
for screw fitting to Connection Profiles 240x32.
13
Lifting Column- The solid rib of the Lifting Column Connection Profiles
is designed for securing adjustable feet. Example
Connection showing use of Knuckle Foot D30 M8x29 AT an Cap 8 D7
Profiles on Connection Profile 100x32.
The Caps are fitted in the Lifting Column Connection

Profiles using Self-Tapping Screws St 4.2x16.
Lifting Column Connection Profile 100x32

A = 16.20 cm2 Ix = 13.31 cm4 Iy = 186.31 cm4
m = 4.37 kg/m Wx = 6.44 cm3 Wy = 30.87 cm3
Lifting Column Connection Profile 240x32

A = 32.94 cm2 Ix = 25.85 cm4 Iy = 1746.20 cm4
m = 8.89 kg/m Wx = 11.96 cm3 Wy = 145.51 cm3
Cap 100x32
PA-GF, black
m = 12 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.17
Cap 240x32
PA-GF, black
m = 30 g
1 pce. 0.0.471.18
14
New Products 04/2001 Alphapetic Register
Alphabetic Register
C Caps 6 (for profile end face) 6
Caps for Lifting Column Connection Profile 14
Conveyor Roller TR32 10
Cover Profile Al (for profile groove) 6
D Drawer for Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 11
H Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 11

Hinge 5, heavy duty 7
L Lifting Column 8 200x170 10

Lifting Column Connection Profiles 13
Locking Systems 5 and 6 8
P Profiles 6 R 5
T Tubes D32 10
If you require additional information material, please

contact your item sales and service partner. You can find
the address on the back of the brochure or you can
contact us on our web site:
The following documents are currently available:

> MB Building Kit System, Comprehensive Catalogue
> MB Quick & Easy CD ROM Version 4.0 international
15
Your distribution and service partner
und Maschinenbau GmbH
D-42699 Solingen
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
0.4.110.27 04/2001
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

Concept, design and realisation
item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH,
Technical Documentation Department
Photographs
item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH
Notes
Patents
Many of the components and products contained in this
catalogue are subject to industrial property rights. Any
copying of protected products is a violation of these
rights and, as such, shall be liable to compensation.
Data and illustrations in this catalogue do not discharge
the user of the obligation to carry out his own checks to
determine whether the industrial property rights of third
parties are infringed.
Product liability
item shall be liable, within the framework of the applicable
legal provisions, for the promised characteristics of the
products shown in this catalogue. Any claims for
liability above and beyond such - in particular relating to
products created by third parties using products
included in this catalogue - are expressly excluded.
Conditions of use
The products in the item MB Building Kit System are
suitable for use in dry conditions and over the
temperature range -20°C to +70°C. item must be
consulted where products are to be used for applications
outside these limits.
item Industrietechnik September 2001 Edition
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

Technical modifications and errors reserved.
All rights reserved. Use of texts and illustrations all
reprints of any kind only permitted with our prior written
consent. This also applies for reproduction, translation
or use in electronic systems.
Inhalt 4
Contents 1. Basic Elements
Profiles 8 200 and 240 5
Caps 8 6
Angle Elements 6 T1 and T2 7
3. Fastening Elements
3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts
T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 Threads 9
3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.2 Fastening Panels to the Groove
Clamp Strip Profile 8 PP / Clamp Strips PP 10
Rebate Profile 8 Al M6 11
Dual-Rod Mesh System 12
Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger 12
Dual-Rod Mesh Lock System 13
Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Element 14
Dual-Rod Mesh 15
3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles
Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30 16
Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp Strip and Lid Profile16
Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20 17
Textile Mesh 17
3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.2 Movable Fasteners
Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20 18
Sliding-Door Catch Set 19
4.1 Handles Recessed Grip D50 19
4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.1 Door Catches
Door Latch Zn 20
6. Special Elements
6.1 Electrical Discharge 6.1.2 Potential Equaliser
Potential Equaliser 5 and 6 21
6.3 Door Security 6.3.1 Security Limit Switch/Lock compact 22
Actuators, fixed and movable 23
Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch/
Lock compact 23
6.3.3 Rotary Security Switch 6-8 24
Plain Hinge 6-8 24
6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow 6.4.3 Conveyor Rollers
Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 25
6.5 Work Bench Design Foot Cap 8 40x40 light 26
6.6 Lighting Lamp 35W / with flexible tube 27
Lamp 35W; 3-Way Distributor Block
Electronic Transformer 105W 28
8. Dynamic Elementes
8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.2 Miscellaneous
Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Couplings 29
Alphabetical Register 30
4
Profiles 8 These profiles augment Line 8.

Because of the high moments of inertia Iy, they are
especially suitable for rigid constructions where there is
an appropriate loading direction.
Modular
Dimensions
(Basis 40 mm) Profile 8 200x40
Al, anodized
A = 39.60 cm2 Ix = 65.62 cm4 Iy =1411.47 cm4
m = 10.69 kg/m Wx = 32.81 cm3 Wy= 141.14 cm3
Profile 8 240x40
Al, anodized
A = 47.21 cm2 Ix = 78.54 cm4 Iy =2400.72 cm4
m = 12.69 kg/m Wx = 39.27 cm3 Wy= 200.22 cm3
Flat Cross- Profiles with a flat cross-section can be used particularly

effectively as a clamping surface or as slide
Sections constructions for linear units.
Profile 8 200x28
Al, anodized
A = 38.22 cm2 Ix = 25.11 cm4 Iy =1377.41 cm4
m = 10.32 kg/m Wx = 18.35 cm3 Wy = 137.74 cm3
Profile 8 240x28
Al, anodized
A = 45.50 cm2 Ix = 29.95 cm4 Iy =2336.86 cm4
m = 12.29 kg/m Wx = 21.71 cm3 Wy = 194.74 cm3
5
Caps 8 Radiused caps for the end faces of the various profile
geometries; the cut face does not need to be deburred.
for Profiles 8
Modular
Dimensions
(Basis 40 mm) PA-GF, black
Flat Cross- Cap 8 200x28
Sections m = 22.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.07
Cap 8 200x40
m = 29.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.01
Cap 8 240x28
m = 27.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.10
Cap 8 240x40
m = 36.0 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.04
6
Angle Elements Connection elements for fastening a profile at an angle

of 45° when working with bracing and latticework.
6 T1 The Angle Elements are screw-connected with Button-
Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x12 and washers DIN 125-
6.4. The profile to be connected can be attached using
two Universal Fasteners 6 (without anti-torsion pins)
and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x20.

Al, anodized
m = 23 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.459.70

Al, anodized
m = 40 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.459.74
7
Angle Bracket Connection elements for fastening two profiles at an

angle of 45° when working with bracing and latticework.
Elements 6 T2 The Angle Elements are fastened to the profile using
Button-Head Screws ISO 7380.
The profiles are screw-connected using two Universal
Fasteners 6, two Button-Head Screws M6x22 and a
special T-Slot Nut 6 St 2xM6-28 or 58 or using two
Automatic Fasteners 6, two Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screws DIN 912-M5x35 and a special T-Slot Nut 6 St
2xM5-28 or 58.
Covering of the profile ends with Caps 6 30x30-45°.

Al, anodized
m = 23 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.459.72

Al, anodized
m = 44 g
1 pce., natural 0.0.459.76
Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x22

l = 22 mm
m = 445 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.002.49
8
New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts
T-Slot Nuts 6 St T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 threads are best used in

conjunction with Angle Elements 6 T2 and Universal
with 2 Threads Fasteners or Automatic Fasteners for securing profiles at
45°, but can also be used for all other profile
connections.

a = M5 b = 28.0 mm
m=8g c = 19.0 mm
1 pce. 0.0.459.78

a = M5 b = 58.0 mm
m = 17 g c = 49.0 mm
1 pce. 0.0.459.82

a = M6 b = 28.0 mm
m=7g c = 17.0 mm
1 pce. 0.0.459.80

a = M6 b = 58.0 mm
m = 16 g c = 47.0 mm
1 pce. 0.0.459.84
9
New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners
Clamp Strip Used for fastening panel elements in a closed profile

frame. The Clamp Strips and the panel elements can be
Profiles 8 PP retrofitted into the profile frame and can also be
Clamp Strips PP dismantled again.
The panel element does not require any further
processing and is fastened near the outer edge of the
profile. Important for clean room applications: The
Clamp Strip Profile smoothly bridges the transition
between panel surface and main profile, thus largely
preventing eddies of air current.
The Clamp Strip Profile 8 is fitted in the profile groove,
and the panel element fixed into it by locking it in
position using a suitable Clamp Strip.
The elasticity of the Clamp Strip Profile and the Clamp
Strip enable an essentially tight fitting for the panel
element.
The choice of a suitable Clamp Strip is governed by the

thickness of the panel element (s):
s = 0-6 / 5-11 / 10-13
Fitting and dismantling the Clamp Strip in order to fix

the panel element into position.
PP
Clamp Strip Profile 8 PP

A = 1.81 cm2
m = 164 g/m
1 pce. length 2000 mm, black, similar to RAL 9005 0.0.458.67

1 pce. length 2000 mm, grey, similar to RAL 7035 0.0.474.13
Clamp Strip PP 0-6 mm

A = 0.76 cm2
m = 70 g/m

A = 0.72 cm2
m = 66 g/m

A = 0.73 cm2
m = 66 g/m
10
Rebate Profile Rebate Profile for universal fastening of various
elements to Profiles 8. Suitable as a continuous screw
strip for essentially dust and dirt-tight constructions, in
combination with panel elements and Sealing Strips or
as a rebate strip for doors.
The Rebate Profile is inserted into the groove and fixed

in position with grub screws M6.
Connection dimensions for the Rebate Profile 8 Al to

Profiles 8.
Rebate Profile 8 Al M6
Al, anodized
Fully machined with 20 threads M6
incl. grub screws DIN 913-M6x12, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 540 g
11
Dual-Rod Mesh
System
Protective fence system for freestanding machine The inherently stable dual-rod mesh elements are used
guarding. The Dual-Rod Mesh, made of welded high- without frames. The two fixed panel widths make
strength steel wire, is screwed at any angle to the profile processing of the mesh largely unnecessary, with the
groove of Line 8 Stand Profiles using Dual-Rod Mesh narrower design (width: 958 mm) being particularly
Hangers. suitable for door elements.
This creates a customisable and stable protective fence
into which swing door elements can also be integrated,
if required.
Dual-Rod Mesh The Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger accommodates the Dual-

Rod Mesh elements on the cross-rods (ø 8 mm) at any
Hanger angle between 0° - 270° to the Stand Profile.
Even after the fastening screws have been tightened, the
fastening can still be rotated. This also forms a hinge for
a swing door.
The Dual-Rod Mesh is first hung from a preassembled

Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger, and then screwed into position
with further Hangers. Recommended spacing of
Hangers: 3 panel heights, corresponding to 600 mm.
The slotted hole fastening on the Stand Profile enables

adjustment of the position and angle.
The ability to move the mesh horizontally (depending on
the mesh width) in the Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger helps
compensate for minor assembly errors.
Average dimensions for connecting the Dual-Rod Mesh

to the Stand Profile.
Corner zones at any angle can easily be constructed
thanks to the Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger’s ability to tilt.
12
Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger
Body, St, black
Clamping elements, GD-Zn, black
m = 279 g
1 set 0.0.446.04
Dual-Rod Mesh The Dual-Rod Mesh Lock System is used to construct

doors in dual-rod mesh protective fences.
Lock System The lock housing is screwed in position to the swing
door, and the lock case is screw-connected to a rigid
mesh element. The lock housing rabbet also serves as a
door rabbet and a lock cover. The lock housing can be
used with mortise locks that meet DIN 18251 with pin
dimension 65 mm (e. g. Swing-Door Lock Order No.
0.0.458.35 with Profile Cylinder 0.0.458.42).
Thanks to its multiple fastening options, the Dual-Rod

Mesh Lock System allows left-handed or right-handed
fitting. A hole may need to be made in the Dual-Rod
Mesh to allow the door handle to be fed through.
13
Dual-Rod Mesh
Lock System Dual-Rod Mesh Lock System
Lock housing, PA-GF, black
Lock case, PA-GF, black with nab, St
Lock housing rabbet, St, black
2 Dual-Rod Mesh Adapter Plates, St, black
4 Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Elements
2 door handles, PA, black
1 spacer sleeve, PA, black
2 square nut inserts M4, St, black
Notes on Use and Installation
m = 1.74 kg
1 set 0.0.446.09
Dual-Rod Mesh Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Elements for universal

fastening of any components to Dual-Rod Mesh
Clamping elements.
Element Also suitable for fastening cylindrical components
(ø 8 mm) to profiles or panel elements.
Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Element

St, black
m = 11 g
1 pce. 0.0.446.10
14
Dual-Rod Mesh The Dual-Rod Mesh elements are available in two
designs and two sizes: various mesh widths can be
used, depending on the distance to the danger zone that
is to be guarded.
The narrow mesh width is particularly suitable for doors.
The narrow openings of the mesh prevent people from

reaching through (as required by EN 294).
Mesh Opening Distance to

width dimension danger zone
a b
25 19 > 120
50 44 > 850
St, zinc-plated, black powder-coated
Dual-Rod Mesh 25x200

Mesh width: 25x200 mm
Wire diameter: 6/8 mm
m = 22.0 kg
1 pce., 1830x 958 mm 0.0.446.08
m = 45.0 kg
1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.446.07

m = 14.5 kg
1 pce., 1830x 958 mm 0.0.446.06
m = 30.0 kg
1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.446.05
15
Textile Clamp Special profiles for clamping thin (max. 1.5 mm) panel
elements that are not inherently stable such as textile
Profile grids, fabric webs, paper webs and films.
The textile clamp profiles are combined into a profile
frame using Clamp-Profile Fastener 6 30x30 E; the
whole assembly can then be suspended on stand
profiles.
Textile Clamp Profiles comprise the Clamp Profile, the
Clamp Strip and a Lid Profile. Using the Button-Head
Screw St 4x12 TX 20, the textile panel element is
clamped between the Clamp Profile and the Clamp Strip,
and cut to size after clamping.
Finally, the Lid Profile provides an easy-clean closure
for the clamped area.
The Button-Head Screw St 4x12 TX 20 is self-threading

in the Clamp Profile’s screw channel.
The Clamp Strips already feature through holes. The tex-
tile panel element must be pierced with the screw if
necessary.
The maximum thickness of the panel element is 1.5 mm.
Assembly sequence for a Panel Segment:

> Join the Clamp Profiles using Clamp-Profile Fastener
6 30x30 E (Art. No. 0.0.441.80)
> Position the textile panel element (which is not yet cut
to size)
> Screw-fit the Clamp Strips while the panel element is
clamped
> Cut off the overhanging textile edge
> Fit the Lid Profiles
Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30

Al, anodized
A = 2.76 cm2 Ix = 1.28 cm4 Iy = 2.18 cm4
m = 0.74 kg/m Wx = 0.93 cm3 Wy = 1.33 cm3
Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp Strip

Al, anodized
A = 0.37 cm2 Ix = 0.005 cm4 Iy = 0.078 cm4
m = 0.10 kg/m Wx = 0.016 cm3 Wy =0.091 cm3
Textile Clamp Profile, Lid Profile

Al, anodized
A = 1.51 cm2 Ix = 1.04 cm4 Iy = 0.78 cm4
m = 0.40 kg/m Wx = 0.53 cm3 Wy = 0.34 cm3
16
Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20
m = 145 g/100
100 pce. 0.0.473.69
Textile Mesh The Textile Mesh is used for guards, enclosures and
partitions.
It is supplied in rolls, making it easier to handle during
transport.
Any lengths and sizes can be cut easily using scissors.
Textile Mesh
PET, black, flame-retardant to DIN 75200
Min. tear resistance (DIN 53857T2) : 1800 N/100mm
Mesh width: 21 mm Textile thickness: approx. 1 mm
Roll width:1620 mm Roll length: 10 m
Max. internal frame width 1500 mm
m = 220±20 g/m2
1 roll 0.0.436.73
17
New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners
Sliding-Door The Sliding-Door Guide Profile is retrofitted into a

profile frame.
Guide Profile Frameless, inherently stable panel elements made of
plastic (thickness 8 mm) can be used as sliding doors.
The weight of the panel element, its inherent stability
and the friction on the aluminium profile must all be
taken into account in such cases.
Clip 8 St snaps the top and bottom of the Sliding-Door

Guide Profile into the surrounding frame profiles.
1. The panel element is first lifted into the required track
at the top of the Sliding-Door Guide Profile.
2. It is then placed in the corresponding guide track at
the bottom of the Sliding-Door Guide Profile.
3. Positioning the catch correctly and securely at the top
will avoid the doors from being pulled out accidentally.
The sliding-door catches are attached directly to the

panel element if two or three sliding-door panels are to
be moved together. Their position can be selected
individually, in order to determine the required opening
path of the accompanying door panels and the overlap of
the doors (X; Xmin. = 23 mm).
Typical arrangement of a
3-part sliding door with
equal-sized door
segments.
18
The Recessed Grip D50 is particularly suitable for
sliding doors with a door thickness of 6 - 8 mm. They
are inserted into holes in the panel element.
The sliding-door catches must be fitted correctly, so as
to avoid any areas where hands may become trapped.
Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20, Top

Al, anodized
A = 2.76 cm2 Ix = 1.00 cm4 Iy = 4.39 cm4
m = 0.75 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 2.19 cm3
Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20, Bottom

Al, anodized
A = 3.43 cm2 Ix = 1.07 cm4 Iy = 4.99 cm4
m = 0.93 kg/m Wx = 0.90 cm3 Wy = 2.49 cm3
Clip 8 St
Recommended number: 5 per 1 m
m = 2.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.428.97
Sliding-Door Catch Set

PA-GF, black
bright zinc-plated
2 nuts DIN 934-M3, St, bright zinc-plated
m= 4g
1 set 0.0.473.81
Recessed Grip D50

PA-GF, black
m=9g
1 set 0.0.473.51
19
Door Latch Zn Slimline Door Latch for swing doors for fitting in the
door gap between the Stand Profile and the door. Thanks
to its small construction height, a door gap of 12 mm is
possible.
The Door Latch locks onto the head of a Hexagon Socket
Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M6, which is screwed into the
opposite groove against the T-Slot using a T-Slot Nut.
The Door Latch Zn can be attached to any combination

of Line 6 and 8 Profiles.
The length of the Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw (s)
depends on the profile range.
The T-Slot Nuts (n) with thread M4 for fastening the
Door Latch Zn should be selected according to the
profile range.
Profile n s
T-Slot Nut Screw DIN 912 M6x12

6 St M4 T-Slot Nut 6 St M6
T-Slot Nut Screw DIN 912 M6x14

8 Zn M4 T-Slot Nut 8 St M6
Door Latch Zn
Cap PA-GF, black
2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991 M4x16, bright zinc-plated
m = 66 g
1 set 0.0.473.62

l = 12 mm
m = 507 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.007.18

l = 14 mm
m = 544 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.007.98
20
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge
Potential The Potential Equaliser ensures that possible charge

buildups are balanced out between the individual
Equaliser profiles of a construction. Fitted at joints, it destroys the
insulating anodized layer and creates an electrically
conductive connection.
The Potential Equaliser cannot be considered an
electrical connection suitable for forming part of a safety
circuit.
Potential Equalisers 5 and 6 are swivelled into the Profi-

le Groove and then pushed against the joint.
The grub screw must be screwed in with light pressure

on the key, until it rests against both profiles and nudges
the Potential Equaliser out of its original position.
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.464.45
m=4g
1 pce. 0.0.459.65

Ball-Headed Key 3 A/F1.5

m = 29 g
1 pce. 0.0.473.79
Ball-Headed Key 3 A/F2

m = 32 g
1 pce. 0.0.473.78
21
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security
Security Limit Compact Security Limit Switch and Security Lock for
electrical and mechanical securing of swing, lifting and
Switch / Lock sliding doors.
compact When the actuator is pressed in, the contact is closed.
The Security Lock, working on the zero-current
principle, also locks the actuator at the same time when
appropriately wired. This mechanically prevents the
doors from being opened even in the event of a power
failure or impermissible operating states. In the event of
an emergency, the Security Lock can be opened without
power using the supplied triangular socket wrench.
Fastening Set 6-8 is suitable for universal fastening of

the Security Limit Switch, Security Lock compact and
the actuator to Profiles 6 and/or 8. The slots allow
customised adaptation to the direction of actuation and
the position of the elements in relation to each other.
Fastening Set 6-8 can also be used for switches and
security locks of similar design.
The actuator is available in two models: The fixed design

is suitable for medium-sized sliding and swing doors
(door width greater than 500 mm and smaller than 1000
mm), while the movable actuator is recommended for
swing doors of width < 500 mm and for particularly
large doors (increases operating tolerance).
Both switching units are equipped with screw-secured

plug connectors, which make the electrical connection
particularly easy. In the case of Security Limit Switch
compact, this is done using Proximity Switch
Connecting Cable Code A, Art. No. 0.0.473.25. In the
case of Security Lock compact, the Proximity Switch
Connecting Cable Code B, Art. No. 0.0.473.93 is also
required.
Wiring diagrams and illustration of circuits:
Security Limit Switch compact
Security Lock compact
22
Security Limit Switch compact
Positive break
Rated voltage: 24 V AC/DC / 230 V AC, 4A
Washers
m = 80 g
1 pce. 0.0.473.90
Security Lock compact

Positive break
Rated control supply voltage: 24 V AC/DC or 230 V AC
1 triangular socket wrench DIN 22417 M5
m = 305 g
1 set, 230 V AC 0.0.473.27

1 set, 24 V AC/DC 0.0.473.26
Fixed Actuator for Security Limit Switch / Lock compact

St, corrosion-resistant
2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M4x10,
2 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 16 g
1 set 0.0.473.23
Movable Actuator for Security Limit Switch /

Lock compact
PA-GF / St, corrosion-resistant
3 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M4x14,
3 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, bright
zinc-plated
m = 22 g
1 set 0.0.473.24
Security Switch Connecting Cable M12x1

PVC
Connecting cable 4x0.75 mm2 l = 5 m d = 6 mm
m = 317 g
1 pce., Code A 0.0.473.25
1 pce., Code B 0.0.473.93
Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch /

Lock compact
Angle bracket 6-8, GD-Zn, similar to RAL 9006
Angle bracket, cap 6-8, PA-GF, black
Fastening plate 6-8, GD-Zn, similar to RAL 9006
2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x18,St,bright zinc-plated
2 adapter washers DIN 988-4x8x1, St, bright zinc-plated
2 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, bright zinc-
plated
m = 349 g
1 set 0.0.473.22
23
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security
Rotary Security The Rotary Security Switch is a hinge for hoods and for
doors of enclosures featuring an integrated security
Switch switch. Its compact design and integrated switching
elements give it exceptional protection against
mechanical influences. This also means it is extensively
protected against tampering.
The switch point is set between 0° and 180° and fixed in
position by tightening the snap-off-head screw only after
assembly is complete. Once set, the action cannot be
undone!
The slotted fastening enables the Rotary Security Switch
to be used on Line 6 and 8 Profiles. The connecting
cable with plug, Code A (Art. No. 0.0.473.25) is
connected axially, thereby affording the cable a protected
position as it lies in the profile groove.
A geometrically identical Plain Hinge is also available.
Permissible loading forces on Rotary Security Switch:

F1 = max. 750 N
F2 = max. 1000 N
Setting the switch point after the protective equipment
has been successfully assembled: Snapping off the
screw head
Important:
Subsequent changes are no longer possible!
Width of the door gap (a) when the Rotary Security
Switch is used
Profile a
0 - 22 mm
0 - 12 mm
Wiring diagram and illustration of circuits
Rotary Security Switch 6-8

Rated voltage 60V DC; 0.5 A
Certified to DC 13 (EN 60947)
m = 346 g
1 set 0.0.473.66
Plain Hinge 6-8

m = 322 g
1 set 0.0.473.67
24
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow
Groove Profile The Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 is used for fastening

elements with a constant spacing of 60 mm. It is ideal
for Conveyor Rollers (ø 50 mm) which can be positioned
with minimal axial spacing.
The Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 is used for fastening

elements with a constant spacing in modular dimension
60 mm for e.g. Conveyor Rollers or similar.

a b
60 mm 120 mm

Al, anodized
Threaded bore M8 in modular dimension 60 mm
m = 510 g
25
Foot Cap For end-face covering of a Profile 8 40x40 light, where

the core bore is used as a socket for an adjustable foot
or similar.
The Foot Cap is clamped in the outer profile cavities of
the Profile 8 40x40 light.
Foot Cap 8 40x40 light

PA-GF, black
m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.473.03
26
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting
Lamp 35W Dust-tight and water-tight industrial spotlight (IP 67) in

a low-voltage (12 V) design. The aluminium housing for
the light fitting is equipped for fastening with Profile 8
grooves or the version with the flexible tube can be set
to any position.
Lamp 35W comes with a 2 m connecting cable, which is
linked to the electronic transformer using a coded
system plug.
Up to 3 Lamps can be attached to this power pack via
the distributor block.
The voltage supply to the electronic transformer is
provided via the Connecting Cable, Socket / Earthed
Plug (Art. No. 0.0.417.42) to a 230 V safety contact
socket.
The housing of Lamp 35W can be fitted with Handle
PA 80.
Fixed Lamp 35W, adjustable with Hinge 8 40x40,

heavy-duty with clamp lever.
Lamp 35W
ON/OFF switch
Halogen reflector 35W
Protective panel of hardened glass
Protection class III
m = 600 g
1 set 0.0.417.60
Lamp 35W with Flexible Tube

ON/OFF switch
Halogen reflector 35W
Protective panel of hardened glass
Protection class III
m = 1220 g
1 set 0.0.417.71
27
New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting
Lamp 35W
Lamp 35W, Halogen Reflector
m = 25 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.77
Lamp 35W, 3-Way Distributor Block

m = 20 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.74
Electronic Transformer 105W

Primary voltage: 230/240 V AC
Secondary voltage: 12 V AC
m = 167 g
1 pce. 0.0.417.75
28
New Products 09/2001 8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements
Synchroniser When Synchroniser Shafts are used for transferring

torque, it must be possible to adjust the attached drives
Shaft Equaliser during assembly. The Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser
Couplings Coupling enables the Synchroniser Shaft to be
separated, and then creates a power-lock connection
between the shafts.
Snap Rings W should be used to secure the Synchron-
iser Shaft axially between the drive elements.
The Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling is positioned

at the ends of the Multi-Spline Shafts and power-lock
connected using clamping screws. The tightening torque
of the clamping screws is 25 Nm (Equaliser Coupling
VK14) or 50 Nm (Equaliser Coupling VK32).
The two halves of the coupling must be screwed onto
degreased shaft ends using the waxed screws supplied,
so as to transfer the necessary torque.
VK14 VK32
L 80 120
a 1 - 1.5 2-3
b min. 40 min. 60
Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK14

2 half shells, St, bright zinc-plated
St, bright zinc-plated and waxed
m = 745 g
1 set 0.0.472.28
Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK32

2 half shells, St, bright zinc-plated
St, bright zinc-plated and waxed
m = 2.8 kg
1 set 0.0.472.29
29
New Products 09/2001 Alphapetical Register
A Angle Elements 6 T1 7 Angle Elements 6 T2 8
B Ball-Headed Key 21 Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20 17

Button-Head Screw M6x22 8
C Caps 8 200 and 240 6 Clamp Strip Profile 8 PP 10

Clip 8 St 19 Clamp Strip PP 10
D Distributor Block 3-Way; Lamp 35W 28 Dual-Rod Mesh 15

Door Latches Zn 20 Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger 12
Dual-Rod Clamping Element 14 Dual-Rod Mesh System 12
Dual-Rod Lock System 13
E Electronic Transformer 105W; Lamp 35W 28
F Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch/Lock Foot Cap 8 40x40 light 26
compact 23
Fixed Actuator for Security Limit Switch/Lock
compact 23
G Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 25
H Halogen Reflector; Lamp 35 W 28 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M6 20
L Lamp 35W 27 Lamp 35W, with Flexible Tube 27

Lamp 35W, Halogen Reflector 28 Lamp 35W, 3-Way Distributor Block 28
M Movable Actuatorfor Security Limit Switch/Lock

compact 23
P Plain Hinge 6-8 24 Profiles 8 200 and 240 5

Potential Equaliser 5 and 6 21
R Rebate Profile 8 Al M6 11 Rotary Security Switch 6-8 24

Recessed Grip D50 19
S Security Limit Switch, compact 22 Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20 18

Security Lock, compact 22 Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK14 29
Security Switch Connecting Cable M12x1 23 Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK32 29
Sliding-Door Catch Set 19
T Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30 16 Textile Mesh 17

Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp Strip 16 T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 threads 9
Textile Clamp Profile, Lid Profile 16
30
Information material
If you require additional information material, please contact your item
sales and service partner. You can find the address on the back of the
brochure or you can visit us on our web site: www.item-international.com
Catalogue MB Building Kit System 5

460 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.22
Brochure MB Building Kit System

16 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.27
CD MB Quick & Easy / Version 4.0 international

1 pce. 0.5.000.67
D-42699 Solingen
Made in Germany
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
0.4.111.14 09/2001
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

Photographs
Notes
Patents
the user from the obligation to carry out his own checks
to determine whether the industrial property rights of
third parties are infringed.
Product liability
Conditions of use
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

All rights reserved. Use of texts and illustrations or all
Index 4
Contents 1. Basic Elements
Profiles 8 8EN 5
1.1.2 Accessories for Profiles
Caps 8 6
Face Fastening Set 8 7
3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements
Angle Bracket Zn 8
3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.1 Hinges
Hinge, St, light duty 9
Sliding-Door Pin Lock 10
6. Special Elements
6.5 Work Bench Design
Column D110 11
Column Profile D110 11
Column Lid Profile D110 11
Profile 8 R26-270° 12
Support Arm 8 120 13
Spacer Element 8 D40 14
Flange 8 D130 14
Tool Holder 8 15
7. Installation Elements
7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits
Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E 16
4
Profiles 8 The sides of these profiles, with their large cross-

sections, are essentially smooth. Located at each corner
are Line 8 grooves which can be used for connecting
profiles and for securing attachments. In addition to the
stylish design, the outer surfaces of Profiles 8 are also
very easy to clean.
These Profiles are particularly well suited for relatively
light, but stable support structures and for constructing
rigid frames.
The joints between the profile structures can be
reinforced using Angle Brackets 8 Zn.
Profiles 8 EN have the same design as the external

profile of Lifting Column 8 200x170. They are therefore
particularly suitable for constructing tables.
Profile 8 160x160 8EN

Al, anodized
A =59.34 cm2 I = 1876.10 cm4
m =16.05 kg/m W = 234.51 cm3
Cut-off, max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.474.58
Profile 8 240x160 8EN

Al, anodized
A =74.00 cm2 Ix = 2492.10 cm4 Iy =5177.20 cm4
m =19.98 kg/m Wx = 310.60 cm3 Wy = 436.70 cm3
5
Caps 8 Sturdy Caps for Profiles 8 8EN.

The special screws enclosed are used to secure the Caps
to the end faces of the profiles.
An M8 thread must be tapped in the core bores of the
profiles for this purpose.
Cap 8 160x160
St, black
m = 624 g
1 set 0.0.475.15
Cap 8 240x160
St, black
m = 907 g
1 set 0.0.475.16
6
Face Fastening Face Fastening Set 8 is used to create a rigid angular

connection between two profiles whose grooved sides
Set 8 face each other.
It can also be used to connect the end face of one profile
to the grooved side of another profile.
The two halves of the Face Fastening Set are located
between the profiles being connected.
A clamp lever extending all the way through may be
used with Face Fastening Set 8. This alternative
facilitates adjustment.
The angle between the profiles can be selected in 5°

increments. The toothing ensures that the two halves fit
together securely at the correct angle.
The two halves must be pinned together if a moment of
M > 10 Nm is applied to the Face Fastening Set.
The permissible load is Mmax. = 20 Nm.
The anti-torsion blocks must be removed when attaching

to panel elements.
Position of the fixing bores in the panel elements and
profiles.
Two Line 8 Profiles are screw-connected using screw

ISO 7380-M8x25, Washer DIN 125-8,4 and T-Slot Nut 8
St M8.
An access hole must be made in one of the profiles to
accommodate the Allen key.
Face Fastening Set 8

GD-Zn, black
m = 71 g
1 set 0.0.474.44
7
New Products 04/2002 3. Fasteners 3.2 Screws and Nuts
Angle Bracket Brackets Zn are very versatile and can be used for
securing various components in variable positions on
Zn MB Building Kit System profiles and panel elements.
The slots can be used to adjust the position and angle of
the Bracket over a broad range and have been designed
for screws up to size M6. Locating Washers 6 D5 or 6
D4 are recommended for smaller screws.
(Catalogue MB5, Section 3.2.2)
a b c d
Profile Screw T-Slot Nut
ISO 7380
M5x16 Locating Washer 6 D5 5 St M5
M5x20 Locating Washer 6 D5 6 St M5
M6x20 Washer DIN 9021-6.4 8 St M6
Bracket 40x40x20 Zn
GD-Zn, black
m = 63 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.60
Bracket 60x40x20 Zn
GD-Zn, black
m = 77 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.61
Bracket 60x60x20 Zn
GD-Zn, black
m = 92 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.62
Bracket 80x40x20 Zn
GD-Zn, black
m = 92 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.63
8
New Products 04/2002 3. Fasteners 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners
Hinge, St, light Spring-loaded 90° hinge for screw attachment which is
particularly suitable when constructing lids and
duty lightweight doors. There is no need to make any special
hole in the panel element to accommodate the hinge.
Stackable spacer plates can be used to compensate for
different thicknesses in the panel elements and door
gaps. The adapter plate can be used to attach Hinge, St,
light duty to all profile lines.
With transparent panel

elements, a spacer plate
attached to the outside of
the element can be used
to conceal the Hinge.
a b c d Option for fastening the Hinge to the frame.

The door / panel elements can be aligned flush to the
frame using the spacer plates and the slot in the adapter
plate:
Line 5 Profile: Max. 4 mm thickness
Line 6 Profile: Max. 8 mm thickness
Line 8 Profile: Max.10 mm thickness
a b c d Choose the fastening elements that match the profile

Profile T-Slot Nut Washer Screw lines used for the surrounding frame.
DIN 125 ISO 7380 The components marked with an * are not included in
the scope of supply for Hinge, St, light duty.
5 St M4* 4.3 M4x16*
6 Zn M4* 4.3 M4x20
8 Zn M4* 4.3 M4x20
Machining specifications for the panel element
Permissible load: F = 120 N
Side of door Tightening torque for the fastening screws:

M = 1.5 Nm
Hinge, St, light duty

Hinge, St, black
Adapter plate, PA-GF, black
3 spacer plates, PA-GF, black
Fastening elements
m = 125 g
1 set 0.0.474.38
9
Sliding-Door Pin Integrated lock system for sliding doors which is

inserted into the panel element of the door. When
Lock operated a projecting pin locks the door against the one
immediately behind it. To lock a sliding-door system
with n door elements, n-1 Sliding-Door Pin Locks will
be required.
The Sliding-Door Pin Lock should be installed in close
proximity to the guide profiles in order to offer
maximum protection against the door being opened by
force.
The different thicknesses of panel elements (4 to 8 mm)
can be compensated using the spacer washer.
Mounting dimensions, locked and unlocked.
Washers are used to compensate the different

thicknesses (2 mm and 0.7 mm thick)
The panel elements are machined to take the Sliding-

Door Pin Lock and the pin.
Sliding-Door Pin Lock

GD-Zn/St, black
Washer, PA, black
2 keys, identical
m = 86 g
1 set 0.0.474.59
10
Work Bench
Design
The special elements in this product series are highly Column Profile D110 is equipped with two integrated
suitable for constructing modular and functional conduits for protecting equipment cables, ensuring they
supporting elements of desks and tables. The tables can are routed safely from the floor to the table top.
be constructed with individual legs at each corner, with a
central column or with combinations of these.
Column D110 When used in conjunction with two Lid Profiles, Column
Profile D110 can be used to create a column of circular
cross-section which can form a central table leg or as a
stylish support for structures mounted on top of it.
Profiles with grooves of modular dimension 40 mm can
be screw-attached using the core bores of Column Profi-
le D110.
Located below the lid profiles are integrated conduits for

equipment cables. Cables can be run in and out of the
column at any point through an opening in the lid
profiles.
11
Column D110
Column Profile D110

Al, anodized
A = 20.64 cm2
m = 5.57 kg/m
Column Lid Profile D110

Al, anodized
A = 1.39 cm2
m = 0.37 kg/m
Profile 8 R26-270° Profile with round outer surface closed on three sides,
with a Profile 8 light duty groove.
This is particularly useful as a table leg attached to one
corner of a table structure. The Profile 8 groove can be
used to connect the profile with any desired table
support structure made of standard system elements.
The fact that its exterior surface is closed on three sides
makes it both stylish and easy to clean. The cap can also
be fitted at the bottom of the profile to protect the floor.
There are also many other possible uses, e.g. as a hand
rail for installation on walls and profile structures.
The profile groove on one side can be closed off by
means of a Cover Profile 8 R40 in order to produce a
round profile contour without grooves.
Profile 8 R26-270°
Al, anodized
A = 6.45 cm2
m = 1.75 kg/m
Cap 8 R26-270°
PA-GF, black
m = 5.6 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.46
12
Support Arm Support Arm 8 120 can be used to support panel

elements and to connect Line 8 Profiles.
It provides a stylish means of connecting Profile 8 R26-
270° to table tops, walls and other surfaces.
Positioning aids ensure that the Support Arm is

connected in the correct position on the profile side.
These can be broken off in order to install the Support
Arm at any chosen angle.
Flange 8 D130 and Spacer Element 8 D40 are used for
securing the Support Arm to surfaces.
Support Arm 8 120

2 fixing elements, GD-Zn, galvanized
m = 530 g
1 set 0.0.474.80
13
Spacer Element System elements for connecting-structures when

constructing tables, shelves or hand rails.
Flange Spacer Element 8 D40 is fitted as a spacer element
between Support Arm 8 120 and Flange 8 D130.
However, the flange can also be screwed directly to the
Support Arm.
The removable fixing elements prevent the Support Arm,

Spacer Element and Flange from twisting.
The length of the screws depends on the combination
selected.
A: Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x18 when
connecting Support Arm 8 120 with system groove 8
B: Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x50 when fitting
Spacer Element 8 D40 between Flange 8 D130 and
Support Arm 8 120
Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x30 when
connecting Flange 8 D130 directly to Support Arm
8 120 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x30
C: Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x(10 + t)
Depending on the particular application
Flange 8 D130 can also be used as a mounting plate for

table columns made from Column Profile D110. It can
be used for connecting to the table top, to a Base Plate
or directly to the floor.
Flange 8 D130 is screwed to Column Profile D110 by

means of 2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7981-M8x25.
To do this, M8 threads must be drilled into the core
bores (ø 6.8 mm) in the Column Profile.
14
Spacer Element 8 D40

m = 129 g
1 set 0.0.474.81
Flange 8 D130
m = 399 g
1 set 0.0.474.82
Tool Holder 8 Tool Holder 8 can be fitted at any point in the groove of
Profiles 8. Its spring-loaded elements made of flexible
plastic enclose any inserted tools and pencils and hold
them securely. The Tool Holder can be extended at will
by simply adding further elements. The clamping force
of the Tool Holder can also be varied by choosing the
appropriate pre-tensioning.
The flexible plastic loops ensure that the surfaces of the
tools are not damaged.
2. 1. Insert the loop into the groove
2. Turn it by 90°
3. Insert the spring into the groove
1. 4. Secure the Tool Holder in the groove,
e.g. using T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M6 and grub screw
3. 4. DIN 914-M6x8.
Tool Holder 8
10 loops, PA-GF, black
10 compression springs
m = 40 g
1 set 0.0.474.50
15
New Products 04/2002 7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits
Conduit Cap Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E is an adapter element for

fitting Conduit Caps onto conduits E of modular
Fastener 40 E dimension 40 mm.
It forms the counterpart support for Self-Tapping Screws
DIN 7981 St 4.2x9.5, which are used to attach the
Conduit Caps.
For use with:
> Conduit U 40x40 E, with Conduit Cap 40x40
> Conduit U 80x40 D40 E, with Conduit Cap 80x40
> Conduit U 80x40 D80 E, with Conduit Cap 80x40
> Conduit U 80x80 E, with Conduit Cap 80x80
The side walls of the conduits must be provided with a

countersink which is used for screw-connecting the
Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E.
The Conduit Caps are then screw-connected with the

end face against the Conduit Profiles in the usual way.
Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E

2 fastening elements, PA-GF, black
2 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982-2.2x9.5, St, galvanized
m=5g
1 set 7.0.003.04
16
A Angle Bracket Zn 8
B Bracket 40x40x20 Zn 8
Bracket 60x40x20 Zn 8
C Cap 8 R26-270° 12
Cap 8 160x160 6
Cap 8 240x160 6
Caps 8 6
Column D110 11
Column Lid Profile D110 12
Column Profile D110 12
Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E 16
F Face Fastening Set 8 7

Flange 8 D130 14
H Hinge, St, light duty 9
P Profile 8 R26-270° 12
Profile 8 160x160 8EN 5
Profile 8 240x160 8EN 5
Profiles 8 5
S Sliding-Door Pin Lock 10

Spacer Element 8 D40 14
Support Arm 8 120 13
T Tool Holder 8 15
17
distribution and service partner. You can find the address on the back of
the brochure or you can visit us at our web site: www.item-
international.com
Comprehensive Catalogue MB Building Kit System 5

460 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.22
Catalogue MB Building Kit System

16 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.27

32 pages
1 pce. 0.4.111.14
CD MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.0 international

1 pce. 0.5.000.67
D-42699 Solingen
Made in Germany
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
0.4.111.37 04/2002
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

Photographs
Notes
Patents
Product liability
Conditions of use
item Industrietechnik September 2002 Edition
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

1. Basic Elements
Contents 1.1 Profiles 1.1.2 Profiles 6
Profiles 6 30x12 and 6 60x12 light 5
1.1.3 Profiles 8
Profile 8 160x160 6
1.2 Profile Accessories 1.2.1 Cover for Profile End Face
Caps 6 5
Caps 8 6
1.3 Fasteners 1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 7
1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections
Parallel Fasteners 8 8
2. Floor Elements
2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet with Thread
Adjustable Feet, Stainless 9
2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet
Base Plate 8 320x320 St 10
4.1 Handles
Cap for Handle PA 160 11
Catch Mounting Bracket 11
5. Panel Elements
5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.1 Transparent Panels
Acrylic Glass 2mm 12
Polycarbonate 2mm 12
5.2 Mesh Panels
Dual-Rod Meshes 13
6. Special Elements
6.5 Work Bench Design
Document Holders 14
Cable Duct 18
6.7 General Accessories
Protective Profiles 8 40x16 21
Warning and Protective Profiles 8 40x16 21
4
Profiles 6 Slimline Line 6 Profiles for fastening lightweight

attachments.
Automatic Fastening Set 6 is recommended for fastening
these Profiles at right-angles.

A = 1.58 cm2 Ix = 0.25 cm4 Iy = 1.46 cm4
m = 0.43 kg/m Wx = 0.39 cm3 Wy = 0.98 cm3

A = 2.98 cm2 Ix = 0.53 cm4 Iy = 10.00 cm4
m = 0.81 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 3.34 cm3
Caps 6 Caps for Profiles 6 30x12 and 60x12 light.
Cap 6 30x12
PA-GF, black
m=1g
1 pce. 0.0.478.09
Cap 6 60x12
PA-GF, black
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.478.11
5
Profiles 8 Profile 8 160x160 is particularly suitable for large gates

and heavy-duty machine structures.
The grooves of Profiles 8, of modular dimension 40 mm,
run all around the profile and support use of proven Line
8 fastening elements (e.g. Universal Fasteners or
Automatic Fasteners). The new Angle Bracket 8
160x160 St M8 is recommended for interconnecting two
Profiles 8 160x160.
The end faces of the Profiles contain core bores of
diameter 10.2 mm for taking M12 threads for e.g.
adjustable feet or floor fasteners, in particular the new
Base Plate 8 320x320 St.
M8 threads must be tapped in the screw channels

(ø 6.8 mm) of the Profiles for securing Caps 8 160x160
to the end face of the Profile.
Profile 8 160x160
Al, anodized
A = 74.20 cm2 I = 2355.00 cm4
m = 20.04 kg/m W = 294.40 cm3
Cap 8 160x160
St, painted, black
4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, galvanized, black
m = 624 g
1 set 0.0.475.15
6
Angle Bracket Heavy-duty Angle Bracket for interconnecting profiles,

and in particular heavy-duty Profiles 8 160x160, using
8 St a power-lock connection without machining. Also
suitable for fastening any desired components to Line 8
Profiles or for reinforcing screw-connected profile
constructions.
The Fastening Set facilitates installation of Angle Bracket
8 160x160 St M8.
Depending on the combination of profiles, up to 4
Fastening Sets may be required for each Angle Bracket.
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8

High-strength cast iron, painted, black
m = 2.35 kg
1 pce. 0.0.475.21
Fastening Set for Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8

1 Profile Bar 8 St M8-40, galvanized
4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20, St, galvanized, black
4 washers DIN 9021-8.4, St, galvanized, black
m = 132 g
1 set 0.0.479.96
7
Parallel Element for fastening two parallel Line 8 Profiles at a

distance of 12 mm.
Fastener 8
Parallel Fastener 8 is very easy to use: Both halves of
the spring loaded fastener engage in the profile grooves
facing each other. This fixes the profiles in position.
The fastener is then clamped by tightening an internal
screw.
Max. torque for the tensioning screw:

M = 2.5 Nm
Using the Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile:

The gap (12 mm wide) between the profiles which is
generated when Parallel Fastener 8 is used can be
covered in full using this profile.
The Cover Profile can be fitted over at least 2 Parallel
Fasteners 8.
Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile Cap covers the end-
face gap between the profiles when using Parallel
Fastener 8 Cover Profiles.
Permissible loading force per Fastener:

Fx = 2000 N
Fz = 200 N
Parallel Fastener 8
2 clamping elements, Al, anodized
Housing, PA-GF, black
Compression spring
Tensioning screw, St, galvanized
m = 21 g
1 set 0.0.476.58
Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile

Al, anodized
m = 50 g/m
1 pce., 2000 mm, natural 0.0.476.59
Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile End Cap

PA-GF, black
m = 2.5 g
1 pce. 0.0.476.60
8
New Products 09/2002 2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet
Adjustable Feet, Knuckle feet in stainless steel for use in areas that are at
risk of corrosion.
Stainless The fact that they are electrically conductive means that
they can also be used for desks and devices in areas that
are susceptible to ESD.
Note:
The protective conductor of a machine or device must
not be connected via a conductive knuckle foot. An addi-
tional Earthing Terminal (item Comprehensive Catalogue
MB 5, Section 6.1) with a separate cable is required for
this purpose.
Depending on the particular application, the knuckle feet

can be installed in the profile core bores or in
combination with Base Plates / Transport Plates.
A ball joint in the plate of the foot is used for
compensation.
Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 stainless

Spindle, St, stainless
Foot plate, St, stainless
Hexagon nut DIN 934-M5, St, stainless
F = 1,500 N a = 7°
m = 19 g
1 pce. 0.0.464.81

F = 5,000 N a = 7°
m = 47 g
1 pce. 0.0.478.22

F = 10,000 N a = 7°
m = 107 g
1 pce. 0.0.475.41

F = 15,000 N a = 7°
m = 185 g
1 pce. 0.0.478.13
9
Adjustable Feet,
Stainless
F = 20,000 N a = 7°
m = 435 g
1 pce. 0.0.476.39
Base Plate 8 Solid steel Base Plate, particularly suitable for floor and
wall mounting of Profiles 8 160x160.
320x320 St
Base Plate 8 320x320 St has been prepared for

screwing to the profile core bores (8 counterbores for
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M12 in
Profiles 8 160x160, and 4 counterbores for Hexagon
Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8 in Profiles 8
160x160 8EN) and with through holes ø 20 mm for floor
mounting.
Base Plate 8 320x320 St

St, painted, black
St, galvanized
m = 11.5 kg
1 set 0.0.476.67
10
New Products 09/2002 4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles
Cap for Handle The Cap fills out the cavity in Handle PA 160 to ensure
the Handle is comfortable in use. It is fitted after the
PA 160 Handle has been installed.
Cap for Handle PA 160

PA-GF, black
m = 20 g
1 pce. 0.0.475.38
Catch Mounting The Catch Mounting Bracket offers a simple means for
securing Ball Latches and magnetic latches to profiles of
Bracket all lines. The catch housing and ball pin can be set to
the precise position by means of the slots.
The Catch Mounting Bracket minimises the gap between
the doors and the Stand Profile.
Application examples of a Catch Mounting Bracket with

Ball Latch 8 for swing and sliding doors.
Depending on the particular application, either the ball
pin (Ball Latch 8 PA), the holding plate (magnetic catch)
or the housings of the relevant latches can be secured to
the Catch Mounting Bracket.
11
New Products 09/2002 5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels
Catch Mounting By combining two Catch Mounting Brackets it is also

possible to use latches to lock together profiles of the
Bracket same size, minimising the gap between them.
The connection is made on the profile side using M5

screws fitted into slots. DIN 125 washers must be used.
Catch Mounting Bracket

St, black
m = 88 g
1 pce. 0.0.475.06
Transparent Cast acrylic glass with scratch-resistant surface is

suitable for doors and casings. The panels can be
Panels polished to a high gloss.
Polycarbonate is knock-resistant and will not fracture
and is therefore ideal for doors and casings that need to
meet security requirements. If polycarbonate panels are
to be used with coolants over a long period of time, this
can result in the material becoming brittle and a
reduction in the strength of the safety glass.
The 2 mm-thick transparent panels are particularly well
suited for use as protective panels in the document hol-
der system.
Acrylic Glass 2mm

PMMA, clear
m = 2.3 kg/m2
Panel size max. 3050x2030 mm
Cut-off, clear 0.0.476.21
Polycarbonate 2mm
PC, clear
m = 2.4 kg/m2
Panel size max. 3050x2030 mm
Cut-off, clear 0.0.479.61
12
New Products 09/2002 5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels
Dual-Rod Inherently stable panel element for constructing free-

standing protective fence structures. Available in two
Meshes different mesh widths (25 and 50 mm).
The Dual-Rod Meshes are hot-dip galvanized to protect
against corrosion. They can also be painted to suit cus-
tomers’ individual needs.
The mesh openings prevent access to dangerous parts

in accordance with the following table (compliant with
EN 294).
Mesh Size of Distance to

width opening danger zone
a b
25 19 > 120
50 44 > 850
St, hot-dip galvanized

m = 20.5 kg
1 pce., 1830x958 mm 0.0.476.47
m = 42.3 kg
1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.476.46

m = 13.8 kg
1 pce., 1830x958 mm 0.0.476.49
m = 28.6 kg
1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.476.48
13
Document The Document Holder system is used for constructing

display and information panels of any size in the
Holders workplace or the training area. The panels can be
attached directly to a frame construction made of
aluminium profiles, e.g. to the work bench in the
production area. The Document Holder can also be used
to construct fixed or moveable panels on appropriate
frame structures.
The system consists of two aluminium profiles that are
interconnected using an integrated spring-mounted hinge.
The Document Holder Support Profile forms the fixed
frame which also secures the rear panel. This frame is
fixed onto basic constructions made up of Line 8
Profiles using Clip 8 St. The spring-loaded Lid Profile
can be swung up to provide a secure clamp for
documents and drawings and to hold an optional acrylic
glass panel secure in order to protect documents.
The simplest form of the Document Holder is the
clipboard. When deciding on the profile dimensions a
clamping allowance of at least 10 mm should taken
into account.
Another design option consists of an all-round frame
construction which, for example, enables documents to
be attached securely in industrial applications.
A further application for the Document Holder system is
to construct moveable or fixed panels which allow
drawings of up to A0 size and above to be held safely.
The clamping force of the Lid Profile can be adapted to
the specific requirements by changing the number of
clamping springs. At least two springs are required for
each Lid Profile.
The exposed end faces of the Support Profiles and Lid
Profiles share a single cap which is screw-connected to
the Support Profile.
Complete and ready for use Holder Frames or

clipboards are available for A4 and A3 documents.
Swivelling the Lid Profile to open and close the

Document Holder.
The leaf springs hold the lid in place at its two extreme
positions. The document is held in position by simply
folding over the Lid Profile.
A protective panel can be used in Document Holder

frames that are enclosed on all sides. This too is held in
position by the Lid Profile.
The Document Holder Support Profile is fixed onto basic
constructions made up of Line 8 Profiles using Clip 8 St.
The Support Profile can also be secured to any surface

using a Countersunk Screw.
14
Document Holder 8 A4
Fully assembled (excluding protective panel)
A = 210 mm
B = 300 mm
m = 0.65 kg
1 set 0.0.476.22
Document Holder 8 A3
Fully assembled (excluding protective panel)
A = 420 mm
B = 300 mm
m = 1.2 kg
1 set 0.0.476.23
Document Holder 8 Frame A4

Fully assembled (including protective panel PMMA)
A = 210 mm
B = 300 mm
m = 2.2 kg
1 set 0.0.476.24
Document Holder 8 Frame A3

Fully assembled (including protective panel PMMA)
A = 420 mm
B = 300 mm
m = 3.2 kg
1 set 0.0.476.25
15
Document Document Holders can be constructed in any sizes as

either clipboards or frames for documents.
Holders item’s sales partners provide design assistance and
supply either individual components, complete frames
or building kits.
The tables below show the dimensions required for
Document Holders together with the various sizes.
Calculating the number and lengths of the individual

components for constructing Document Holders in the
form of a clipboard.
Qty. Length Length

Document dimensions A B
Rear panel (R) 1 A+20 mm B+26 mm
Support Profile 1 A+20 mm
Document
Lid Profile 1 A+20 mm
Sealing Strip 1 A+20 mm
Leaf Spring A
100
Self-Tapping Screw A
3.5x9.5 50
The rear panel (thickness 2 mm) is clamped to the

Support Profile by driving the Self-Tapping Screws DIN
7982 St 3.5x9.5 into it’s groove.
If a protective panel is not used, Sealing Strip 3x2 sk
should be bonded into the Lid Profile to prevent the
document from moving.
Calculating the number and lengths of the individual

components for constructing Document Holder Frames.
Qty. Length Length
Document dimensions A B
Rear panel (R) 1 A+72 mm B+72 mm
Protective panel (S) 1 A+56 mm B+56 mm
Support Profile, horiz. 2 A+100 mm
Document
Support Profile, vert. 2 B+20 mm
Lid Profile, horiz. 2 A+100 mm
Lid Profile, vert. 2 B+20 mm
Leaf Spring A+B
100
Self-Tapping Screw A+B
3.5x9.5 50
16
Document Holder 8 Support Profile

Al, anodized
m = 0.77 kg/m
Document Holder 8 Lid Profile

Al, anodized
m = 0.34 kg/m
Document Holder 8 Cap

2 Caps, PA-GF, black
2 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982 St 4,2x16
m = 7.0 g
1 set 0.0.476.19
Document Holder 8 Leaf Spring

St, stainless
m = 1.3 g
1 pce. 0.0.476.11

St, galvanized
m = 65 g/100
100 pce. 8.0.008.11
Sealing Strip 3x2 sk

Cellular rubber, adhesive on one side, black
m = 1.6 g/m
1 pce., length 1000 mm 0.0.479.98
17
Cable Duct Robust modular special-purpose conduit for use as a

cable duct on all types of work bench constructions
designed to withstand both office and factory
environment. The system elements are designed to
create large cross-section Cable Ducts that are able to
hold both adapter blocks and power packs. Lines can
be run in and out of the Cable Duct at any position.
Cables can be installed or exchanged quickly by
opening the swing-up cover. A flexible lip provides a
seal between the cover and the Cable Duct and also
prevents cables slipping out.
The modular design means that Cable Ducts can be
built for almost all work bench geometries and
constructions. item’s sales partners provide design
assistance and supply either individual components,
complete Cable Ducts or building kits.
The robust Cable Duct can be secured at any position

on desks or work bench systems by means of holes
provided in Wall Profile KW and is inherently stable.
When snapped into place Catch KW provides the
necessary stability for the cable duct despite the large
swing lid opening.
At least two Catches KW are recommended per lid
section.
Depending on the intended purpose of the work bench,

the Cable Duct can be used as an extension of the
bench surface or can be hidden below the latter.
When used below the work bench top, the Cable Duct
can be used without Lid Profile 160 KW, but not without
Catch 160 KW.
18
The Cable Duct either provides an extension to the

work bench top within the frame of the work bench or is
fitted to a height-adjustable work bench top.
The design behind the modular duct system can be used

to construct segmented sections of any required length.
The individual profile elements are simply locked
together. Openings of any size in the Wall and Support
Profiles are possible to each side.
The profiles are locked in position relative to each other
using the screws of Conduit Cap KW.
The grooves of Profile 5 Support and Wall Profiles KW
enable T-Slot Nuts 5 to be used to secure parts within
the Cable Duct.
The end face of the Cable Duct is closed by Conduit

Caps 160-45° KW which are screwed to the Support and
Wall Profiles. These are equipped with feedthrough
openings for cables and plugs. An appropriate cover can
be fitted to these openings if they are not being used.
The Conduit Caps are supplied in pairs.
The space inside the Cable Duct is large enough to

stow power packs even when plugged into adapter
blocks.
Lip Seal KW is secured to Lid Profile 160 KW by

inserting it into the appropriate groove. A centre punch
or similar is then used on the underside of the groove
in order to deform it and ensure that Lip Seal KW is
permanently held in position.
19
Cable Duct
Support Profile KW
Al, anodized
m = 1.50 kg/m
Wall Profile KW
Al, anodized
m = 3.0 kg/m
Wall Profile 160-45° KW

Al, anodized
m = 2.25 kg/m
Lid Profile 160 KW

Al, anodized
m = 0.74 kg/m
Lip Seal KW
NBR, black
m = 7.3 g/m
Cut-off, max. 20 m 0.0.479.64
Catch 160 KW
PA-GF, black
m = 34 g
1 pce. 0.0.474.70
Conduit Cap 160-45° KW

2 Conduit Caps, St, black
2 covers, St, black
8 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M3x6, St, black
8 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982-4.2x16, St, black
m = 0.54 kg
1 set 0.0.474.98
20
New Products 09/2002 6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories
Warning and Flexible plastic cavity profiles with fastening geometry

for grooves of Line 8 Profiles, for protecting against
Protective knocks on the side face of profiles or to cover profile
Profiles edges.
The profiles are available as Warning and Protective
Profiles 8 with a yellow / black warning marking to
highlight edges or corners that are in danger of being
impacted or to identify danger zones.
The ends of the Warning and Protective Profiles are
sealed by flexible Caps.
The Protective Profiles have a modular dimension of

40 mm.
Large cross-sections of Line 8 Profiles can be
protected effectively by combining several Protective
Profiles.
Protective Profile 8 40x16

TPE, black
m = 334 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.474.72
Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16

TPE, black / yellow stripe
m = 334 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.476.28
Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16

TPE, black
m = 435 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.474.71
Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16

TPE, black / yellow stripe
m = 435 g/m
1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.476.27
Cap for Protective Profile 8 40x16

TPE, black
m=6g
1 pce. 0.0.474.74
Cap for Protective Profile 8 R16-90°

TPE, black
m=2g
1 pce. 0.0.474.73
21
A Acrylic Glass 12 Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 7
B Base Plate 8 320x320 St 10
C Cable Duct 18 Cap for Protective Profile 8 40x16 21

Cap 6 30x12 5 Caps 6 5
Cap 6 60x12 5 Catch 160 KW 20
Cap 8 160x160 6 Catch Mounting Bracket 11
Cap for Handle PA 160 11 Conduit Cap 160-45° KW 20
Cap for Protective Profile 8 R16-90° 21
D Document Holder 8 A3 15 Document Holder 8 Frame A3 15

Document Holder 8 A4 15 Document Holder 8 Frame A4 15
Document Holder 8 Cap 17 Document Holder 8 Support Profile 17
Document Holder 8 Leaf Spring 17 Dual-Rod Meshes 13
Document Holder 8 Lid Profile 17 Dual-Rod Meshes 25x200 13
Document Holders 14 Dual-Rod Meshes 50x200 13
F Fastening Set for Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 7
K Knuckle Feet, Stainless 9 Knuckle Foot D40, M8x60 stainless 9

Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 stainless 9 Knuckle Foot D60, M12x75 stainless 9
Knuckle Foot D30, M6x45 stainless 9 Knuckle Foot D80, M16x100 stainless 10
L Lid Profile 160 KW 20 Lip Seal KW 20
P Parallel Fastener 8 8 Profile 6 60x12 light 5

Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile 8 Profile 8 160x160 6
Paralle Fastener 8 Cover Profile End Cap 8 Protective Profile 8 40x16 21
Polycarbonate 2mm 12 Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16 21
Profile 6 30x12 light 5
S Sealing Strip 3x2 sk 17 Support Profile KW 20

Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7982 St 3.5x9.5 17
T Transparent Panels 12
W Wall Profile 160-45° KW 20 Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 21

Wall Profile KW 20 Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16 21
Warning and Protective Profile 21
22
the brochure or you can visit us at our web site:

460 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.22

16 pages
1 pce. 0.4.110.27

32 pages
1 pce. 0.4.111.14

20 pages
1 pce. 0.4.111.37
CD MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international

1 pce. 0.5.000.67
D-42699 Solingen
0.4.411.60 09/2002 Made in Germany
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310
Photographs
Notes
Patents
Product liability
Conditions of use
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

1. Basic Elements
Profile 5 20x20 3N 5
1.1.2 Profiles 6
Profile 6 30x30 3N light 5
1.1.3 Profiles 8
Profile 8 320x160 6
Cap 8 320x160 6
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 7
Fastener 8 M12 7
2. Floor Elements
2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Knuckle Feet
Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 8
2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet
Base Plate 8 320x320 St 9
Levelling Feet D80, M33x80 9
4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.3 Door Locks
Integrated Lock System 8 10
6. Special Elements
6.7 General Accessories
Radius Seal 8 40x40 12
Radius Seals 8 80x40 12
7. Installation Elements
7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits
Cable Entry Protector Lid 40 13
Cable Entry Protector Wall 40 13
8. Dynamic Elements
8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives
Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R25 14
Mounting Plate 160x160 U80 R50 15
4
Profiles with Profiles in modular dimensions of Lines 5, 6 and 8

with closed grooves on 3 sides. These profiles are ideal
Closed Grooves for applications where appearance and cleanliness are
particularly important.
Profile 5 20x20 3N
Al, anodized
A = 1.92 cm2 Ix = 0.80 cm4 Iy = 0.77 cm4
m = 0.50 kg/m Wx = 0.80 cm3 Wy = 0.76 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 3.60 cm2 Ix = 3.14 cm4 Iy = 3.02 cm4
m = 1.00 kg/m Wx = 2.09 cm3 Wy = 1.98 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 6.96 cm2 Ix = 10.22 cm4 Iy = 9.62 cm4
m = 1.90 kg/m Wx = 5.11 cm3 Wy = 4.70 cm3
5
Profile 8 Profile 8 320x160 is particularly suitable for large

portals and heavy-duty machine constructions.
320x160 Profile 8 grooves in modular dimension 40 mm enable
the use of proven fastening elements of Line 8 (e.g.
Universal-Fastening Sets or Automatic-Fastening Sets).
The new Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 or M12 is
recommended for interconnecting two Profiles
8 320x160.
The profile cross-section contains core bores of

diameter 10.2 mm, into which M12 threads can be
drilled. Adjustable Feet or floor fixing units, for example,
can be screwed directly into these core bores. This is
particularly true of the new Base Plate 8 320x320 St II.
To secure Caps 8 320x160 to the profile end face, an
M8 thread must be drilled into the outer four screw
channels (ø 6.8 mm) of the profiles.
Profile 8 320x160
Al, anodized
A =125.55 cm2 Ix = 4.398.20 cm4 Iy =14,194.10 cm4
m = 33.90 kg/m Wx = 549.80 cm3 Wy = 887.30 cm3
Cap 8 320x160
St, painted, black
4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, bright zinc-plated, black
m = 1.2 kg
1 set 0.0.476.64
6
Angle Bracket Heavy-duty fastening element for power-lock, non-

machined connection of large Profiles 8 320x160 or
8 St Profiles 8 160x160 with innovative screw technology.
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 is used for screw
attachment with Fasteners 8 M12. A particulary heavy-
duty connection is possible for the profiles by using an
M12 bolt with Profile 8 grooves.
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 can also be used for
screwing profiles to floors and walls and for fastening
heavy parts that are not part of the MB Building Kit Sy-
stem.
Alternatively, Angle Bracket 8 St M12 can also be screw
attached using bolts and T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8.
Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12

High-strength cast iron, painted, RAL9006 white aluminium
m = 3.5 kg
1 pce. 0.0.475.20
Fastener 8 M12 Two-part Fastener for heavy-duty securing of parts to the

Profile 8 groove.
The two halves of the Fastener are fitted into the groove
at any point where they are then slid together.
The integrated sprung ball holds the Fastener in place
Innovation and facilitates screw attachment.
German
utility model
200 10 915
The tightening torque for the nut of Fastener 8 M12 is

M = 80 Nm.
7
Fastener 8 M12
Fastener 8 M12
1 fastener half without clamp, G-St, stainless
1 fastener half with clamp, G-St, stainless
1 nut DIN 934-M12, St, bright zinc-plated
1 washer DIN 125-12, St, bright zinc-plated
m = 70 g
1 set 0.0.473.02
Knuckle Foot Knuckle Foot for lightweight constructions, highly

suitable for Line 5 profiles.
D20 Spindle M5 can be screwed directly into a thread in the
profile core bores.
Unevenness of the floor is compensated for by means of

a ball and socket joint.

F = 750 N α = 15°
m=7g
1 pce. 0.0.464.75
8
Base Plate 8 New design of Base Plate 8 320x320 St. The hole
pattern for the countersinks can be used for end-face
320x320 St II connection to Profiles 8 160x160, 160x160 8EN,
240x160 8EN and 8 320x160.
The Base Plate can be fastened to the floor in two
ways - either by bolting it directly to the floor or by
also using Levelling Feet. These compensate for slight
unevenness of the floor in the area of the base plate as
well as possible height differences.
The floor anchors are fed through the bores in the
Levelling Feet. When these are tightened the Levelling
Feet are fixed in their preset position.
Base Plate 8 320x320 St II has been prepared for

screwing into the core bores of the profiles
(8 countersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws
DIN 6912-M12 in Profiles 8 320x160 and 8 160x160,
and countersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws
DIN 912-M8 in Profiles 8 160x160 8EN or
8 240x160 8EN).
It is fastened to the floor using bores ø 38 mm and
washers DIN 440.
The lower hexagon nut (50 A/F) is adjusted to set the

height of the Levelling Feet. The hollow stud must be
prevented from twisting (30 A/F).
Any unevenness is compensated for by means of a ball
socket in the base plate (α = ± 2.5°).
Base Plate 8 320x320 St II

St, painted, blackSt, lackiert, schwarz
4 washers DIN 440-R22, St, black
m = 11.6 kg
1 set 0.0.476.70
Levelling Feet D80, M33x80

4 base plates, St, black
4 hollow studs, St, black
8 hexagon nuts DIN439-M33x2, St, black
m = 3.5 kg
1 set 0.0.480.91
9
Integrated Lock Integrated Lock System 8 is a modular door lock for

guards and enclosures. The various configurations
System 8 using pawl latches or rods enable doors to be locked in
up to three directions.
The lock is fully integrated into Profile 8 or Profile 8
light - the rotating pawl latch swings into the lateral
profile groove and the rods are concealed in the profile
core bore.
The basic version of a door lock equipped with
Integrated Lock System 8 consists of a Rotating Pawl
Latch 8 and at least one handle.
The system can be operated from either one side or both
sides of the door (i.e. inside/outside). There is also the
option of locking the door from one side by using the
lockable handle.
A Rod Latch 8 is required for each of the rods at the top

and bottom of the door.
The Rod Latch also contains the rod actuator pin needed
for actuating the rod with the Rotating Pawl Latch 8.
Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F forms the connection between the
Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F
Rotating Pawl Latch and the Rod Latch.
The length l of the tube for actuating the Rod Latch is:
l = a - 60 mm
A countersink of diameter 30 mm must be drilled into

the door profile for holding the Integrated Lock System.
A commercially available countersinking drill (3-cutter
with guide pin ø 11 mm or larger) or Step Drill, Univer-
sal Connection 12 is required for this purpose.
Countersink ø 30 mm must be 25 mm deep.
Rotating Pawl Latch 8 with two handles:

The pawl latch engages into the Profile 8 groove of the
door frame adjacent.
The gap between the door profile and the lateral door
frame must not exceed 6 mm.
The rods of the Rod Latches move out of the core bore
in the door profile and engage in the Profile 8 groove of
the door frame profile adjacent.
The gap between the door profile and the upper door
frame must not exceed 7 mm.
10
Rotating Pawl Latch 8

1 pawl, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated
2 alternating stops, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated
1 crank, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated
1 connecting plate, St
1 glide bush, POM, black
bright-zinc plated
Notes on Use and Installation
m = 50 g
1 set 0.0.476.96
Handle
1 handle, PA, black
1 square drive 56 mm long, St, bright-zinc plated
2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Al M5
bright-zinc plated
m = 170 g
1 set 0.0.476.92
Handle, Lockable
1 handle, PA, black
2 keys
2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Al M5
bright-zinc plated
m = 220 g
1 set 0.0.476.94
Rod Latch 8
1 cap, PA-GF, schwarz
1 locking pin, St, stainless
1 rod actuator pin, St
1 O-ring DIN 3771 5.5x1.5, NBR, black
1 self-tapping screw DIN 7982-4.2x16, St, black
m = 30 g
1 set 0.0.476.98
Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F

Al, anodized
m = 58 g/m
11
New Products 04/2003 6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories
Radius Seals The plastic Radius Seals ensure a continuous

transition for the external contour of 90° profile
connections. The gap between the straight end-face
saw cut of the profile and the profile edge radius is
filled by the seal. This simplifies cleaning and
prevents dirt from entering the profile cavities. Radius
Seals can therefore be used particularly effectively in
clean-room conditions.
The Radius Seals can be used in combination with all
known connecting elements.
Important:
In the case of Standard, Universal and Automatic
Fasteners, the power-lock connection with the Radius
Seal is achieved by means of an interlying plastic
element which reduces the load on the connection.
Suitable reserves must be built in at the design stage.
The designations R40 and R80 refer to the length of the

side of the seal facing the profile radius.
In calculating the length of the cross profiles between

two profiles, the thickness of the Radius Seals on each
side must be taken into account.
Radius Seal 8 40x40

PA, grey similar to RAL7042
m = 2 g each
10 pce. 0.0.480.39
Radius Seal 8 80x40 R40

m = 4 g each
10 pce. 0.0.480.41
Radius Seal 8 80x40 R80

m = 4 g each
10 pce. 0.0.480.95
12
New Products 04/2003 7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits
Cable Entry The Cable Entry Protectors enable hoses and cables to
be routed in and out of conduits without having to
Protectors, Lid deburr the profiles or take other protective measures. A
and Wall break is made at a suitable point in the Support Profiles
and Wall Profiles (modular conduit system) or the Lid
Profiles (conduits E). A Cable Entry Protector covers the
sharp cut edges of the profiles and protects cables and
hoses as they emerge from the conduits.
Cable Entry Protectors, Lid are suitable for use with Lid
Profiles and Support Profiles. Cable Entry Protectors,
Wall are suitable for the appropriate Wall Profiles.
Cable Entry Protectors, Lid consist of two parts in order

to avoid the tiresome business of having to thread
cables and hoses through.
Cable Entry Protector, Lid 40

2 halves, PA-GF, black
m=7g
1 set 0.0.479.76
Cable Entry Protector, Lid 80

2 halves, PA-GF, black
m=9g
1 set 0.0.479.77
Cable Entry Protector, Wall 40

PA-GF, black
m=5g
1 pce. 0.0.479.74
Cable Entry Protector, Wall 80

PA-GF, black
m=9g
1 pce. 0.0.479.75
13
New Products 04/2003 8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements
Timing-Belt The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is used for driven li-

near axes with fixed Timing Belt. The holder counteracts
Tensioner the tendency of the timing-belt tensioner to lift up off the
Holder profile to which it is screwed by means of the fixing
block.
The holder improves the running of the timing belt drive,
particularly when operating at maximum load. The drive
vibrates less and is more rigid. In reinforcing against the
bending moment, the holder also reduces the load on
the tensioning screws of the timing-belt tensioner.
The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is available in two
versions for Timing Belts R25 and R50.
Drawing of a linear drive with moving axis. A holder

fixes each of the timing-belt tensioners in place.
The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is screwed together

with the fixing block. The tensioning screws of the
timing-belt tensioner are accessed through the holes
provided.
Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R25

1 holder, Al, anodized
1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x40, St,
bright-zinc plated
3 adapter washers DIN 988, St, stainless
m = 160 g
1 set 0.0.426.33
Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R50

1 holder, Al, anodized
bright-zinc plated
6 adapter washers DIN 988, St, stainless
m = 360 g
1 set 0.0.426.36
14
New Products 04/2003 8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements
Mounting Plate Special Mounting Plate for fastening Timing-Belt

Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II to large Profiles 8 160x160
and 320x160.
The plate features counterbores for fastening to the face
end of the profile and threaded holes for the screws to
secure the Reverse Unit.
The Mounting Plate can be used to fasten Timing Belt

R50 to any face of the profile.
1. Fitting the Mounting Plate to the end face of the

profile:
Securing to the profile core bores using four bolts DIN
912-M8x40.
2. Fitting the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II to
the Mounting Plate:
Assembling screws into the threaded bores of the
Mounting Plate using 3 Button-Head Screws M8x20 and
washers DIN 125-8.4.
Mounting Plate 160x160 U80R50

Al, black
m = 1.02 kg
1 pce. 0.0.480.71
15
The Philosophy of the The building kit system – a vast array of parts and a The following media are also available upon request:
virtually unlimited range of possibilities.
MB Building Kit System > Comprehensive Catalog MB Building Kit System - Our
Industrial building kit systems looking to cover a broad products for your projects
spectrum of cutting-edge fixtures must be able to deliver > CD MB Building Kit System - Our products in pdf
functionality, cost-efficiency, flexibility and many other format for easy access
features.
> CD MB Quick & Easy - Our design support for your
The modular design of the item MB Building Kit System projects
can combine all the elements of the individual product
groups in order to create a huge spectrum of fixtures
ranging from assembly work benches and factory
equipment to automated production facilities.
The components of the MB Building Kit System are
easily combined into customised solutions.
item - Company and

Services
When item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH > Fast delivery of all system elements
was established in Solingen in 1974, its initial areas of > Elements machined ready for assembly
operation included the design and construction of
customised machines and assembly equipment. > Assembly of construction kits
From the very outset, our company set itself a prime > Turnkey solutions with system elements
goal - to reduce the cost of building machines by > CAD software for project management
rationalising machining and assembly operations and by
standardising components. > Internal and external training
item operates a decentralised sales structure worldwide.
Sales and service centres close to the customer are able
to provide a full spectrum of services and offer an
excellent level of support for all tasks.
16
International Sales With branches, sales partners and a comprehensive
network of service centres worldwide, item can assure
users of continuous support and rapid availability of
products in their direct vicinity.
You can find item sales partners in the following
countries:
> Australia
> Austria
> Belgium
> Brazil
> Canada
> Czech Republic
> Denmark
> Finland
> France
> Greece
> Hungary
> Ireland
> Israel
> Italy
> Japan
> Netherlands
> New Zealand
> Norway
> Poland
> Singapore
> Slovenia
> South Africa
> Spain
> Sweden
> Switzerland
> UK
> USA
17
A Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 7
B Base Plate 8 320x320 St II 9
C Cable Entry Protector Lid 40 13

Cap 8 320x160 6
F Fastener 8 M12 7
H Handle 11
Handle, lockable 11
I Integrated Lock System 8 10
K Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 8
L Levelling Feet D80, M33x80 9
M Mounting Plate 160x160 U80R50 15
P Profile 5 20x20 3N 5
Profile 8 320x160 6
Profiles with closed grooves 5
R Radius Seal 8 40x40 12

Radius Seal 8 80x40 R40 12
Radius Seal 8 80x40 R80 12
Rod Latch 8 11
Rotating Pawl Latch 8 11
S Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 11
T Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R25 14

Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F 11
18

1 pce. 0.4.110.22

1 pce. 0.4.110.27

1 pce. 0.4.111.14

1 pce. 0.4.111.37

1 pce. 0.4.411.60
Catalogue MB Building Kit System Line 12

1 pce. 0.4.111.96
CD-ROM MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international

1 pce. 0.5.000.67
CD-ROM MB Building Kit System Comprehensive

Catalogue in pdf format
1 pce. 0.4.111.84
D-42699 Solingen
Made in Germany
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
0.4.111.86 05/2003
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12
Photographs
Notes
Patents
Product liability
Conditions of use
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
Fax +49/212/65 80-310

1. Basic Elements Line 12

Introduction 6
Profiles 12 60x60 10
Caps 12 12
1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove
Cover Profile 12 Al 13
Cover Profile 12 14
Standard Fastener 12 15
Universal Fastener 12 16
Automatic Fastener 12 17
Angle Bracket 12 Zn 18
1.3.4 Butt Connections
Universal-Butt Fastener 12 20
Automatic-Butt Fastener 12 21
2. Floor Elements
2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.2 Base Plates/Transport Plates
Base Plates/Transport Plates 12 22
3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts
T-Slot Nuts 12 St 23
T-Slot Nuts 12 St, heavy-duty 24
3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles
Profile Bar 12 St 25
Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-duty 25
3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements
Adapter Profile 12/8 26
9. Auxiliary Elements
9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Connections for Basic Elements
Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 27
9.2.4 General Tools
Ball-Headed Key 28
Key with T-Handle 28
L-Key 29
Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ 30
9.3 Services 9.3.2 Connection Processing
Saw Cuts 31
Connection Processing, End Face, Thread 31
Connection Processing, Drilled Hole 32
Connection Processing, Stepped Bore 32
4
Hit the mark with Line 12 - The new Line 12 - designed for very heavy loads in
mechanical engineering.
the alternative to steel in
Based on the 60 mm modular dimension, Line 12 is
mechanical engineering one of the few systems on the market with a heavy-duty
M12 screw connection.
The profile cross-sections up to 240x120 mm are the
perfect alternative to steel girders. A comprehensive
range of accessories and stable fastening elements
complete the system.
The demand for rigid, heavy-duty aluminium profiles is
continuing to grow worldwide. The convincing
advantages of profile technology are even being
recognised and used in applications which, due to the
high loads involved, were hitherto the sole reserve of
steel constructions.
Both simple frames with small footprints and supporting
constructions for heavy machinery can be built easily
and at low cost. The result is a load-bearing capacity
which previously was only possible through intensive Assembly of the standard connection in Line 12
machining in the steel construction sector.
Line 12 compared to Line 8
Heavy-duty and light-duty profiles
5
Profile 12
Technical Data
Tolerances of
external dimensions and
groove position
Groove Dimensions
Core Bores The positional tolerance of the bores depends on the

number of core bores.
Number of bores z [mm]
1 0.4
2 to 4 0.6
>4 0.8
Tensile Loading
6
Torsion Torsional tolerance v

at lengths l [mm]
b [mm] up to up to up to up to up to up to
from up to 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
- 60 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.0
60 120 1.0 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.5 3.0
120 240 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Straightness Tolerance
Width a [mm] Straightness tolerance
transverse from up to t [mm]
0 60 0.2
60 120 0.3
120 240 0.5
Straightness Tolerance Length Tolerances

longitudinal l1 [mm] h1 [mm] h2
up to 1000 0.7
For each length section
up to 2000 1.3 l2 = 300 mm, the maximum
up to 3000 1.8 deviation h2 is 0.3 mm
up to 4000 2.2
up to 5000 2.6
up to 6000 3.0
Angular Tolerance
Width b [mm] Angular tolerance
from up to w ± [mm]
0 60 0.60
60 120 0.80
120 240 1.5
7
Profiles 12 The following equations apply for calculating deflection An approximate calculation of the deflection is possible
f: with the help of the nomogram shown on the right. The
F x l3
3 x E x Ι x 104 nomogram calculation procedure can be reversed in
Example load 2 Example:

3
Fxl Given:
______________________
f = F = 10,000 N
48 x E x Ι x 104 l = 1,000 mm
Ιy = 509.70 cm4 (Profile 12 120x60, edgewise)
Find:
f = Deflection in mm
Example load 3
Results:
F x l3 Example load 1
f = ______________________
f ≅ 9.34 mm
192 x E x Ι x 104
Example load 2
f ≅ 0.58 mm
Example load 3
f ≅ 0.15 mm
The following equations are to be used for calculating For an approximate calculation of the deflection caused
the deflection caused by the dead weight: by the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F in
As example load 1 the nomogram and the resulting values should be
halved.
F x l3
______________________
f =
8 x E x Ι x 104
As example load 2 Checking the bending stress

M b
5 x F x l3 σ = ________________________
______________________
f =
W x 103
384 x E x Ι x 104
σ = Bending stress in N/mm2

Mb = Max. bending moment in Nmm
As example load 3 W = Resistance moment in cm3
Rp0.2 Al = 195 N/mm2
F x l3
______________________
f =
384 x E x Ι x 104 The calculated bending stress σ must be compared with
the permissible bending stress σperm .
F = Load in N
Rp 0.2
σ perm = ________________________
Ι = Moment of inertia in cm4
S
E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm2
EAI = 70,000 N/mm2
The safety factor S must be selected depending on the
required application conditions.
8
9
Profiles 12 Line 12 Profiles are particularly suitable for stable frame

constructions carrying high loads. The rigidity of the
Modular profile flanks enables tensile loading of up to 10,000 N
Dimensions per screw connection. Their inclination towards the
groove produces a high degree of security against loss
(Basis 60 mm), of pre-tensioning.
Open Grooves Areas of this basic frame which are subject to less load
can be constructed from Profiles 12 light in order to
save material.

Al, anodized
A = 14.50 cm2 I = 46.02 cm4
m = 3.91 kg/m W = 15.36 cm3
Profile 12 60x60
Al, anodized
A = 20.60 cm2 I = 70.50 cm4
m = 5.55 kg/m W = 23.50 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 26.15 cm2 Ix = 88.15 cm4 Iy = 355.50 cm4
m = 7.10 kg/m Wx = 29.40 cm3 Wy = 59.40 cm3
Profile 12 120x60
Al, anodized
A = 37.58 cm2 Ix = 135.40 cm4 Iy = 509.70 cm4
m = 10.15 kg/m Wx = 45.10 cm3 Wy = 85.10 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 44.45 cm2 I = 679.60 cm4
m = 12.00 kg/m W = 113.50 cm3
Profile 12 120x120
Al, anodized
A = 60.40 cm2 I = 948.00 cm4
m = 16.30 kg/m W = 159.00 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 49.10 cm2 Ix = 170.65 cm4 Iy = 2585.50 cm4
m = 13.25 kg/m Wx = 57.02 cm3 Wy = 215.90 cm3
10
Profile 12 240x60
Al, anodized
A = 72.60 cm2 Ix = 269.38 cm4 Iy = 3777.20 cm4
m = 19.60 kg/m Wx = 89.60 cm3 Wy = 314.80 cm3

Al, anodized
A = 83.60 cm2 Ix = 1329.50 cm4 Iy = 4529.80 cm4
m = 22.60 kg/m Wx = 221.80 cm3 Wy = 378.10 cm3
Profile 12 240x120
Al, anodized
A =112.00 cm2 Ix = 1815.20 cm4 Iy = 6168.90 cm4
m = 30.24 kg/m Wx = 302.00 cm3 Wy = 514.10 cm3
11
Caps Stable Caps made of 6 mm thick, glass fibre reinforced

plastic protect the end faces of Profiles 12 from damage
and cover the cut edge. Deburring of the cut edge is
therefore not necessary.
PA-GB, black
Cap 12 60x60
m = 14.7 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.01
Cap 12 120x60
m = 28 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.02
Cap 12 120x120
m = 54 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.03
Cap 12 240x60
m = 54 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.05
Cap 12 240x120
m = 106 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.04
12
Cover Profile Al Cover Profile 12 Al seals the grooves of the profile side
faces so that they are dust-proof and easy to clean.
Electric cables running along the groove of Profile 12
can thus be protected and installed out of sight.
Cover Profile 12 Al
Al, anodized
m = 62 g/m
13
Cover Profile A profile made of flexible plastic designed for two

different applications:
As a Cover Profile, it seals the profile grooves and
thereby prevents heavy soiling.
With the open side facing outwards, it serves as a
panel-fixing profile for panel elements that are thus
held securely in the broad profile groove.
It is available in two material specifications:
black and natural (opaque).
Cover Profile 12
PP/TPE
m = 58 g/m
14
Standard- Right-angled, power-locking connections of Profiles 12

with high-strength and minimum processing
Fastening Set requirement.
The standard connecting plate ensures optimum load
application, with the profiles being correctly fixed relative
to each other.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 136 431
The required M12 thread can be tapped directly into the

core bore of Profiles 12.
Position of the through holes for Key 8 A/F.
The standard connecting plates can be arranged in the

required direction to match the way in which the profiles
are fitted.
Large profiles with high load-bearing capabilities are
connected using a larger number of Standard Fasteners.
Standard connecting plate 12, St, bright zinc-plated
M = 80 Nm
m = 70 g
1 set 0.0.003.35
15
Universal- For universal power-lock connection of all profiles of

Line 12. Suitable for profiles which need to be moved
Fastening Set subsequently, since only one profile is processed. These
Fastening Sets can be installed easily into existing
constructions.
Innovation
German patent
34 38 773
The tightening torque for the screw (M = 80 Nm) is

applied using L-Key 8 A/F.
Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 (Art. No.:

0.0.014.03) is available for machining the profiles.

pairs.
Universal Fastener 12, die-cast zinc, bright zinc-plated
Washer DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-plated
M = 80 Nm
m = 155 g
1 set 0.0.003.57
16
Automatic- For universal power-lock connection of all profiles of

Line 12. Suitable for profiles which need to be moved
Fastening Set subsequently, since the Fasteners are only screwed into
one profile. These Fastening Sets can be installed easily
into existing constructions. The profiles do not need to
be machined in order to use the Automatic-Fastening Sets.
Innovation
German patent
and foreign patent
EP 0 458 069

is recommended.
Note: All Fasteners with a clearance bore for the
fastening screw have a counter-clockwise thread on the
outside in order to prevent the Fastener twisting when
the screw is being tightened.
L-Key 6 A/F (Order No.: 0.0.007.01) is available for

tightening the screws of the Automatic-Fastening Set
(tightening torque M = 34 Nm).
With Automatic-Fastening Set 12, twisting can be

prevented by screwing out the Fastener (after the profile
has been assembled) until the head of the Fastener
projects into the other profile groove.
Automatic-Fastening Set should always be used in pairs.
Automatic Fastener 12, St, bright zinc-plated
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M8x60, St,
bright zinc-plated
s = 8 A/F
M = 34 Nm
m = 125 g
1 set 0.0.003.50
17
Angle Bracket For power-lock connection (without machining) between

profiles, reinforcing profile connections or fastening a
12 Zn range of components to profiles.
The anti-torsion lugs, which can be broken off, also
enable fastening on surfaces without grooves.
When used to reinforce the joints of large profiles,

several Angle Brackets can be used in parallel.
The load-bearing capacity must be checked to determine

whether both conditions are met.
Angle Bracket 12 60x60 Zn F < 2000 N ^ Fxl < 100 Nm
Angle Bracket 12 120x120 Zn F < 4000 N ^ Fxl < 250 Nm
Note: Ensure the maximum permissible tensile load on

the Profile Groove is not exceeded!

m = 350 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.20

PA-GF, black
m = 20 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.06
Angle Bracket Set 12 60x60

m = 520 g
1 set 0.0.003.53
18

m = 900 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.21

PA-GF, black
m = 40 g
1 pce. 0.0.005.07
Angle Bracket Set 12 120x120

m = 1.2 kg
1 set 0.0.003.54
19
Universal-Butt- The Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets can be used to

connect the end faces of two profiles from Line 12.
Fastening Sets
Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets should always be used in
pairs. Depending on the profile size and load, several
pairs may be necessary.
Connection processing of the profiles is the same as for

the Universal-Fastening Sets.
2 Universal Fasteners 12, die-cast zinc, bright zinc-plated
1 washer DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-plated
1 Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M12, St, bright zinc-plated
M = 80 Nm
m = 200 g
1 set 0.0.003.61
20
Automatic Butt- The Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets can be used to

connect the end faces of two profiles from Line 12
Fastening Sets without mechanical processing.
Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets should always be used in
pairs. Depending on the profile size and load, several
pairs may be necessary.

is recommended.
tightened.
Additional anti-torsion protection can be provided by

driving the Fastener with internal thread into the profile
so that the end of the Fastener remains proud and
projects into the groove opposite. The Fastener with
through bore must be screwed in the appropriate
distance.
L-Key 6 A/F (Order No.: 0.0.007.01) is available for

tightening the screws of the Automatic-Fastening Set
(tightening torque M = 34 Nm).

s = 8 A/F
M = 34 Nm
m = 140 g
1 set 0.0.003.51
21
New Products 04/2003 2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements
Base Plates/ The Base Plates/Transport Plates can be screwed in the

core bores in the end faces of the profiles and in
Transport Plates combination with T-Slot Nuts to the grooves of the
profile sides.
Threads of different diameters accommodate ring bolts,
adjustable feet, castors and other elements.
GD-Zn, black

m = 800 g
1 set 0.0.007.34

m = 800 g
1 set 0.0.007.37

m = 1.2 kg
1 set 0.0.007.40

m = 1.55 kg
1 set 0.0.007.43
22
T-Slot Nuts St T-Slot Nuts St - designed for fixing parts or for use in
fastening applications.
The anti-torsion block in the groove makes precise
alignment in the profile groove easier.
T-Slot Nuts St are inserted into the profile groove where

they are secured in position by means of spring-loaded
balls.
T-Slot Nut 12 St M6
Mmax. = 14 Nm Fmax. = 3,500 N
m = 31 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.72
T-Slot Nut 12 St M8
Mmax. = 34 Nm Fmax. = 6,000 N *
m = 33 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.63
T-Slot Nut 12 St M10

Mmax. = 46 Nm Fmax. = 10,000 N *
m = 35 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.64
T-Slot Nut 12 St M12

Mmax. = 80 Nm Fmax. = 10,000 N *
m = 38 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.65
maximal zulässige
* maximum Belastbarkeit
load achievable der Profilnut
in standard Profile auf
only.Zug beachten!
Check profile properties if using Profile Light!
23
T-Slot Nuts T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty, can be used for very heavy-
duty fastening applications.
St, heavy-duty
Since their cross-section is adapted to the groove
shape, tensile forces are guided into the aluminium
profile.
They also have more supporting threads than the
turn-to-insert T-Slot Nuts and thus allow greater screw
tightening torques.
T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty are inserted into the profile

groove in the end face where they are secured in
position by means of a thrust finger.

Mmax. = 34 Nm Fmax. = 6,000 N *
m = 45 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.66

Mmax. = 65 Nm Fmax. = 10,000 N *
m = 47 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.67

Mmax. = 100 Nm Fmax. = 10,000 N *
m = 50 g
1 pce. 0.0.003.68
* maximum load achievable

maximal zulässige in standard
Belastbarkeit Profile auf
der Profilnut only.Zug beachten!
Check profile properties if using Profile Light!
24
Profile Bars Profile Bars with the cross-section shapes of the T-Slot
Nuts. They can be machined as required and are used to
produce application-specific fastening elements.
The Profile Bar St can be turned into the profile groove.

The Profile Bar St, heavy-duty is inserted into the profile
groove in the end face.
Profile Bar 12 St
m = 600 g
1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.003.74
Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-duty

m = 840 g
1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.003.75
25
New Products 04/2003 3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts
Adapter Profile A special aluminium Adapter Profile, also available in

the form of pre-drilled Adapters made from it, for
fastening various attachments from Line 8 onto Profile
Groove 12.
Hinges, heavy-duty hinges, multiblocks and many other
elements are equipped with anti-torsion elements and
centring aids that are oriented to the Profile 8 groove.
These can also be attached to Line 12 profiles using Ad-
apters 12/8 without losing the centring effect.
Adapters 12/8 already have through holes in the modular
dimensions of Line 8. Further machining is not required.
Application example:
Connecting a Hinge 8 40x40, heavy duty with Profile 12
using Adapter 12/8 Al-40.
The anti-torsion elements of the heavy duty Hinge in the
groove remain effective.
Hinge 8 40x40,
heavy-duty
Adapter 12/8 Al-40
T-Slot Nut 12 St M8
Profile 12 60x60
Adapter Profile 12/8 Al

Al, anodized
m = 75 g/m
Adapter 12/8 Al-40

Al, anodized
m=3g
1 pce., natural 0.0.003.92
Adapter 12/8 Al-80

Al, anodized
m=6g
1 pce., natural 0.0.003.93
26
New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools
Step Drill Special drill designed to produce the countersink for

Universal-Fastening Sets and Universal-Butt-Fastening
Sets 12. This tool is intended solely for use in pillar
drills. It drills the centring hole and counterbore into the
side faces of Profiles 12 in a single pass.
Note:
Machining of the profiles with the Step Drill must be
performed on a pillar drill with a suitable taper mount
MT3 or using suitable reducing adapters, e.g. MT4/
MT3. It is important to ensure that the profiles are
securely clamped!

Shaft: MT3
m = 550 g
1 pce. 0.0.014.03
27
Keys Ball-Headed Key for fitting screws effortlessly in all

types of fastening elements.
L-Key is particularly suitable for tightening the screws of
Universal and Automatic Connections.
Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-plated

Handle, PA/TPE, red/black

a = 268 mm
b = 150 mm
c = 8 A/F
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.480.34

a = 271 mm
b = 150 mm
c = 10 A/F
m = 211 g
1 pce. 0.0.480.35

Handle, PA/TPE, red/black

a = 330 mm
b = 295 mm
c = 8 A/F
m = 200 g
1 pce. 0.0.480.36

a = 330 mm
b = 295 mm
c = 10 A/F
m = 320 g
1 pce. 0.0.480.37
28
L-Key 6 A/F
a = 200 mm
b = 160 mm
c = 6 A/F
m = 150 g
1 pce. 0.0.007.01
L-Key 8 A/F
a = 300 mm
b = 200 mm
c = 8 A/F
m = 300 g
1 pce. 0.0.007.12
29
Screwdriver Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ enables the use of a torque

key with ½“ square drive to check the tightening torques
Socket of Standard and Universal Connections 12.
Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“

Chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-plated
m = 200 g
1 pce. 0.0.007.47
30
New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services
Saw Cuts Square and burr-minimised saw cuts (tolerances to DIN

ISO 2768 - mK).
The saw cut required for the cut-off is specified
individually for each profile in the price list.
Saw Cut for Small Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.026.30
Saw Cut for Medium Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.026.66
Saw Cut for Large Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.265.55
Saw Cut for Oversize Cross-Sections

1 pce. 0.0.475.31
Connection Profile processing for Standard or Universal

Connections. The position of the bores and threads must
Processing, End be specified when ordering.
Face

1 pce. 0.0.015.01
31
New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services
Connection
Processing,
Drilled Hole

1 pce. 0.0.015.02
Connection
Processing,
Stepped Bore

(Stepped bore for Universal Connection 12)
1 pce. 0.0.015.03
32
A Adapter 12/8 Al -40 27
Adapter 12/8 Al -80 27
Adapter Profile 12/8 Al 27
Angle Bracket 12 60x60 Zn 18
Angle Bracket 12 120x120 Zn 19
Angle Bracket 12 Zn 18
Angle Bracket Cap 12 60x60 18
Angle Bracket Cap 12 120x120 19
Angle Bracket Set 12 60x60 18
Angle Bracket Set 12 120x120 19
Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 12 21
Automatic-Fastening Set 12 17
B Ball-Headed Key 8 A/F 29

Ball-Headed Key 10 A/F 29
Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x60, M12 22
C Cap 12 60x60 12
Cap 12 120x60 12
Cap 12 120x120 12
Cap 12 240x60 12
Cap 12 240x120 12
Caps 12 12
Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D11.5 32
Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M12x30 31
Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D30x24 32
Cover Profile 12 14
Cover Profile 12 14
Cover Profile 12 Al 13
K Key with T-Handle 8 A/F 29

Key with T-Handle 10 A/F 29
L L-Key 6 A/F 29
L-Key 8 A/F 29
P Profile 12 60x60 10
Profile 12 120x60 10
Profile 12 120x120 10
Profile 12 240x60 11
Profile 12 240x120 11
33
P Profile Bar 12 St 25
Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-duty 25
Profiles 12 10
S Saw Cuts 31
Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ 30
Standard-Fastening Set 12 15
Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 28
T T-Slot Nut 12 St M6 23
T-Slot Nut 12 St M8 23
T-Slot Nut 12 St M8, heavy-duty 24
U Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 12 20
Universal-Fastening Set 12 16
34

1 pce. 0.4.110.22

1 pce. 0.4.110.27

1 pce. 0.4.111.14

1 pce. 0.4.111.37

1 pce. 0.4.411.60

1 pce. 0.4.111.86
CD-ROM MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international

1 pce. 0.5.000.67
CD-ROM MB Building Kit System Comprehensive

Catalogue in pdf format
1 pce. 0.4.111.84
D-42699 Solingen
Made in Germany
Postbox 12 01 64
D-42676 Solingen
Phone +49/212/65 80-300
0.4.111.96 05/2003
Fax +49/212/65 80-310


Item

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Item

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MB Building Kit System

PDF- Catalog »item MB Building Kit System«

Adobe Acrobat Instruction

Key to page layout

6. Special Elements 6.5 Work Bench Design

Functional drawing(s) and additional

The product photograph shows

The Line symbols provide Parts Container 80x40

Parts Container 120x40

1st column: 3rd column: 4th column:

Phone +49/212/65 80-300

Handles and Locks

Page 68 Page 72 Page 75

Page 86 Page 89 Page 96 Page 97 Page 100

Page 106 Page 108 Page 110 Page 112

Page 137 Page 140 Page 141

Page 159 Page 161 Page 161

Page 232 Page 234 Page 235

Page 241 Page 242 Page 243

Page 248 Page 250 Page 251

Page 253 Page 256 Page 257 Page 257

Page 259 Page 260 Page 262

Page 305 Page 308 Page 309

Page 327 Page 328

Page 338 Page 340 Page 341

Page 434 Page 433 Page 433

Page 437 Page 438 Page 442 Page 443

Grips (Handles and Locks)

Angle Elements (Basic Elements)

Aluminium profiles (Basic Elements)

Fasteners (Basic Elements)

Hinges, Heavy Duty (Basic Elements)

Angled/Flat Profiles (Basic Elements) Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)

Anti-Vibration Inserts (Floor Elements)

Floor Fastener (Floor Elements)

Conveyor Rollers (Special Elements)

Conduits (Installation Elements)

Panels (Panel Elements)

Roller Guides (Dynamic Elements)

C-Rail (Dynamic Elements)

Security Limit Switch (Special Elements)

Hinges (Fastening Elements)

Grips (Handles and Locks)

Locking Systems (Handles and Locks)

Sealing Profiles (Fastening Elements)

Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements)

Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)

Hangers (Fastening Elements)

Light Fittings (Special Elements) Sockets (Installation Elements)

Caps (Basic Elements)

Rests (Special Elements)

Runners (Special Elements)

Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements) Table Tops (Panel Elements)

Fasteners (Basic Elements)

Parts Containers (Special Elements) TRIGO 272 Work Bench

Service Spectrum Numerous local service centres provide users with a

International With branches, sales partners and a comprehensive

> Hungary 3 Japan

> Italy 7 Spain

3 Workpiece carrier transport system

11 Fully automatic station for

Enclosure and Guard